JP2018117850A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To increase an interest in a game in a game machine.SOLUTION: A game machine comprises: game control means which controls execution of a game; a variable winning device which has an opening/closing member changeable in an open state and a closed state and is controlled by the game control means; performance control means which controls a game performance; and a decorative movable member which is movable between a first position and a second position and controlled by the performance control means. The decorative movable member is moved from the first position to the second position when the opening/closing member of the variable winning device is changed from the closed state to the open state, and is moved from the second position to the first position when the opening/closing member of the variable winning device is changed from the open state to the closed state.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 131

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state that gives a gaming value advantageous to a player.

  In a conventional pachinko gaming machine, a game is executed based on a winning at a start winning opening arranged in a gaming area, and when the result of the game is in a specific result mode, a special game that gives a player a gaming value It is common for a condition to occur.

  As such a gaming machine, there is a gaming machine provided with a right channel that can roll in the lateral direction in order to show the movement of the game ball flowing down the right channel of the display device arranged in the center. Yes (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2014-45878 A

  However, in the above gaming machine, the position of the display device and the variable winning device is separated, so that during the big hit, the player's line of sight movement is large in order to confirm the display contents and the open state of the variable winning device, There is a risk that the interest of the game will be reduced by missing the effect displayed on the screen.

  SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION An object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that reduces the player's line-of-sight movement and improves the interest of the game.

  In a typical embodiment of the present invention, in a gaming machine capable of imparting a gaming value to a player based on a game result, game control means for controlling the execution of the game, and convertible between an open state and a closed state A variable prize-winning device controlled by the game control means, an effect control means for controlling the effect of the game, and movable between a first position and a second position, A decorative movable member controlled by the effect control means, and the decorative movable member is moved from the first position to the second position when the opening / closing member of the variable prize apparatus is changed from the closed state to the open state. When the open / close member of the variable prize apparatus moves from the open state to the closed state, the variable winning device moves from the second position to the first position.

  According to one embodiment of the present invention, the interest of games can be improved.

It is the perspective view which looked at the gaming machine from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is a perspective view of a game board unit and a control device unit, which are main components of the gaming machine. It is a disassembled perspective view of a control apparatus unit. It is a front view of the control device unit in which each movable accessory is operating or in an operating position. It is a disassembled perspective view of a 1st movable accessory unit. It is a front view of the 1st movable accessory unit in which the 1st movable accessory is in an initial position. It is a front view of the 1st movable combination unit in which the 1st movable combination is in an operation position. It is a disassembled perspective view of a 2nd movable accessory unit. It is a rear view of a 2nd movable accessory unit. It is a top view of a 2nd movable accessory unit. It is a disassembled perspective view of a 3rd movable accessory unit. It is a top view of a 3rd movable accessory unit. It is a time chart explaining an example of operation timing of the 2nd movable combination and the 3rd movable combination. It is a time chart explaining another example of operation timing of the 2nd movable combination and the 3rd movable combination. It is a time chart explaining an example of the operation timing of the 2nd movable combination after electric support, and the 3rd movable combination. It is a front view of the game board explaining operation | movement of a right-handed period, a 2nd movable combination, and a 3rd movable combination. It is a disassembled perspective view of a 4th movable accessory unit. It is a rear view of the raising / lowering unit in which an raising / lowering unit exists in an initial position. It is a rear view of the raising / lowering unit in which an raising / lowering unit exists in an operation position. It is a rear view of the 4th movable accessory back base in which an raising / lowering unit is in an initial position. It is a rear view of the 4th movable accessory back base in which an raising / lowering unit exists in an operation position. It is a figure explaining an example of the light emission mode of a light-guide plate. It is an expanded sectional view of a light-guide plate. It is an expanded sectional view of another example of a light-guide plate. It is a figure explaining the case where two light-guide plates are provided. It is a front view of two light-guide plates. It is a front view of the 1st light-guide plate explaining the light emission aspect when light-emitting LED sequentially in the vertical direction. It is a front view of the 2nd light-guide plate explaining the light emission aspect when light-emitting LED sequentially in a horizontal direction. It is a figure explaining the magnitude | size of the refractive part provided in a light-guide plate. It is a front view of a game board in the state where the 2nd light guide plate has emitted light entirely. It is a disassembled perspective view of a 5th movable accessory unit. It is a front view of the 5th movable accessory unit in which the 5th movable accessory is in an initial position. It is a front view of the 5th movable combination unit in which the 5th movable combination is in an operation position. It is a front view of another 5th movable accessory unit in which the 5th movable accessory is in an initial position. It is a front view of another example 5th movable accessory unit in which the 5th movable accessory is in the 1st state. It is a front view of another example 5th movable accessory unit in which the 5th movable accessory is in the 2nd state. It is a figure explaining an example of the shape of the arm tip part of the 2nd arm. It is a time chart explaining an example of the operation timing of the left-handed instruction effect and the fifth movable accessory. It is a time chart explaining the operation | movement timing of a predetermined | prescribed effect and a 5th movable accessory. It is a front view of the game board immediately after the electric support state. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the game control system of a gaming machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the presentation control system of a gaming machine. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the first half part of a main process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the latter half part of a main process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a checksum calculation process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of an initial value random number update process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of an input process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a switch reading process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of an output process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a payout command transmission process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the random number update process 1. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the random number update process 2. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a winning opening switch / state monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a fraud & winning prize monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a winning number counter update process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a starting port error monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a gaming machine state check process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a payout busy signal check process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure game processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a start port switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a hard random number acquisition process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure start port switch common process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure pending | holding information determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a prefetch big hit determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a big winning opening switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure normal process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure 1 fluctuation start process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure 2 fluctuation | variation start process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a big hit flag 1 setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a big hit flag 2 setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a big hit determination process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure 1 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure 2 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure information setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of 2 byte distribution processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of distribution processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a fluctuation | variation start information setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure change process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure display process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the process setting process 1 during a fanfare / interval. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a fanfare / interval process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the process during big prize opening opening. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a big winning opening residual ball process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a big hit end process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the big hit end setting process 1. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the big hit end setting process 2. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the big hit end setting process 3. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of an effect command setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a symbol fluctuation | variation control process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a usual game process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a gate switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a general power prize winning switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a usual figure normal process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a process change setting process during a common figure change. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the process during usual figure change. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the process during normal map display. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the process during a common figure. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a general electric operation transfer setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a general electric power residual ball process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the end process per common figure. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a segment LED edit process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a magnet fraud monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a board radio wave fraud monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the first half part of an external information edit process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the latter half part of an external information edit process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a main prize ball signal edit process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a start port signal edit process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the main process (main program) performed by the production control device. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a received command check process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a received command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a fluctuation type command process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a fluctuation production setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a jackpot command processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a symbol type command process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a single command processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of prefetch symbol type command processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a prefetch fluctuation system command process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a decoration control process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a light-guide plate control process. It is a table | surface of the sound which arises from the operation speed of the drive source of the modification 1 of 1st Embodiment, and the whole accessory. It is a figure which shows the magnitude | size of the sound which arises from the rotational speed of the motor of the modification 1 of 1st Embodiment, the rotational speed of a gear, the operating speed of an accessory, and each part. It is a figure explaining the production | presentation content in the reach variation of the modification 1 of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure explaining the production | presentation content in the pseudo | simulation continuous production (pseudo continuous production) of the modification 1 of 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the modification 2 of 1st Embodiment. It is a disassembled perspective view of the game board unit of the modification 2 of 1st Embodiment. It is a side view of the colored light transmission board of the modification 2 of 1st Embodiment, and a 2nd movable accessory. It is a front view of the periphery of a display device and a colored translucent plate of Modification 2 of the first embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the modification 3 of 1st Embodiment. It is an enlarged front view of the right side center part of the game board in the special variation prize-winning apparatus of the modification 4 of 1st Embodiment in a closed state. It is an enlarged front view of the right side center part of the game board in the special variation prize-winning apparatus of the modification 4 of 1st Embodiment in an open state. It is an enlarged front view of the opening / closing door except the decoration of the cherry blossom of the modification 4 of 1st Embodiment. It is an enlarged front view of the right side center part of the game board in the special variation prize-winning apparatus of the modification 4 of 1st Embodiment in a closed state. It is an enlarged front view of the right side center part of the game board in the special variation prize-winning apparatus of the modification 4 of 1st Embodiment in an open state. It is a disassembled perspective view of the 3rd movable accessory unit of the modification 5 of 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the modification 5 of 1st Embodiment. It is a perspective view of the drive system of the decoration rotary body of another example of the modification 5 of 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of another example of the modification 5 of 1st Embodiment.

(First embodiment)
DESCRIPTION OF EXEMPLARY EMBODIMENTS Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the invention will be described with reference to the drawings. Note that front, rear, left, and right in the description of the gaming machine refer to directions viewed from the player who is playing the game.

[Overall view of gaming machine]
FIG. 1 is a diagram illustrating a gaming machine.

  The gaming machine 10 includes an opening / closing frame attached to a frame 11 fixed to the island facility so as to be freely opened and closed through a hinge. The open / close frame includes a front frame 12 (main body frame) and a glass frame 15.

  A game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is disposed on the front frame 12, and a glass frame 15 having a cover glass 14 covering the front surface of the game board 30 is attached. The cover glass 14 functions as a game viewing area in which a game area 32 (see FIG. 2) formed on the game board 30 is visible.

  The front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 can be opened individually. For example, the game area 32 of the game board 30 can be accessed by opening only the glass frame 15. Further, by opening the front frame 12 in a state where the glass frame 15 is not opened, it is possible to access the game control device (main board) 100 (see FIG. 42) and the like disposed on the back side of the game board 30. Can do.

  Various frame constituent members are disposed on the edge portion of the glass frame 15 around the cover glass 14.

  At the upper center and the left side of the glass frame 15, decoration devices 18a and 18b capable of producing a light emission according to the gaming state are arranged. The decoration devices 18a and 18b house lighting members such as LEDs inside, and perform a light emission effect according to the gaming state. The illumination members disposed inside these decoration devices 18a and 18b constitute a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 43).

  Upper speakers 19a are respectively disposed in the upper right corner portion and the upper left corner portion of the glass frame 15. Apart from these upper speakers 19a, two lower speakers 19b are provided at the lower part of the gaming machine 10. The lower speaker 19 b is disposed in the lower left corner portion of the glass frame 15 and the lower right corner portion of the front frame 12. The upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b emit sound effects, alarm sounds, notification sounds, and the like.

  On the right side of the glass frame 15, a projecting effect unit 13 that extends in the vertical direction of the gaming machine 10 and projects toward the front (player side) is disposed. The protrusion effect unit 13 is an effect device that performs a light emission effect or the like according to the progress of the game. The illumination member disposed inside the projecting effect unit 13 also constitutes a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 43).

  An upper plate unit having an upper plate 21 capable of storing game balls is attached to the lower portion of the glass frame 15. The upper plate 21 is formed in a box shape whose upper surface is open. The game balls stored in the upper plate 21 are supplied to a ball launcher (not shown) one by one.

  The upper plate unit further includes an effect operation device that receives an input operation from the player, a ball lending operation device that receives an input operation from the player, and a decoration device 22 that performs a light emission effect or the like according to the game state. .

  The effect operation device is an operation device in which the touch panel 25b is incorporated in the effect button 25, and is provided in the upper center of the upper plate unit so that the player can easily operate.

  When the player operates the effect operation device, it is possible to perform an effect in which the player's operation is intervened in a special figure variation display game or the like displayed on the display device 41 (see FIG. 2). For example, it is possible to select an effect pattern (effect mode), or to execute a notice effect in advance for notifying the result of the variable display game corresponding to the start memory. It should be noted that the variable display game includes a special figure variable display game, and when the variable display game is simply used, in this specification, the special figure variable display game is indicated.

  Further, the effect pattern may be changed not only while the variable display game is being executed, but also when the player operates the effect operation device during non-execution.

  Note that the gaming state when the variable display game is executed includes a plurality of gaming states. The normal gaming state (normal state) is a gaming state in which no special gaming state has occurred. In addition, the special gaming state is, for example, a state where a specific game state is a short-time state or a state where a probability of a special result (for example, big hit) is high (probability change state, probability change state), big hit state (special game state) ).

  Here, the probability variation state (specific game state) is one that continues until the next big hit (loop type), one that continues until a predetermined number of variable display games are executed (number-of-times type, ST), and There are things that continue until a predetermined probability falling lottery is won (falling lottery type).

  In addition, whether or not to generate a probable change state is not determined by the big hit symbol random number, it is possible to always generate a probable change state when a big hit occurs, or provide a winning device equipped with a specific area, etc. The probability variation state may be generated when a game ball passes through the area.

  The ball lending operation device is an operation device that is operated when a player borrows a game ball, and is provided on the upper right side of the upper plate unit. The ball lending operation device includes a ball lending button 27, a return button 28, and a balance display unit 26. The ball lending button 27 is a button operated by the player when borrowing a game ball, and the return button 28 is used when discharging a prepaid card or the like from a card unit (not shown) arranged adjacent to the gaming machine 10. It is a button operated by the player. The balance display unit 26 is a display area in which a balance such as a prepaid card is displayed.

  The decoration device 22 houses an illumination member such as an LED and performs a light emission effect or the like according to the gaming state, and is provided at the front portion of the upper plate unit. The illumination member arranged inside the decoration device 22 constitutes a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4).

  An operation handle 24 for controlling the operation of a ball launcher (not shown) and a game ball can be stored below the glass frame 15 including the above-described upper plate unit and the like, and below the front frame 12. A lower plate 23 is provided.

  The operation handle 24 is disposed at the lower right portion of the front frame 12 and below the lower speaker 19b on the right side. When the player rotates the operation handle 24, the ball launcher launches the game ball supplied from the upper plate 21 to the game area 32 of the game board 30. The firing speed of the game ball launched from the ball launcher is set so as to increase as the amount of rotation of the operation handle 24 increases. In other words, the ball launching device can change the launching force (speed) at which the game ball is launched into the game area in accordance with the operation of the operation handle 24 by the player, and can play the game in various launching modes having different firing forces. Can fire a ball. In the firing mode, a left-hand hit (normal hit) in which the game ball flows down on the left side of the game area 32 and a right-hand hit (a special hit that strikes with a higher firing force than the normal hit) in which the game ball flows down on the right side of the game area 32 are provided. Is included.

  The lower plate 23 is disposed below the upper plate unit at a predetermined interval with respect to the upper plate unit. The lower plate 23 includes a ball punching hole 23a that penetrates the bottom surface of the lower plate 23 in the vertical direction, and an opening / closing operation unit 23b for opening and closing the ball punching hole 23a. When the player operates the opening / closing operation portion 23b to open the ball hole 23a, the game ball stored in the lower plate 23 can be discharged to the outside through the ball hole 23a.

[Game board]
Next, the gaming board 30 of the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 30 provided in the gaming machine 10.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 30 includes a plate-like game board main body 30a serving as an attachment base for various members. The game board main body 30a is made of wooden or synthetic resin such as acrylic or plastic, and a game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31 is provided on the front surface of the game board main body 30a. The gaming machine 10 is configured to play a game by firing a game ball from a ball launching device in a game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31. In the game area 32, windmills, obstacle nails, and the like are arranged as members for changing the flow direction of the game ball. The shot game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by these members. When the game board main body 30a is formed of a transmissive and translucent material, a part of the game board main body 30a may be formed of a transparent member. The configuration becomes visible.

  At a substantial center of the game area 32, a center case (game effect component) 40 is attached that forms a window portion that becomes a display area of the variable display game. A display device 41 is arranged behind the window formed in the center case 40 as an effect display device (variable display device) that variably displays (variably displays) a plurality of identification information. The display device 41 includes, for example, a liquid crystal display, and is arranged so that display contents can be viewed from the front side of the game board 30 through the window portion of the center case 40. Note that the display device 41 is not limited to the one provided with a liquid crystal display, and may be provided with a display such as an EL or a CRT.

  The display screen (display unit) of the display device 41 is provided with a plurality of variable display areas, and identification information (special symbols) and characters that produce a variable display game are displayed in each variable display area. In addition, an image based on the progress of the game (a jackpot display, a fanfare display, an ending display, etc.) is displayed on the display screen.

  The center case 40 has an inflow port 40a to the warp passage 40e for guiding the game balls flowing down the game area 32 to the inside of the center case 40, and a stage on which the game balls that have passed through the warp passage 40e can roll. Part 40b. Since the stage portion 40b of the center case 40 is disposed above the start winning port unit 101 including the first start winning port 36 and the third start winning port 42, the game ball that has rolled on the stage portion 40b is the first. It is easy to win the first start winning opening 36 and the third starting winning opening 42.

  At the upper part of the center case 40, an upper effect unit 40c is provided. The upper effect unit 40c (which may be a movable accessory) constitutes a part of the board decoration device 46 (see FIG. 43) and the board effect device 44 (see FIG. 43).

  In the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40, a six-stage channel 40d for switching the game ball six times to the left and right is provided, and a general winning opening 35 is provided at the top of the six-stage channel 40d. In addition, a special variable winning device 39 is arranged in the middle of the six-stage flow path 40d and on the left side of the fifth stage, and a normal symbol start gate (normal figure start gate) is located at the bottom of the six-stage flow path 40d. 34 is provided. A gate switch (SW) 34a (see FIG. 42) for detecting a game ball that has passed through the general diagram start gate 34 is provided inside the general diagram start gate 34. When the game ball that has been driven into the game area 32 passes through the usual figure start gate 34, the usual figure variation display game is executed.

  The special variable winning device 39 is a winning device that opens and closes to the left and right about the lower portion of the opening and closing member 39c as an axis by a large winning opening solenoid 39b (see FIG. 42). The special variable winning device 39 converts the state where the special winning opening is closed (blocking state unfavorable for the player) from the closed state (special game state advantageous to the player) according to the result of the special figure changing display game, A predetermined game value (prize ball) is given to the player by facilitating the flow of the game ball into the mouth. In addition, a count switch 39a (see FIG. 42) is arranged in the special winning opening as a detecting means for detecting a game ball that has entered the special winning opening.

  In the game area 32 on the lower left side of the center case 40, two general winning ports 35 are arranged. The winning of a game ball in the general winning opening 35 is detected by winning opening switches (SW) 35a to 35n (see FIG. 42) provided in the general winning opening 35.

  In the game area 32 below the center case 40, a start winning port unit 820 is provided. Below the start winning port unit 820, a first start winning port 36 (first start winning region, start port 1) that gives a start condition (starting condition) of the special figure 1 variable display game when a game ball wins a prize. And a third start winning opening 42 (third start winning area, start opening 3) for giving a start condition (starting condition) for the special figure 2 variable display game when the game ball wins.

  The start winning port unit 820 is configured to distribute the game balls that have entered from the common entrance 823 by the winning switching mechanism 825 and to alternately win the first starting winning port 36 and the third starting winning port 42. A known mechanism (for example, described in JP-A-2015-36026 and JP-A-2015-77230) can be used as the winning switch mechanism 825. The winning switching mechanism 825 constitutes an area changing unit that changes the winning area.

  The winning switching mechanism 825 distributes the game balls that have entered from the common entrance 823 of the start winning opening unit 820 to the left side (first starting winning opening 36 side) and the right side (third starting winning opening 42 side), and the start winning opening unit. 820 is caused to flow down. The game ball is more likely to flow into the common entrance 823 of the start winning port unit 820 when the left hand is made to flow down the game ball on the left side of the game area 32 than when the right hand is hit.

  The winning switch mechanism 825 includes a rotating member that rotates about the rotation axis with respect to the start winning port unit 820, and a stopper member that stops the rotation of the rotating member. The rotating member has three extending portions extending in three directions from the rotating shaft. By three extending portions, there is an L-shaped storage portion that stores a game ball that flows down to the first start winning port 36, and an L-shaped storage portion that stores a game ball that flows down to the third start winning port 42. It is formed.

  The winning switch mechanism 825 alternately rotates the rotating member between the left side and the right side, and alternately switches the starting winning port for winning the game ball to the first starting winning port 36 and the third starting winning port 42. As long as there is no error, the game balls that have entered the common entrance 823 of the start winning unit 820 are alternately turned to the left side (first start winning port 36 side) and right side (third start winning port 42 side) by the winning switching mechanism 825. Thus, the first start winning opening 36 and the third starting winning opening 42 are alternately won (entered).

  In the game area 32 on the right side of the center case 40, a second start winning opening (start condition) for giving a start condition (start condition) for the special figure 2 variable display game based on the winning of the game ball, below the normal figure start gate 34. A normal variation winning device 37 having a second start winning area) is provided. The normal variation winning device 37 includes an opening / closing member (movable member) 37b that is converted into a state in which a game ball easily flows by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side tilts to the right side. When the opening / closing member (movable member) 37b is in the closed state, the game ball cannot win the normal variation winning device 37. When the game ball wins the first start winning port 36, the second start winning port (ordinary variable winning device 37), or the third start winning port 42, a special figure variation display game is executed as an auxiliary game. .

  The opening / closing member (movable member) 37b is a so-called electric-chu-type ordinary electric accessory, and when the result of the normal-variation display game becomes a predetermined stop display mode, the general-purpose solenoid 37c (see FIG. 42) is used. And the game ball is changed to an open state in which the game ball easily flows into the normal variation winning device 37 (a winning easy state advantageous to the player).

  The movable member 37b is controlled by a game control device 100 described later. The game control device 100 increases the frequency of occurrence of an easy-to-win state by shortening the variation time of the normal variation display game or setting the probability of hitting the general variation display game to be higher than usual. By making the generation time of the easy winning state longer than the easy winning state generated in the above, a short time state (general power support state) is generated as the above-mentioned specific gaming state. Note that even in the probability change state (excluding the latent probability change state) as the specific game state, a short time state (the ordinary power support state) occurs.

  Next, the flow of the game in the gaming machine 10, the details of the general map variation display game and the special map variation display game will be described.

  In the gaming machine 10, a game is played by launching a game ball from a ball launcher (not shown) toward the game area 32. The launched game balls flow down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by obstacle nails, windmills, etc. arranged in various places in the game area 32, and the normal start gate 34, the general winning opening 35, the first start Wins the winning port 36, the third start winning port 42, the normal variation winning device 37, or the special variable winning device 39, or flows into the out port 30b provided at the bottom of the gaming area 32 and is discharged from the gaming area 32 Is done. When a game ball wins the general winning opening 35, the first starting winning opening 36, the third starting winning opening 42, the normal variable winning apparatus 37, or the special variable winning apparatus 39, the number corresponding to the type of the winning opening that has been won The prize balls are discharged to the upper plate 21 through the payout device.

  The normal start gate 34 is provided with a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 42) for detecting a game ball that has passed the normal start gate 34. When the game ball passes through the normal start gate 34, it is detected by the gate switch 34a, and the normal variation display game is executed based on the determination result of the random number value for hit determination extracted at this time.

  A state in which the normal map variable display game cannot be started, for example, when the normal map variable display game has already been executed and the normal map variable display game has not ended, or the result of the normal map variable display game is normal When the variable winning device 37 has been converted to the open state, when the game ball passes the normal start gate 34, if the normal start memory number is less than the upper limit number, the stored number is added (+1).

  In the normal map start memory, a random number value for hit determination for determining the hit error of the normal map fluctuation display game is stored, and when this hit determination random number value coincides with the determination value, the normal map change display is performed. A specific result mode (specific result) is derived by winning the game.

  The universal map display game is executed by a universal map display 53 provided in the collective display device 50. The general-purpose indicator 53 is composed of LEDs indicating normal identification information (general-purpose) in the lit state and indicating a shift in the unlit state, and the normal identification information varies by blinking this LED. Display is performed, and after a predetermined fluctuation display time has elapsed, the result is displayed by turning on or off the LED.

  When the common figure random number value extracted when passing through the common figure start gate 34 is a winning value, the normal symbol displayed on the universal figure display unit 53 stops in a hit state and enters a hit state. At this time, when the general-purpose solenoid 37c (see FIG. 42) is driven, the movable member 37b is converted into an open state for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds), and the game ball to the normal variation winning device 37 is converted. Winning is allowed.

  The winning opening to the first start winning opening 36, the winning to the normal variation winning apparatus 37, and the winning to the third starting winning opening 42 are the start opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 42) and the start opening 2 switch 37a. (See FIG. 42) and the start port 3 switch 42a (see FIG. 42). The game balls that have won the first start winning opening 36 are detected as start winning balls for the special figure 1 variable display game, and are stored for a predetermined upper limit, and the normal variable winning device 37 and the third start winning opening 42 are also stored. The game balls that have won are detected as start winning balls for the special figure 2 variable display game, and stored with a predetermined upper limit.

  When detecting the start winning ball of the special figure variation display game, the big hit random number value, the big hit symbol random number value, each fluctuation pattern random number value and the like are extracted. These random numbers are stored in the special figure holding storage area (a part of the RAM) of the game control apparatus 100 (see FIG. 42) as a special figure start winning memory for a predetermined number of times (for example, a maximum of eight times). . The number stored in the special figure start winning memory is displayed on the special figure 1 hold display 54 and the special figure 2 hold display 55 for notifying the start winning number of the collective display device 50 and also on the display screen of the display device 41. Is displayed.

  The game control device 100 executes the special figure 1 variable display game on the special figure 1 display 51 based on the winning at the start winning opening 36 or the first start memory. In addition, the game control device 100 executes the special figure 2 variable display game by the special figure 2 display 52 based on the winning to the normal variation winning device 37 or the third start winning opening 42 or the second start memory.

  The special figure 1 fluctuation display game (first special figure fluctuation display game) and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game (second special figure fluctuation display game) are identified in the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 (see FIG. This is performed by suspending and displaying a predetermined result form after variably displaying special symbols and special symbols). In addition, the display device 41 executes a decorative special figure fluctuation display game for variably displaying a plurality of types of identification information (for example, numbers, symbols, character designs, etc.) corresponding to each special figure fluctuation display game.

  In the decoration special symbol variation display game on the display device 41, the decoration special symbol (identification information) composed of the numbers and the like described above is left (first special symbol), right (second special symbol), and middle (third special symbol). ) Is started in this order, scrolling display is started, symbols changing after a predetermined time are sequentially stopped, and the result of the special figure changing display game is displayed. In addition, the display device 41 displays various effects such as the appearance of characters in order to improve interest. Further, in the decoration special figure variation display game, as another decoration special symbol (identification information), the lower left light emitting unit 85 and the lower right light emission provided in the lamp display device 80 by repetition (flashing) of lighting display and light extinction display, etc. The part 86 can be changed as the fourth special symbol (fourth symbol) to notify that the special symbol change display game is being executed.

  The variation display of the fourth special symbol is stopped after a predetermined time from the start with “lights off” in the case of a loss and “lights up” in the case of a big hit. The variation display of the fourth special symbol is displayed by the light emitting units 85 and 86 of the lamp display device 80, but may be displayed by other display devices 41 and sub display devices.

  Here, the lamp display device 80 will be described. The upper left light-emitting unit 81 and the upper right light-emitting unit 82 notify information related to holding in FIG. 2, and the middle left light-emitting unit 83 and the middle right light-emitting unit 84 are special. Information on the hold in FIG. 1 is notified. The lower left light emitting portion 85 is notified as the fourth symbol of the special figure 1 variable display game, and the lower right light emitting portion 86 is notified as the fourth symbol of the special figure 2 variable display game. In addition, without distinguishing the 4th symbol of Special Figure 1 and the 4th symbol of Special Figure 2, it may be simply notified that the variable display game is being executed (varied) or stopped. . For example, when only the light emitting unit 85 is lit, the change stop may be notified, and the changing state may be notified by alternately lighting the light emitting unit 85 and the light emitting unit 86.

  When a game ball is won at the first start winning opening 36, the third starting winning opening 42 or the normal variation winning prize apparatus 37 at a predetermined timing (when the big hit random number at the time of winning detection is a big hit value) As a result of the special figure variation display game, a specific result mode (special result mode) is derived from the display symbols, and a big hit state (special game state) is obtained. Corresponding to this, the display mode of the display device 41 becomes a special result mode (for example, a state in which numbers such as “7, 7, 7” are arranged).

  At this time, the special variable winning device 39 is converted from the closed state to the opened state for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) by energizing the large winning port solenoid (39b) (see FIG. 42). That is, the big prize opening provided in the special variable prize winning device 39 opens widely for a predetermined time or until a predetermined number of game balls wins, during which the player is given a privilege that he can acquire many game balls. The

  At this time, in the special variation winning device 39, the special winning opening is converted from the closed state to the opened state for a predetermined short time by energizing the special winning opening solenoid 39b (see FIG. 42).

  The special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 may be configured as separate displays or the same display, but each special figure variation display game is not executed simultaneously. Is set as follows.

  As for the decorative special figure fluctuation display game on the display device 41, the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game may be executed in different display devices or in different display areas, or the same display. You may make it perform in an apparatus or a display area. In this case, the decorative special figure fluctuation display game corresponding to the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is prevented from being executed simultaneously. It should be noted that the special figure 1 variable display game and the special figure 2 variable display game are executed in the order in which the winnings (that is, start-up memory) are generated (in order of winning), and the special figure 1 variable display game and / or When the start-up memory of the special figure 2 variable display game is generated and the special figure variable display game can be executed, the variable display game based on the start memory generated the oldest is executed.

  In the following description, when the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a special figure fluctuation display game.

  Further, although not particularly limited, the start port 1 switch 36 a in the first start winning prize port 36, the start port 2 switch 37 a in the normal variation winning device 37, and the start port 3 in the third start winning prize port 42. The switch 42a, the gate switch 34a, the winning opening switch 35a, and the count switch (39a) are provided with a coil for magnetic detection, and a non-contact that detects a game ball using a phenomenon in which a magnetic field changes when a metal approaches the coil. A type of magnetic proximity sensor (hereinafter referred to as a proximity switch) is used. Further, the glass frame open detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 of the gaming machine 10 and the front frame open detection switch 64 (main body frame open detection switch) provided on the front frame (game frame) 12 etc. A microswitch having a typical contact can be used.

[Main components of the game machine]
FIG. 3 is a perspective view of a game board (game board unit) 30 and a control device unit 280 which are main components of the gaming machine 10.

  The control device unit 280 disposed on the back surface of the game board (game board unit) 30 is an aggregate of movable accessories, and is accommodated in a control base 270 that is a housing that accommodates an accessory.

  The control base 270 has a predetermined depth for accommodating the control device unit 280, and an upper plate 270a, a left plate 270b, a right plate 270c, and a lower plate 270d are integrally formed with the back plate 270e as a bottom. An opening 270f for making the display screen visible is formed in the back plate 270e, and the display device 41 is attached to the back surface of the opening 270f.

  The control device unit 280 includes a ball discharge unit 450, a first movable accessory unit 500, a second movable accessory unit 550, a third movable accessory unit 600, a fourth movable accessory unit 650, and a fifth movable accessory unit 700. (Refer to FIG. 4), and has an opening 280a of the same degree as the opening 270f so that the image of the display device 41 can be seen from the front.

  Since the periphery of the opening 280a is an opening provided in the game board 30 and is visible from the front through the fitting part of the center case 40, various decorations are provided on each movable accessory unit as an appealing part to the player. Is given. In the decoration, fine patterns similar to or similar to each other are formed in multiple layers to give a three-dimensional effect, and give the player a gorgeous impression together with the decoration light from the back surface or the like.

  The decoration includes a fixed decoration part and an operable decoration part, and the operable decoration part is capable of rotating, swinging and sliding. As an operable decorative portion, there are provided an upper decorative rotating body group 580 and a right decorative rotating body group 630 capable of rotating or swinging, and the upper decorative rotating body group 580 is rotated to the right by a motor 557 (see FIG. 9). The body group 630 is driven by a motor 607. Below the opening 280a, a center effect member 525 capable of rotating or swinging is provided, and on the left and right sides of the center effect member 525, a slide decoration member 540 capable of sliding operation is provided.

  The game board 30 has a center case (game production component) 40, a special variable winning device unit 800, a normal variable winning device unit 810, a starter on the front surface of a game board main body (veneer board) 30a serving as a base member of the game board 30. A winning opening unit 820, a general winning opening unit 840, and a ball guiding unit 850 are fitted together. These units and members are fitted to the game board 30 and are electrically connected to the game control device 100 and the like, so that detection signals of switches provided in each unit and transmission of drive power to solenoids provided in each unit are transmitted. It becomes a road.

  The special variable winning device unit 800 (special variable winning device 39) is a device that opens a large winning opening in a special gaming state.

  The ordinary variation winning device unit 810 (ordinary variation winning device 37) is a device having a second start winning opening inside.

  The start winning port unit 820 is a unit including the starting winning ports (the first starting winning port 36 and the third starting winning port 42) shown in FIG. 1 and FIG. 2, and the general winning port unit 840 includes a plurality of general winning ports. It is a unit having a mouth 35.

  The ball guiding unit 850 is a member that guides the game ball that has flowed down the left side of the game area 32 in the horizontal direction to the general winning opening 35 or the like. The lamp display device 80 described above is provided below the guide surface of the ball guide portion 850.

[Control unit]
FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the control device unit 280. The control device unit 280 includes a ball discharge unit 450, a first movable accessory unit 500, a second movable accessory unit 550, a third movable accessory unit 600, a fourth movable accessory unit 650, and a fifth movable accessory unit 700. including.

  Among these, the first movable accessory unit 500, the second movable accessory unit 550, the third movable accessory unit 600, and the fifth movable accessory unit 700 are attached to the fourth movable accessory unit 650, and the ball discharge unit. 450 is fixed to the control base 270.

  The ball discharge unit 450 is a unit for discharging the game balls won to the general winning opening 35, the first starting winning opening 36, the third starting winning opening 42, and the normal variable winning apparatus 37 from the game board 30. The upper right portion of the ball discharge unit 450 is formed with a general winning flow path lower discharge portion 451 through which a game ball won in the general winning opening 35 at the upper right of the game board flows, and the discharge flow path shown in FIG. The lower port 643 of 640 is connected.

  The first movable accessory unit 500 includes a center effect member 525 that imitates the shape of a flower, a slide decoration member 540 that opens and closes a left slide decoration member 540b, and a light emission unit 522a and 522b. An action effect is executed.

  The second movable accessory unit 550 forms a portal unit together with the third movable accessory unit 600, but is separable from the third movable accessory unit 600. The second movable accessory unit 550 includes a second movable accessory (upper ornament rotating body group) 580 in which a plurality of rotating bodies (rotating members) provided with a cherry blossom pattern are rotated together. The second movable accessory unit 550 includes fixed decoration portions 571a, 567a, and 552a each including three layers on the left side of the opening 280a, and fixed decoration portions 571b, 567b, and 552b including three layers on the upper side of the opening 280a. Is provided.

  The third movable accessory unit 600 includes a third movable accessory (right decorative rotating body group) 630 in which a plurality of rotating bodies (rotating members) provided with a cherry blossom pattern are rotated together. In addition, the third movable accessory unit 600 includes fixed decorative portions 621, 618, and 602 having three layers on the right side of the opening 280a, and the fixed decorative portion appears to be overlapped with a plurality of cherry blossoms. A deep cherry arch is formed together with the fixed decorative portion of the accessory unit 550. In addition, the third movable accessory unit 600 includes a passing port 622 that allows a winning ball of the general winning port 35 provided at the upper right of the game board 30 to pass through, and the winning port through the discharge channel 640 (see FIG. 12). The game ball that won the prize is guided to the ball discharge unit 450. Further, the third movable accessory unit 600 is visible from the front through the game board 30 and includes a housing portion 624 with a decoration on the front surface.

  The fourth movable accessory unit 650 moves (moves up and down) from the outer peripheral edge of the display device 41 that is the initial position to the front center of the display device 41 that is the operation position. 18) and a light guide plate 680 (see FIG. 18). The elevating member 665 is driven by a motor 652. The light guide plate 680 is fixed to the fourth movable accessory front base 671. The fourth movable accessory front base 671 is composed of an upper side portion 671a, a left side portion 671b, a right side portion 671c, and a lower side portion 671d that also serve as a guide function of the drive mechanism of the elevating member 665, and the entire surface of the opening 671e is covered by the light guide plate 680. Is called.

  As for the position of the movable accessory, the initial position is the first position and the operation position is the second position.

  The fifth movable accessory unit 700 moves (moves up and down) from the outer peripheral edge of the display device 41 which is the initial position to the front center of the display device 41 which is the operation position, and moves the fifth movable accessory 720 simulating a crescent moon. Prepare. The fifth movable accessory 720 reciprocates between the initial position and the operating position when the first arm 710 is rotated by the motor 706. The engaging portion 724 is a member that supports the fifth movable accessory 720, and the guide 726 is also an instruction member of the fifth movable accessory 720.

  FIG. 5 is a front view of the control device unit 280 in which each movable accessory is operating or in an operating position.

  When the central effect member 525 included in the first movable accessory unit 500 is in operation, the central effect member 525 rotates and a light emission operation is possible separately from the rotation operation. The driven gear 535 is meshed with a main driving gear 538 attached to the output shaft of the motor 537 (see FIG. 6), and the pin engaging portion 535a (see FIG. 6) is engaged with the crank pin 542a of the left slide groove 541a. Combined. The driven gear 536 is also meshed with the motor 537, and the pin engaging portion 536a (see FIG. 6) is engaged with the crank pin 542b of the right slide groove 541b. Then, as the motor 537 rotates, the slide decoration member 540 slides to the initial position in the closed state and the operating position in the open state.

  The left slide decoration member 540a and the right slide decoration member 540b are decorated on the upper half of the front surface, respectively, and in the center of each of the portions to be decorated, bowl-shaped openings 543a and 543b having a length in the horizontal direction. Is formed. The openings 543a and 543b are provided so that the light from the light emitting units (LEDs) 522a and 522b can be directly recognized.

  An arc is provided on the side where the left slide decoration member 540a and the right slide decoration member 540b are in contact with each other so that the center effect member 525 can be directly visually recognized even when the slide decoration member 540 is closed. Mold cutouts 544a, 544b are formed. The circle formed by the notch 544a and the notch 544b is smaller than the outer periphery of the center effect member 525 so that the central portion of the center effect member 525 can be directly visually recognized by hiding the petal portion of the center effect member 525. ing.

  Fixed decorative portions 571a, 567a, and 552a composed of three layers included in the second movable accessory unit 550, fixed decorative portions 571b, 567b, and 552b included in the third movable accessory unit 550, and fixed ornament portions formed of three layers included in the third movable accessory unit 600 571a, 567a and 552a together form a cherry arch. Since the cherry blossoms can be seen in the arch, the arch provides a gorgeous production space with depth and emotion.

  The second movable accessory (upper ornament rotating body group) 580 is disposed slightly outside the fixed decorative portions 571a, 567a, and 552a and the fixed decorative portions 571b, 567b, and 552b of the second movable accessory unit 550, Since the third movable accessory (right decorative rotating body group) 630 is arranged slightly outside the fixed decorative portions 571a, 567a, and 552a of the third movable accessory unit 600, and each decorative rotating body rotates at the same time, You can move the cherry arch. Further, as will be described later, the upper decorative rotating body group 580 and the right decorative rotating body group 630 integrally rotate to the right to notify the player that the timing is right-handed.

  Of the fourth movable accessory (elevating member) 665 (see FIG. 17) and the light guide plate 680 (see FIG. 17) included in the fourth movable accessory unit 650, when the elevating member 665 is in the operating position, the display device 41 moves forward (lowers). A decorative panel (not shown) having a high design property is provided on the front surface of the elevating member 665. The light emission mode of the light guide plate 680 will be described later.

  When the fifth movable accessory 720 simulating the crescent moon provided in the fifth movable accessory unit 700 is in the operating position, it moves (rises) to the front of the display device 41, and the decorative portion 730 (see FIG. 32). Most of them will be visible.

[First movable accessory unit]
FIG. 6 is an exploded perspective view of the first movable accessory unit 500. The first movable accessory unit 500 is located in the lower part of the control device unit 280 and is a horizontally long, substantially rectangular unit.

  The first movable accessory unit 500 includes a first movable accessory rear base 501 and a first movable accessory front base 530 as a skeleton.

  The first movable accessory back base 501 is formed with an accommodating portion 501a having a crescent-shaped arc to accommodate the fifth movable accessory 720 on the back surface, and at the right end of the first movable accessory back base 501, A passage hole 501b of a motor 706 (see FIG. 32) that drives the fifth movable accessory 720 is formed.

  An illumination board base 510 is attached to the front surface of the first movable accessory back base 501, and an illumination board 520 is attached to the front surface of the illumination board base 510. A motor 512 that is a drive source of the central effect member 525 is attached to the back surface of the illumination board base 510. A worm gear 513 is mounted on the output shaft of the motor 512, and a driven gear 514 is engaged with the worm gear 513. The rotating shaft 515 of the driven gear 514 passes through the passage hole 510a of the illumination board base 510 and the illumination board 520. It passes through the hole 521a and is connected to the center effect member 525.

  The illumination board 520 includes a rectangular accommodating portion 521 that accommodates the central effect member 525, and a left arm portion 523a and a right arm portion 523b that are formed on both sides of the accommodating portion 521, and the left arm portion 523a includes a plurality of light emitting portions 522a. The right arm portion 523b is provided with a plurality of light emitting portions 522b. A cover 526 that covers the light emitting unit 522 is attached to the illumination board base 510 from the front side with the illumination board 520 interposed therebetween.

  The cover 526 is formed with an opening 527 provided in the center so as not to cover the center effect member 525. On both sides of the opening 527, passage holes 526a and 526b are formed at positions corresponding to the light emitting portions 522a and 522b. Is done.

  The first movable accessory front base 530 is a member that covers the first movable accessory rear base 501 from the front, and includes a bulging portion 530a that accommodates the illumination board 520. A cover is provided at the center of the bulging portion 530a. An opening 531 having the same shape as 526 is formed.

  Below the bulging portion 530a, a gear accommodating portion 530b for accommodating a left driven gear 535 and a right driven gear 536 for driving the slide decoration member 540 is formed. The gear housing portion 530b includes a passage hole 536b through which the main driving gear 538 passes, and a motor 537 that is a drive source of the slide decoration member 540 is attached to the back surface of the gear housing portion 530b.

  A shaft rod 534a that pivotally supports the left driven gear 535 is formed on the left side of the passage hole 536b, and a shaft rod 534b that pivotally supports the right driven gear 536 is formed on the right side of the passage hole 536b. The left driven gear 535 and the right driven gear 536 are engaged with the main drive gear 538, respectively.

  A pin engaging portion 535a that engages with the crank pin 542a is formed at one point on the outer peripheral portion opposite to the surface on which the gear of the left driven gear 535 is formed. The same is true for the right driven gear 536. The crank pin 542a can move up and down in the slide groove 541a of the left slide decorative member 540a, and the crank pin 542b provided in the right slide decorative member 540b is the same. Then, the slide decoration member 540 slides left and right (opens and closes) as the left and right driven gears 535 and 536 rotate.

  The left slide decoration member 540a is decorated on the upper half, and a bowl-shaped opening 543a is formed at the center of the decoration. In addition, an arcuate cutout 544a is formed on the side in contact with the right slide decorative member 540b. The right slide decorative member 540b formed on the left and right objects has the same shape.

  FIG. 7 is a front view of the first movable accessory unit 500 with the first movable accessory 500a in the initial position. FIG. 8 is a front view in the same operation position.

  As shown in FIG. 7, when the first movable accessory 500a is in the initial position, five left light emitting portions 522a and five right light emitting portions 522b are exposed through the openings 543a and 543b, respectively. Further, when the left and right slide decoration members 540a and 540b come into contact with each other, the arc-shaped cutouts 544a and 544b form one circular ring, and the central portion of the central effect member 525 is exposed through the circular ring.

  When the slide decoration member 540 is closed (in the initial position), the center effect member 525 often does not perform effects such as rotation or light emission, and the slide decoration member 540 is open (in the operation position). When the slide decoration member 540 is continuously opened and closed, a presentation operation is often executed.

  When the first movable accessory 500a is in the operating position, as shown in FIG. 8, the left and right slide decoration members 540a and 540b are separated from each other, so that the central effect member 525 is all exposed. Therefore, the operation mode of the center effect member 525 can be clearly recognized. On the other hand, the left light emitting part 522a and the right light emitting part 522b are partially covered with the slide decorative member 540, but the plurality of light emitting parts 522 can be directly visually recognized from the front through the openings 543a and 543b.

  The slide grooves 541 (the left slide groove 541a and the right slide groove 541b) are formed in a longitudinal direction so as to correspond to the vertical amount of the crank pin 542 (the left crank pin 542a and the right crank pin 542b), and are left and right driven. When the gears 535 and 536 make one rotation, the slide decorative member 540 reciprocates once between the initial position and the operating position.

[Second movable accessory unit]
FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view of the second movable accessory unit 550. FIG. 10 is a rear view of the second movable accessory unit 550, and FIG. 11 is a plan view of the second movable accessory unit 550.

  The second movable accessory unit 550 and a third movable accessory unit 600, which will be described later, are units each including a fixed decorative portion and a rotatable decorative portion that are decorated to imitate cherry blossoms. The rotatable decorative portion is a decorative rotator, and the decorative rotators gather to form an upper decorative rotator group 580 and a right decorative rotator group 630 (see FIG. 12).

  The second movable accessory unit 550 has three base members, a second movable accessory rear base 551, a second movable accessory intermediate base 565, and a second movable accessory front base 570, and each base member is Both are translucent members having two arms in an L shape.

  The second movable accessory back base 551 includes a motor 557 on the back surface and a support portion for the gear group 560 on the front surface. On the right side of the vertical arm having a length in the vertical direction, a first-layer fixed decorative portion 552a is formed as a deepest decorative portion, and on the lower side of the horizontal arm having a length in the horizontal direction Similarly, the fixed decorative portion 552b is formed.

  The motor 557 is a drive source that drives the gear group 560, and the main driving gear 558 is attached to the output shaft of the motor 557. The second movable accessory back base 551 is formed with a gear passage hole 556 through which the main driving gear 558 passes, and the main driving gear 558 is disposed in the vicinity of the gear passage hole 556 on the front surface of the second movable accessory rear base 551. Meshed with the work gear 561 and the intermediate gear 562.

  The plurality of bosses provided on the front surface of the second movable accessory back base 551 are formed with a boss without a spacer and a boss with a spacer. The boss 555 with a spacer is used to attach the second movable accessory intermediate base 565. Is the boss. The boss 554 without a spacer is a boss that pivotally supports the intermediate gear 562. On the other hand, a plurality of support holes 553 provided in the second movable accessory back base 551 are holes through which the bosses of the shaft portions of the work gear 561 are inserted to support the work gear 561.

  The gear group 560 includes a work gear 561, an intermediate gear 562, and a sensor gear 563. The work gear 561 is a gear that is inserted through the shaft portion of the decorative rotating body and rotates the decorative rotating body. The intermediate gear 562 is a gear provided so that the rotation directions of the work gear 561 are aligned, and the sensor gear 563 is a gear provided so that the sensor 564 can detect the rotation angle of the gear group 560. The sensor gear 563 includes a cylindrical light shielding portion 563a provided with a notch in a part thereof, and is pivotally supported by a boss 554a for the sensor gear.

  As shown in FIG. 10, since the intermediate gear 562 is disposed between the work gears 561, the work gear 561 integrally rotates in the same direction. Therefore, the upper decoration rotating body group 580 to which the rotational force is transmitted by the work gear 561 rotates in the same direction all at once.

  Here, the sizes of all the work gears 561 and the intermediate gears 562 may be aligned so that one rotation of all the work gears 561 is aligned, and each work gear 561 has a different rotation amount. The diameters of the gear 561 and each intermediate gear 562 may be different. For example, among the decorative rotators, the larger the diameter of the decorative portion, the slower the rotation may be set.

  The work gear 561 is provided with a hole 561a so that a jig pin can be inserted. Since the positioning can be performed when the gear is attached using a jig, the work efficiency can be improved. In FIG. 10, only the hole 561a of the work gear 561 meshed with the sensor gear 563 is provided with a reference numeral, but the hole 561a is provided in all the work gears 561. Further, the hole is not limited to the work gear 561 so that the pin of the jig can be inserted, and may be provided in all types of spur gears used in the gaming machine 10.

  The second movable accessory intermediate base 565 attached to the second movable accessory rear base 551 via a boss 555 having a spacer accommodates a gear group 560 on the rear surface and includes an LED substrate 568 on the front surface. The LED substrate 568 is provided with LEDs on the path of the wiring 566, and the upper decorative rotating body group 580 can be illuminated from behind by the LEDs. The wiring 566 is formed by silk printing of a conductive member, and the LED lighting control grouping on the same substrate can be seen at a glance based on the printing of the wiring 566.

  A fixed decorative portion 567a as a second layer is formed on the right side surface of the vertical arm of the second movable accessory intermediate base 565, and a fixed decorative portion 567b is similarly formed on the lower side surface of the horizontal arm.

  A second movable accessory front base 570 is attached to the front surface of the second movable accessory intermediate base 565. A fixed decorative portion 571a as a third layer is formed on the right side surface of the vertical arm of the second movable accessory front base 570, and a fixed decorative portion 571b is similarly formed on the lower side surface of the horizontal arm.

  Further, on the front surface of the second movable accessory front surface base 570, three types of spacer portions that are inserted through the support shaft of the decorative rotating body are formed. The spacer portion can be divided into a first spacer portion 572, a second spacer portion 573, and a third spacer portion 574 in descending order of height.

  Each decorative rotating body of the upper decorative rotating body group 580 is attached to the second movable accessory unit 550 in three layers according to the height of the rotating surface. As shown in FIG. 11, the uppermost layer (third layer) of the upper decorative rotating body group 580 is configured by decorative rotating bodies 581a, 581b, 581c, 581d, and 581e. The intermediate layer (second layer) of the upper decorative rotating body group 580 includes decorative rotating bodies 583a, 583b, 583c, 583d, 583e, and 583f. The lowermost layer (first layer) of the upper decorative rotating body group 580 is configured by decorative rotating bodies 585a, 585b, 585c, 585d, 585e, 585f, and 585g.

  Among the uppermost (third layer) decorative rotating bodies, the small-diameter decorative rotating body 581d is inserted into the second spacer portion 573, and the other decorative rotating bodies 581a, 581b, 581c, 581e are third. The spacer portion 574 is inserted. Further, the decorative rotating bodies 583a, 583b, 583c, 583d, 583e and 583f of the intermediate layer (second layer) are inserted into the first spacer portion 572. The lowermost (first layer) decorative rotating bodies 585a, 585b, 585c, 585d, 585e, 585f, and 585g are inserted through insertion holes 575 formed in the second movable accessory front base 570.

  Since these decorative rotators are arranged dispersed in the front-rear direction (from the back to the front) and in the vertical direction, the decorative rotators do not collide with each other and can be rotated smoothly.

[Third movable accessory unit]
FIG. 12 is an exploded perspective view of the third movable accessory unit 600. FIG. 13 is a plan view of the third movable accessory unit 600.

  The third movable accessory unit 600 has three base members, a third movable accessory rear base 601, a third movable accessory intermediate base 615, and a third movable accessory front base 620, and each base member is Both are substantially triangular light-transmitting members having a length in the vertical direction.

  The third movable accessory back surface base 601 includes a motor 607 on the back surface and a support portion for the gear group 610 on the front surface. In addition, a discharge flow path 640 that is a flow path for discharging a game ball won in the general winning opening 35 is attached to the back surface of the third movable accessory back base 601. In the upper right part, a passage hole 601b is formed through which the upper port 641 of the discharge channel 640 passes. In addition, a first-layer fixed decorative portion 602 serving as a deepest decorative portion is formed on the left side surface of the third movable accessory back base 601.

  The motor 607 is a drive source that drives the gear group 610, and a main drive gear 608 is attached to the output shaft thereof. The third movable accessory back base 601 is formed with a gear passage hole 601a through which the main driving gear 608 passes, and the main driving gear 608 is disposed in the vicinity of the gear passage hole 601a on the front surface of the third movable accessory rear base 601. Meshed with the work gear 611 and the intermediate gear 612.

  The plurality of bosses provided on the front surface of the third movable accessory back base 601 are formed with a boss without a spacer and a boss with a spacer, and the boss 605 with a spacer is used to attach the third movable accessory intermediate base 615. Is the boss. The boss 604 without a spacer is a boss that pivotally supports the intermediate gear 612. On the other hand, a plurality of support holes 603 provided in the third movable accessory back base 601 are holes through which the bosses of the shaft portions of the work gear 611 are inserted to support the work gear 611.

  The sensor gear 613 is a gear provided so that the rotation angle of the gear group 610 can be detected by the sensor 609. The sensor gear 613 includes a cylindrical light-shielding portion with a notch provided in part, and is pivotally supported by a boss 604a for the sensor gear.

  The third movable accessory intermediate base 615 attached to the third movable accessory rear base 601 via a boss 605 with a spacer accommodates a gear group 610 on the rear surface and includes an LED substrate 619 on the front surface. The LED board 619 is provided with LEDs on the path of the wiring 617, and the right decorative rotating body group 630 can be illuminated from behind by the LEDs. The wiring 617 is formed by silk printing of a conductive member, and the grouping of LED lighting control on the same substrate can be seen at a glance based on the printing of the wiring 617.

  A fixed decorative portion 618 serving as a second layer is formed on the left side surface of the third movable accessory intermediate base 615, and an upper port 641 of the discharge channel 640 is formed on the upper right portion of the third movable accessory intermediate base 615. A passage hole 616 for allowing passage is formed.

  A third movable accessory front base 620 is attached to the front surface of the third movable accessory intermediate base 615. A fixed decorative portion 621 serving as a third layer is formed on the left side surface of the front base 620 of the third movable accessory. A housing part 624 that houses the upper port 641 of the discharge channel 640 is formed on the upper right part of the front surface 620 of the third movable accessory, and the front surface of the housing part 624 is decorated. On the left side of the housing portion 624, a passage port 622 is provided for allowing a game ball won in the general winning port 35 to pass therethrough, and allows the game ball to pass through the discharge channel 640.

  The discharge flow path 640 is connected to the general prize flow path lower discharge portion 451 (see FIG. 4) of the ball discharge unit 450 at the lower port 643.

  On the front surface of the third movable accessory front surface base 620, two types of height spacer portions are formed through which the support shaft of the decorative rotating body is inserted. The spacer part is divided into a first spacer part 625 and a second spacer part 626 in descending order of height.

  Each decorative rotating body of the right decorative rotating body group 630 is attached to the third movable accessory unit 600 in three layers according to the height of the rotating surface. As shown in FIG. 13, the uppermost layer (third layer) of the right decorative rotating body group 630 is configured by decorative rotating bodies 631a, 631b, and 631c. The intermediate layer (second layer) of the right decorative rotating body group 630 is configured by decorative rotating bodies 633a, 633b, and 633c. The lowermost layer (first layer) of the right decorative rotating body group 630 is configured by decorative rotating bodies 635a and 635b.

  The uppermost (third layer) decorative rotating body 631a, 631b, 631c is inserted into the second spacer portion 626. Further, the decorative rotating bodies 633 a, 633 b, and 633 c of the intermediate layer (second layer) are inserted through the first spacer portion 625. The lowermost (first layer) decorative rotating bodies 635a and 635b are inserted into insertion holes 627 formed in the third movable accessory front base 620.

  As described above, the second movable accessory unit 550 and the third movable accessory unit 600 are provided with three layers of fixed decorative portions and three layers of decorative rotating bodies, so that a total of six layers of cherry blossom arches are formed. It is possible to provide a deep and elegant space.

〔Time chart〕
Next, the operation timings of the second movable accessory (upper decorative rotating body group) 550a and the third movable accessory (right decorative rotating body group) 600a will be described. FIG. 14 is a time chart for explaining an example of the operation timing of the second movable accessory 550a and the third movable accessory 600a. FIG. 15 is a time chart for explaining another example of the operation timing of the second movable accessory 550a and the third movable accessory 600a.

  14 and 15, the fanfare effect starts at time T1, the fanfare effect ends at time T2, and the big hit game starts. At time T3, the big hit game is ended and the ending effect is started. At time T4, the ending effect is ended and the electric support (general power support state, specific game state) is started. Further, CW of the motor means Clock Wise (clockwise), and CCW means Counter Clock Wise (counterclockwise). When the motor 557 of the second movable combination is switched to CW, the second movable combination 550a is simultaneously rotated clockwise. Further, when the motor 607 of the third movable combination is switched to CW, the third movable combination 600a is simultaneously rotated clockwise.

  The time chart shown in FIG. 14 is an example of operation settings for the second movable accessory 550a and the third movable accessory 600a. Here, from the start of the fanfare (T1) to the end of the big hit game (T3), the second movable combination 550a and the third movable combination 600a rotate clockwise, and once the ending start (T3) is stopped, the movement is temporarily stopped. It rotates clockwise again with the start of support (T4).

  With such an operation setting, the second movable accessory 550a and the third movable accessory 600a can be integrally rotated in the clockwise direction at all times of right-handing.

  However, the second movable accessory 550a and the third movable accessory 600a may have a large number of rotating parts, and if the rotation time is long, the amount of heat generation increases accordingly, so that a failure may occur. . Therefore, a setting for appropriately stopping the movement of the second movable accessory 550a and the third movable accessory 600a is also provided.

  The time chart shown in FIG. 15 is another example of the operation settings of the second movable accessory 550a and the third movable accessory 600a. Here, the second movable accessory 550a and the third movable accessory 600a rotate clockwise from the start of the fanfare (T1) to the end of the fanfare (T2). After that, at the start of the big hit game (T2), the second movable accessory 550a repeats rotation and stop every one unit time indicated by the double-ended arrow W1, and the third movable combination 600a has the double-ended arrow W2. Rotation and stop are repeated every 2 units of time indicated by. W1 is, for example, a period in which each decorative rotator rotates once, and W2 is, for example, a period in which each decorative rotator rotates twice. The movement amount of each movable accessory may not be set in a period, but may be set to be switched off when the stepping motor is CW or CCW for a predetermined number of steps (for the number of pulses).

  Here, by shortening the stop period of the third movable accessory 600a arranged on the right side of the game area 32, the game area 32 that the player wants to aim at becomes the second prize opening or the second of the normal variation prize winning device 37. It can be emphasized that the start winning opening is the game area 32 on the right side.

  FIG. 16 is a time chart for explaining an example of the operation timing of the second movable accessory 550a and the third movable accessory 600a after the electric support. The ending effect ends at time T3, and electric support starts at time T4. At time T5, a predetermined effect is started. The predetermined effect is, for example, an SP reach, or an effect for notifying the expectation of the variable display game such as a continuous notice effect including a pseudo-ream. In addition, the predetermined effect may be an effect related to a jackpot probability such as a change in the probability of a jackpot, or an effect that starts from an external factor due to the use of a gaming point or in conjunction with another gaming machine. The predetermined effect may not be displayed on the display device 41.

  During the big hit game, the second movable combination 550a and the third movable combination 600a rotate, and the second movable combination 550a and the third movable combination from the time T3 when the big hit game ends to the time T4 when the ending ends. The object 600a stops once. Thereafter, at time T4, electric support (a specific gaming state) is started, and the second movable accessory 550a and the third movable accessory 600a rotate again, but the period from time T4 to time T5 when the predetermined effect is started. The second movable accessory 550a and the third movable accessory 600a are repeatedly stopped during the period W3 that is longer than W1 and W2. After that, when a predetermined effect is executed at time T5, the second movable accessory 550a and the third movable accessory 600a are rotated before reaching a predetermined rotation amount (for example, a rotation period of W1 as one unit). Stop moving.

  Since the total time in the game is longer in the electric support state (general power support state, specific game state) than the big hit game state, the life of each movable accessory is lengthened by extending the stop period during the electric support. can do. When a predetermined effect is executed, each movable accessory is stopped before the predetermined amount of rotation is reached, so that the player's consciousness is changed from the second movable accessory 550a and the third movable accessory 600a to the predetermined effect. Can be directed.

  When the second movable combination 550a and the third movable combination 600a move as part of the predetermined performance, the two movable combinations 550a and 600a are predetermined by stopping both the movable combinations 550a and 600a from the start of the change. It becomes possible to operate from production. In addition, by stopping both movable actors 550a and 600a from the start of the fluctuation, both movable actors 550a and 600a can also have a role of a notice effect, and the player's consciousness can be more focused on the notice effect. it can. In other words, the player can recognize a special feeling because the movable handpiece that has been movable regularly until now does not move.

  In the case where both movable actors 550a and 600a are movable as a part of the predetermined effect, for example, when the sensor gear 563 or the sensor gear 613 is not in a rotational position where the initial position can be detected by the sensors 564 and 609 due to a trouble. Alternatively, both movable accessories 550a and 600a may be stopped without being moved in response to the predetermined performance of this time.

[Right-handed instruction]
FIG. 17 is a front view of the game board 30 for explaining the operation of the right-handed period, the second movable combination 550a, and the third movable combination 600a. Here, each decorative rotating body of the second movable accessory 550a and the third movable accessory 600a is represented by a semi-transparent circle, and the rotation direction of each decorative rotating body and the direction in which the decorative light emission propagates in a wave shape to emit light. Shown with thick arrows. Further, the display on the display device 41 is indicated by a solid line, but each component of the game board 30 is indicated by a broken line.

  In the central display area 260 of the display device 41, all three special symbols are changing, and in the lower display area 265, four start memories are displayed. In addition, the upper left display area 262 displays “77 more times” and the remaining number of fluctuations in the power support period, and the upper right display area 263 displays “right →→” that the timing is right-handed. ing.

  In the electric support period, since the second movable combination 550a and the third movable combination 600a rotate clockwise at the same time, the player can directly understand that it is a right-handed timing. Furthermore, since each LED included in the second movable accessory 550a and the third movable accessory 600a emits light so as to flow in a wavy shape while drawing an arc from the left to the right, it gives the player a refreshing feeling when making a right strike. Can do. The effect of emitting light so as to flow from the left to the right when hitting right may be executed by the LEDs provided on the game board 30 or the decoration devices 18a and 18b.

  In addition, in synergy with the display of “right-handed →” in the upper right display area 263, a large-scale right-handed instruction using more than half the area of the game board 30 can be expressed, and the right-handed instruction can be enhanced. it can. Furthermore, the lamp display device 80 may be provided with a new LED that lights up or blinks when the player is in the big hit gaming state or the electric support state, that is, when the player is right-handed, and may be notified of the right-handed light according to the light emission mode of the LED.

  It should be noted that the second movable accessory 550a and the third movable accessory 600a may be rotated clockwise slightly before the timing of right-handed, so that the player can move left without missing the right-handed timing. You can change from hit to right. As described above, the second movable combination 550a and the third movable combination 600a can be operated at different timings.

[Fourth movable accessory unit]
FIG. 18 is an exploded perspective view of the fourth movable accessory unit 650. The fourth movable accessory unit 650 includes an elevating unit 660 for elevating the elevating member 665 and a light guide plate unit 670 to which the light guide plate 680 is fixed. Of these, the elevating member 665 forms the fourth movable accessory 650a.

  The fourth movable accessory unit 650 includes a fourth movable accessory rear base 651 and a fourth movable accessory front base 671 as a skeleton.

  The fourth movable accessory back base 651 is a portal base and includes an upper side portion 651a, a left side portion 651b, and a right side portion 651c. A motor 652 for driving the fourth movable accessory 650a is provided on the upper right portion of the fourth movable accessory rear base 651 serving as the base of the upper side portion 651a and the right side portion 651c. The upper side portion 651a is provided with a plurality of gears 653 and 654 that transmit the power of the motor 652 to the link member 656.

  The link member 656 includes two arms 657 having the same length, and the support member 661 is moved up and down by the rotation of the arm 657. The support member 661 includes five finger portions 662a to 662e, and the finger portions 662a to 662e are accommodated in the accommodating portion 666 included in the elevating member 665. Further, the pair of engaging portions 661b and 661c included in the support member 661 are respectively engaged with pins 673a and 673b provided on the fourth movable accessory front base, and the support member 661 is supported by the fourth movable accessory front base. Supported from the front side.

  The elevating member 665 is supported from the back side by a support member 661, and a design part (not shown) with decoration is provided on the front side. Up to this point, the lifting unit 660 included in the fourth movable accessory unit 650 has been described.

  Next, the light guide plate unit 670 included in the fourth movable accessory unit 650 will be described. The light guide plate unit 670 is mainly configured by a fourth movable accessory front base 671 and a light guide plate 680.

  The fourth movable accessory front base 671 is a substantially rectangular base including an upper side portion 671a, a left side portion 671b, a right side portion 671c, and a lower side portion 671d, and includes an opening 671e so that an image of the display device 41 can be seen. The upper side 671a is formed with a pair of arc-shaped slide grooves 672 that support the support member 661 from the front surface and allows the support member 661 to slide, and the left slide groove 672a has a pin 673a and the right slide groove 672b. The pin 673b is movably engaged.

  The light guide plate 680 is attached to the inside of the fourth movable accessory front base 671 so as to cover the opening 671e of the fourth movable accessory front base 671 via the translucent support members 674a and 674b. An LED substrate 672 is sandwiched between the support member 674b and the light guide plate 680. The LED substrate 672 is a substrate on which a plurality of LEDs 675 (see FIG. 24) that irradiate the light guide plate 680 from the side surface end portions are provided. In addition, an LED substrate (not shown) is also provided on the upper side portion 671a and the lower side portion 671d, and end incidence from the vertical direction is also possible.

  Since the fourth movable accessory front base 671 to which the light guide plate 680 is attached has a certain thickness, the light guide plate unit 670 is provided with a second light guide plate (second light guide plate) 683 (see FIG. 26). be able to.

[Elevating unit]
FIG. 19 is a rear view of the lifting unit 660 with the lifting unit 660 in the initial position, and FIG. 20 is a rear view in the same operating position. FIG. 21 is a rear view of the fourth movable accessory rear base 651 in which the elevating unit 660 is in the initial position, and FIG. 22 is a rear view in the same operating position.

  First, the configuration of each gear will be described. Of the gears constituting the elevating unit 660, the driven gear 654a is a gear provided on the rotating base of the first arm 675a, and the driven gear 654b is a gear provided on the rotating base of the second arm 675b. is there. Therefore, when the driven gear 654a rotates, the first arm 657a rotates, and when the driven gear 654b rotates, the second arm 657b rotates.

  The driven gear 654 a is meshed with a main driving gear 653 that is attached to the output shaft of the motor 652. Three driven gears 655 are provided between the driven gear 654a and the driven gear 654b, and the driving force of the motor 652 is transmitted to the driven gear 654b through these gears.

  Next, the two arms 657 of the link member 656 will be described. The first arm 675a includes an arc-shaped slide groove 658a, and the second arm 675b similarly includes a slide groove 658b. A pin 659a is engaged with the slide groove 658a, and a pin 659b is engaged with the slide groove 658b. The pins 659a and 659b support the support member 661 so as to be movable. In addition, an engagement portion 657c provided at the distal end portion of the first arm 657a and an engagement portion 657d provided at the distal end portion of the second arm 657b also rotatably support the support member 661. For example, the arm 657 is a sword-shaped member, and the slide groove 658 is formed just at the heel portion.

  When the arm 675 is rotated downward by the driving force of the motor 652, the support member 661 is lowered downward while being supported by the link member 656 as shown in FIGS. 19 to 22 and attached to the support member 661. The lift member 665 thus lowered is also lowered.

  Next, the support member 661 will be described. The support member 661 is formed with a light shielding rib 661a, and the gaming machine 10 detects that the lifting unit 660 is in the initial position by shielding the detection light of the sensor 668. In addition, a pair of engaging portions 661b and 661c are formed on the upper portion of the supporting member 661, and the engaging portions 661b and 661c are connected to pins 673a and 673b engaged with the slide grooves 672a and 672b to support them. The member 661 is movably supported by the fourth movable accessory front base.

  Further, each finger portion 662a to 662e of the support member 661 is provided with an LED 669 to illuminate the elevating member 665 from the rear. As described above, the elevating member 665 is attached to the elevating unit 660 while accommodating the finger portions 662a to 662e in the accommodating portions 666a to 666e.

  With such a configuration, the lifting member 665 moves (lifts) between the initial position and the operating position.

〔Light guide plate〕
Next, the light guide plate 680 will be described. FIG. 23 is a diagram illustrating an example of the light emission mode of the light guide plate 680. FIG. 24 is an enlarged cross-sectional view of the light guide plate 680, and FIG. 25 is an enlarged cross-sectional view of another example of the light guide plate 680.

  As shown in FIG. 23, the light guide plate 680 can be visually recognized from the front so that a part of the light incident from the end portion is reflected forward, so that the reflected light emerges as a pattern or the like. Conventionally, the light guide plate that is generally produced is processed by laser processing on the surface of the acrylic resin plate or polycarbonate resin plate where total internal reflection occurs, thereby processing a part of the incident light from the side surface. The light was emitted from the part (cutting light guide plate).

  On the other hand, in this invention, the printing light guide plate which makes the said dot part light-emit from the opposite side of a dot part by carrying out dot printing on a board surface as a refracting part (reflection part, light emission part) is employ | adopted. The printed light guide plate is realized by, for example, an ink jet technique for an acrylic plate, and the light guide plate itself can be made thinner than the cut light guide plate. In addition, since the ink particles are several tens of micrometers (micrometers), it is possible to make fine refracting parts (reflecting parts, light emitting parts), and it is difficult to see the light emission pattern when there is no incident light from the side surface. There is also a merit. Furthermore, if the incident light is white, a natural color is produced by the color of the ink, and colorful light emission is possible by using a plurality of colors of ink. In addition, since a printing plate or a mold for laser processing is unnecessary, the cost is lower than that of the cutting light guide plate.

  FIG. 24 is a diagram for explaining reflection in the printed light guide plate. The LED 675 that is a means for irradiating the light guide plate is an LED provided on the LED substrate 674. The refraction part 681 represents one of the dots.

  While the refractive index of air is 1.00, the acrylic resin has a refractive index of 1.49 to 1.53, and the polycarbonate (PC) resin has a refractive index of 1.59. It has a refractive index similar to that of resin and PC resin.

  Point A shown in FIG. 24 is a portion where the incident light of the LED 672 is incident from the light guide plate 680 to the refracting portion 681 and is reflected inside the refracting portion. At point A, reflection occurs in a plurality of directions, and among these, the light emitted further forward through the light guide plate 680 is shown as a solid line, a short broken line, and a long broken line. In particular, almost all of the solid line or long broken line light traveling at 90 ° with respect to the surface of the light guide plate 680 goes out to the player side ahead.

  Thus, the light emission pattern provided on the light guide plate 680 is formed by a planar set of convex refracting portions 681.

  Here, the irradiation means provided on the end face of the light guide plate 680 is not limited to an LED or the like for the purpose of irradiation with visible light, and may be, for example, a black light that irradiates ultraviolet light having a long wavelength. The refracting portion 681 is formed of, for example, a fluorescent paint that emits light by ultraviolet light having a long wavelength.

  Further, the ink used for the refracting portion 681 may be a photochromic pigment whose color changes with ultraviolet rays, or a thermochromic pigment whose color changes with heat. The irradiation means may be a combination of LED, guided natural light (indoor light), and black light. The ink used for the refracting portion 681 is a pigment ink such as a photochromic pigment, a thermochromic pigment or a mineral, a dye-based ink, A fluorescent paint can be arbitrarily used.

  Further, the light guide plate 680 may be disposed not only to cover the front surface of the display device 41 but also to cover the entire front surface of the game board 30, or the glass frame 15 itself may be a light guide plate.

  FIG. 25 is another example of the printed light guide plate, and a protective member 682 is provided so as to cover the refracting portion 681. While there is a long dashed light beam that reflects forward on the inner surface of the refracting portion 681, there is also a solid line light that exits outward from the refracting portion 681, but the solid line light is reflected forward by the protective member 682. Then, the light passes through the light guide plate 680 and is emitted to the player side. Therefore, in the light guide plate 680 shown in FIG. 25 provided with the protective member 682, higher luminance can be obtained, and a decrease in contrast due to scattering of light traveling to the opposite side of the player side can be prevented. .

  The protective member 682 is formed by coating or vapor deposition from above the refracting portion 681 established as a liquid crystal display manufacturing technique. Although the protective member 682 is formed in a layered shape, the reflection surface does not necessarily have to be a precise parallel surface with respect to the back surface of the light guide plate 680.

  FIG. 26 is a diagram illustrating a case where two light guide plates are provided. FIG. 27 is a front view of two light guide plates.

  As shown in FIG. 26, in the first light guide plate (first light guide plate) 680, the effect emerges from the incident light from the side, and the character emerges from the vertical (from the bottom) incident light. For example, by using an ink that reflects in accordance with the color (wavelength) of incident light, the incident light from the side is incident with light having a wavelength different from that of the incident light from the vertical. It can be raised.

  As shown in FIG. 27A, the effect and character of the first light guide plate 680 emerge when there is incident light from both the vertical and horizontal directions. For example, the first light guide plate 680 emits light when shifting from the reach to the effect, and the symbol variation displayed on the display device 41 is visible in the upper right region of the first light guide plate 680 at the timing. . Note that the light emitting mode of the first light guide plate 680 may be that the effect and the character emit light simultaneously, or only one of them may emit light.

  As shown in FIGS. 26 and 27, a plurality of star patterns appear on the second light guide plate 683 due to incident light from the side. For example, the second light guide plate 683 emits light in a scene with high expectation, and a hitting instruction displayed on the display device 41 is visible in the upper right area of the second light guide plate 683 at the timing. In addition, the light may be emitted when the game mode changes or the game state changes, and the image displayed in the upper right area of the display device 41 is not limited to a right-handed instruction, but a pattern, icon, start It may be a memory display or the like.

  By the way, if it is incident light from only a part of the end part, a part floating on the light guide plate is also part. Therefore, by controlling light emission and non-light emission of each LED 675 incident on the light guide plate, for example, it is possible to make a pattern appear on the light guide plate in order.

  FIG. 28 is a front view of the first light guide plate 680 for explaining a light emission mode in the case where the LEDs 675 sequentially emit light in the vertical direction. 28A to 28C show the case where the LED 675 emits light sequentially from the top, and FIGS. 28S to T show the case where the LED 675 emits light sequentially from the upper and lower ends to the center.

  (A) is a state in which three special symbols are changing in the central display area 260 of the display device 41, and the light L1 is incident on the first light guide plate 680 because the uppermost LED 675 emits light. . Here, only the upper part of the effect emerges above the special symbol changing at the center by the incident light L1.

  (B) is a state in which the special symbol is in a reach form in the central display area 260 of the display device 41, and the second LED 675 from the top also emits light, so that the incident lights L1 and L2 are incident on the first light guide plate 680. is there. Here, the upper part and the middle part of the effect are raised above the reach state at the center by the incident light of L1 and L2. Therefore, the effect does not overlap with the special symbol changing at the center, so that the visual recognition of the special symbol is not hindered.

  In (C), while the special symbol which is changing is displayed small in the upper right display area 263 of the display device 41, “CHANSU” is displayed in the central display area 260, and the third LED 675 from the top also emits light. Thus, the incident lights L1 to L3 are in a state of being incident on the first light guide plate 680. Here, all the effects are highlighted by the incident light from L1 to L3.

  In this way, by sequentially lighting the LEDs 675, the light emitting area that emerges from the first light guide plate 680 can be gradually expanded, and the player is given a sense of expectation by a light emission mode that is different from the conventional light emission. it can. In addition, the light emitting region can be reduced by sequentially turning off the LEDs 675. Furthermore, it is not necessary to prepare a plurality of light guide plates when changing the light emitting area, and it is possible to produce more diverse and dynamic effects.

  In (S), “right-handed →” is displayed small in the upper right display area 263, and the uppermost LED 675 and the lowermost LED 675 emit light, so that incident light L1 and L4 enter the first light guide plate 680. It is the state that was done. Here, the stars in the uppermost row and the stars in the lowermost row emit light by the incident lights of L1 and L4.

  (T) is a state in which incident light L1 to L4 is incident on the first light guide plate 680 because the second LED 675 from the top and the third LED 675 from the top emit light. Here, stars in all rows are emitted by incident light from L1 to L4. For this reason, the star pattern covers the entire front surface of the display device 41, and functions just like a shutter that covers the display screen of the display device 41.

  Here, the light emission mode in which the shutter is closed from the upper part and the lower part to the center has been described. However, the shutter-like light emission aspect may be an aspect from the left and right to the center, and from one side part to the other side part. The aspect which heads may be sufficient. In this way, since the second light guide plate 683 can provide a shutter-like effect without providing a movable accessory and providing a shutter effect, the shutter function can be realized with a space-saving, power-saving, and low-cost configuration. it can.

  FIG. 29 is a front view of the second light guide plate 683 for explaining a light emission mode in the case where the LEDs 675 sequentially emit light in the horizontal direction.

  (A) is a state in which the first LED 675 emits light based on the occurrence of the first start memory, and the start memory display M1 is highlighted. The start memory display M1 may be displayed only by the light emission of the second light guide plate 683, or the start memory display displayed on the display device 41 and the light emission of the second light guide plate 683 overlap (or the outline is emphasized). May be displayed.

  (B) is a state in which the second LED 675 emits light based on the occurrence of the second start memory and the start memory display M2 is highlighted.

  Thus, by displaying the start-up memory display with the light guide plate, it is possible to produce a light emission effect in a ghostly atmosphere unique to the light guide plate. Naturally, only the pre-reading display may be displayed by the light emission of the light guide plate, or all the start memory displays including the pre-reading effect may be displayed by the light emission of the light guide plate. As an aspect of the pre-reading effect, the start memory may be blinked by light emission of the light guide plate or a display with gradation may be applied, or the light emission color of the light guide plate may be changed by changing the color of incident light.

  Here, the mode in which the start memory display is sequentially displayed in the horizontal direction by the light guide plate has been described, but the start memory display may be displayed in the vertical direction.

  Moreover, although the start memory | storage display was mentioned as an example displayed sequentially in the horizontal direction by a light-guide plate, the display of an item, a character, etc. may be sufficient. Furthermore, although it is assumed that a plurality of light guide plates are required, it is possible to express the movement of the character with a light guide plate like a flip book by changing the pattern that appears in the same place. .

  FIG. 30 is a diagram illustrating the size of the refracting portion 681 provided on the light guide plate 680. (A) is the figure which expanded a part of the right side near a light source, (B) is the figure which expanded a part of the left side away from the light source.

  Since the refracting portion 681 provided in front of the light source releases part of the incident light from total reflection, the incident light attenuates as the distance from the light source increases. Therefore, as shown in (A), even if the incident light is attenuated by providing the refracting portions 681 closer to the place away from the light source or closer to the light source side, the refracting portions 681 are more densely provided. Many incident lights can be refracted.

  Further, as shown in (B), a portion closer to the light source or a portion where the refracting portion is not provided on the light source side is provided sparsely so that much incident light is supplied to the downstream side. To.

  Here, the closer the refracting portions 681 are provided, the smaller the size of each refracting portion 681 is. However, only the change in density may be used, and the size of the refracting portions 681 may be uniform.

  As described above, the light guide plate 680 as a whole can emit light uniformly by changing the density and size of the refracting portion 681 in accordance with the attenuation amount of incident light.

  FIG. 31 is a front view of the game board 30 in a state where the second light guide plate 683 emits light entirely.

  The gaming state shown in FIG. 31 is an electric support state, and the upper left display area 262 displays “77 more times” and the number of remaining electric support times. The upper right display area 263 displays a right-handed instruction “right-handed →”. In addition, the upper decorative rotating body group 580 and the right decorative rotating body group 630 rotate clockwise, and light is emitted in a circular arc from the left to the lower right so that the LEDs flow in a wave shape as indicated by thick arrows. The board 30 as a whole is informed that the timing is right-handed.

  In this way, a beginner can make a clear right-handed instruction by a plurality of right-handed instruction displays (right-handed instruction in the upper right display area 263, right-handed instruction according to the rotation direction of the decorative rotating body, and right-handed instruction based on the LED light emission flow). However, it becomes possible to easily grasp the timing of the right hit, and it is possible to suppress a useless ball due to a mistake in the normal hit and the special hit.

  In the display device 41, three special symbols are fluctuating. However, since the screen effect with high expectation has just ended, the second light guide plate 683 is divided into screen effects displayed on the display device 41 as shutters. It is in a state of emitting light so as to turn on.

  In this way, the shutter is displayed by the second light guide plate 683, and the display device 41 displays the special symbol variation, so that the shutter temporarily puts a break in the screen effect and the display device by the light-transmitting property of the light guide plate. It is possible to make the player visually recognize the change in the special symbol displayed on 41.

  In addition, since the refracting portion is not provided in the upper right region of the second light guide plate 683, the right-handed instruction display displayed in the upper right display region 263 of the display device 41 overlaps with the shutter even when the shutter is being displayed. In addition, the player always sees how to hit the game.

  Since the light-emitting pattern is not provided in a part of the light guide plate, the player can visually recognize the image displayed on the display device 41 even when a long effect is performed by the light guide plate. The player does not mistake the screen.

[One aspect of the present invention]
Examples of the invention relating to the light guide plate described so far include the following inventions.

  (1) A display device capable of displaying an effect related to a game, a transparent light guide plate provided in front of the display device and having a light emission pattern that emits light by being incident inside from the end surface, and an end surface of the light guide plate And an illuminating means capable of irradiating the inside of the light guide plate with light, and a light guide capable of emitting light from the illuminating means to emit the light emission pattern of the light guide plate. And a light plate control means, wherein the light emitting pattern is formed by a planar set of convex refracting portions provided on a surface of the light guide plate.

  (2) The irradiation unit includes a plurality of irradiation units, and the light guide plate control unit can control the light emission region of the light emission pattern to be enlarged or reduced by sequentially turning on and off the irradiation unit. The gaming machine according to (1), characterized in that:

  (3) The display device can display specific information about the game in a predetermined display area, and the light emission pattern is formed so as not to overlap the predetermined display area in front view. When displayed, the game machine according to (1) or (2), wherein a movable accessory arranged on an outer peripheral portion of the display device operates.

  (4) The irradiation unit is disposed in a horizontal direction and a vertical direction of an end surface of the light guide plate, and the light guide plate emits a light emission pattern by light of the horizontal irradiation unit, and the vertical direction The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3), wherein a light emission pattern different from the one light emission pattern is emitted by the light of the irradiation means.

  (5) The light guide plate control unit can turn on or off the irradiation unit in order from the irradiation unit on one side of the irradiation unit to the irradiation unit on the other side, and the center of the irradiation unit The gaming machine according to any one of (2) to (4), characterized in that the irradiation unit can be turned on or off in order from the irradiation unit to the corner irradiation unit.

  (6) It is possible to execute a game based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition, and to give a predetermined game value based on the result of the game, and to execute the game acquired based on the establishment of the start condition The gaming machine according to any one of (2) to (5), wherein the right light can be emitted to the light guide plate as a start memory display.

  (7) The refraction section is ink printed on the light guide plate, and the color of the ink changes according to heat or ultraviolet light supplied to the ink. (1) to (6) Game machines.

[Fifth movable accessory unit]
FIG. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the fifth movable accessory unit 700. When the first arm 710 is rotated by the driving force of the motor 706, the fifth movable accessory 720 moves up and down. The first arm 710 corresponds to a power transmission unit, and the elevating base 721 corresponds to a movable unit. Further, the cover 730 corresponds to a decorative part.

  A fifth movable accessory base 701 serving as a base member of the fifth movable accessory unit 700 is a substantially rectangular base member, and slide grooves 702 and 703 for guiding the fifth movable accessory 720 are provided at the center. The fifth movable accessory base 701 is provided with a sensor 704 for detecting that the fifth movable accessory 720 is in the initial position at the lower left portion, and a shaft 705 for supporting the first arm 710 is provided at the lower right portion. It is done.

  The first arm 710 is a “<”-shaped arm that is supported by the shaft 705 in the bearing 712. A driven gear 711 meshed with the main driving gear 707 is formed at the base end portion of the first arm 710 provided with the bearing 712, and forms a gear portion 710b. The first arm 710 includes an arm portion 710a, a gear portion 710b, and an arm tip portion 710c. A slide groove 714 in which a pin 713 is slidably fitted is formed in the arm tip portion 710c.

  The pin 713 is engaged with an engaging portion 724 provided on the lifting base 721 and supports the lifting base 721. The elevating base 721 is a crescent-shaped base member supported by three legs, and includes an LED substrate 722 on the front surface. A wiring 723 is provided on the LED substrate 722, and an LED 723 a is provided on the route of the wiring 723. The wiring 723 is silk-printed on the LED substrate 722 by a conductive member so that the grouping of LED lighting control on the same substrate can be seen at a glance.

  The elevating base 721 includes a slide portion 725 slidably engaged with a guide 726 (see FIG. 34), an engagement portion 724 engaged with a pin 713, and an engagement portion engaged with a slide groove 703. 721a is provided.

  A cover 730 with decoration is attached to the front surface of the elevating base 721, and the cover 730 is illuminated by the LED 723a.

  FIG. 33 is a front view of the fifth movable accessory unit 700 in which the fifth movable accessory 720 is in the initial position, and FIG. 34 is a front view in the same operating position.

  When the fifth movable accessory 720 is in the initial position, the light shielding rib 725a provided on the elevating base 721 shields the detection light of the sensor 704, so that the gaming machine 10 has the fifth movable accessory 720 in the initial position. Is detected.

  When the gear portion 710b is rotated clockwise by the driving force of the motor 706, the fifth movable accessory 720 is raised obliquely upward to the right by the clockwise rotation of the first arm 710.

[Another example of the fifth movable accessory unit]
Next, another example of the fifth movable accessory unit 700 will be described. In another example of the fifth movable accessory unit 700, after the fifth movable accessory 720 rises to the first state, the cover (decoration portion) 730 is rotated so that the cover (decorating portion) 730 is raised to the second state. Here, the 1st arm 710 and the 2nd arm 740 correspond to a power transmission part, and the raising / lowering base 721 corresponds to a movable part. Further, the cover 730 corresponds to a decorative part.

  FIG. 35 is a front view of another fifth movable accessory unit 700 in which the fifth movable accessory 720 is in the initial position, FIG. 36 is a front view in the first state, and FIG. It is a front view in 2 states. FIG. 38 is a diagram illustrating an example of the shape of the arm tip 740c of the second arm 740.

  In another example of the fifth movable accessory unit 700, the fifth movable accessory 720 is rotated about 25 degrees clockwise by the second arm 740 through the first state in which the fifth movable accessory 720 is raised by the first arm 710. It can operate to the second state, which is the rotated position.

  As shown in FIG. 35, a second arm 740 is attached to another example of the fifth movable accessory base 701. Similarly to the first arm 710, the second arm 740 includes an arm portion 740a, a gear portion 740b, and an arm tip portion 740c. A gear 741 provided on the gear portion 740b is engaged with the gear 711 of the first arm.

  A rib 725b is formed on the lower surface of the elevating base 721, and a slide groove 727 is provided on the rib 725b. The engagement portion 721a is slidably engaged with the slide groove 727.

  As shown in FIGS. 36 and 37, when the first arm 710 is rotated clockwise by the driving force of the motor 706, the second arm 740 is rotated counterclockwise, and the arm tip 740c is engaged with the engaging portion 721a. Abut. At this time, the elevating base 721 is raised until the arm tip 740c pushes the pin 713 and the engaging portion 724 fully. Note that when the arm tip 740c starts to push in the pin 713 and the engaging portion 724, the amount of movement of the lifting base 721 may be regulated.

  Further, when the second arm 740 rotates, the arm tip 740c pushes the engaging portion 721a to the left, so that the fifth movable accessory 720 is rotated around the back surface side center of the fifth movable accessory 720. It rotates clockwise around a moving shaft (not shown), and is converted into a second state in which the crescent-shaped decorative portion 730 is raised. At this time, in the first state, the lifting base (movable part) 721 and the cover (decorating part) 730 are not separated from each other, but in the second state, a part of the cover (decorating part) 730 is the lifting base (moving part). 721.

  A biasing member is attached to the back side of the cover (decoration portion) 730 between the cover (decoration portion) 730 and the elevating base 721, and the fifth movable accessory 720 is in the second state by the biasing member. Can be converted to the first state.

  Here, the shape of the arm tip portion 740c of the second arm 740 is formed in any of the shapes shown in FIGS. The arm tip 740c shown in FIG. 38A has a linear shape with respect to the engaging portion 721a, and pushes the engaging portion 721a into the straight portion.

  The arm front end portion 740c shown in FIG. 38B has an arc-shaped cutout portion 740e, and the engagement portion 721a is caught and pushed into the cutout portion 740e. Compared with the arm front end portion 740c of (A), since the notch portion 740e catches the engaging portion 721a, the arm front end portion 740c is prevented from slipping and removing the engaging portion 721a, so that the engaging portion 721a can be securely engaged. Can be pushed in.

  The arm front end portion 740c shown in FIG. 38C has an arc-shaped cutout in which the arm front end portion 740c has a downward inclined portion 740f toward the lower left, and the engaging portion 721a is caught in the middle of the downward inclined portion 740f. A portion 740e is formed. Since the release part of the notch part 740e faces the pushing direction of the engaging part 721a as compared with the arm tip part 740c of (B), the engaging part 721a can be pushed in with a smaller driving force than in (B). it can.

  In this way, by turning to the second state after the fifth movable accessory 720 has moved up, a greater sense of expectation is given to the player as compared with the operation of only raising the fifth movable accessory 720. be able to.

〔Time chart〕
Next, the operation timing of the fifth movable accessory 720 will be described. FIG. 39 is a time chart for explaining an example of the left-handed instruction effect and the operation timing of the fifth movable accessory 720. FIG. 40 is a time chart for explaining the predetermined performance and the operation timing of the fifth movable accessory 720. Note that the left-handed instruction display indicates a hitting instruction displayed as “← left-handed” in the upper right display area 263 of the display device 41.

  As shown in FIG. 39, when the electric support state ends at time T1, a left-handed instruction is displayed, and the second movable accessory motor 557 and the third movable accessory motor 607 are switched from OFF to CCW, The second movable accessory 550a and the third movable accessory 600a rotate counterclockwise at the same time.

  In order to notify that the gaming state changes at time T1, the motor 706 of the fifth movable accessory is switched from OFF to CCW, and the cover (decoration portion) 730 is gradually raised and separated from the lifting base 721. Move to the second state.

  Next, when the variable display game of FIG. 1 is executed at time T2, the gaming machine 10 determines that the player is left-handed, turns off the left-handed instruction display, and the second movable accessory The motor 557 and the third movable accessory motor 607 are switched to OFF. Note that, during the period from time T1 to time T2, the motor 557 and the third movable combination of the second movable combination are used from the viewpoint of extending the life and power saving of the second movable combination 550a and the third movable combination 600a. The physical motor 607 need not always be set to CCW, and OFF and CCW may be repeated at regular intervals.

  Further, at time T2, the motor 706 of the fifth movable accessory is switched from OFF to CW, and the cover (decoration portion) 730 that is raised is converted to the first state and is lowered (moves to the initial position).

  Note that the time T2 when the left-handed instruction display is turned off is not limited to the start of the special figure 1 variable display game. It may be timing, fanfare start timing, or the like, or may be timing when a predetermined period has elapsed from time T1.

  In the time chart shown in FIG. 40, the variable display game started at T2 is a game with high expectation, a predetermined effect (for example, SP reach) is started, and the effect develops at time T3. Then, at time T3 when the effect develops, the motor 706 of the fifth movable accessory is switched from OFF to CCW, and the fifth movable accessory 720 rises again while rising. In addition, the second movable accessory 550a and the third movable accessory 600a repeat the stop from normal rotation, stop from reverse rotation, and stop from reverse rotation every short period to notify the high expectation.

  Here, when an event occurs in which the fifth movable accessory 720 has moved to the operating position at a timing when the fifth movable accessory 720 has not moved to the initial position, the fifth movable accessory 720 moves to the operating position at that timing. , The fifth movable accessory 720 can be stopped. The same applies when an event occurs at the timing when the fifth movable accessory 720 cannot move from the initial position to the operating position.

  As described above, when the operation timing of the fifth movable accessory 720 occurs at the timing when the fifth movable accessory 720 cannot move from the initial position to the operation position, the operation of the fifth movable accessory 720 at the operation timing is changed. By seeing off, the fifth movable accessory 720 does not operate at an unnatural timing (at a delayed timing), and the production is not hindered. Further, since the fifth movable accessory 720 does not move at the timing when it should move (stopped state), the player is given an impression that a rare effect has been executed, and the interest of the game can be enhanced. Further, since the fifth movable accessory 720 is not subjected to an excessive movement that imposes a load, the service life of the accessory is extended.

  Note that the movement of the fifth movable accessory 720 and the state change of the cover 730 (the state change between the first state and the second state) may be executed based on a change in the gaming state or a change in the probability state.

[Left-handed instruction]
FIG. 41 is a front view of the game board 30 immediately after completion of the electric support state. Here, the screen display displayed on the display device 41, the light emission modes of the light guide plates 680 and 683, and the operations of the second movable accessory 550a and the third movable accessory 600a will be described. A thick arrow indicates a direction in which decorative light emission propagates in a wave shape.

  The fifth movable accessory 720 is located at the operating position in front of the display device 41, and the entire surface of the second light guide plate 683 provided in the display device 41 emits light and the shutter is lowered. ing.

  In the central display area 260 of the display device 41, all three special symbols are changing, and in the lower right display area 264, the same symbol variation as the special symbols displayed in the central display area 260 is displayed small. Yes. The special symbol is also displayed small in the lower right display area 264 when the special symbol displayed in the central display area 260 becomes invisible by the fifth movable accessory 720 and is displayed in the lower right display area 264. This is to make it possible to confirm the changing symbol by the special symbol.

  In the upper right display area 263, “← Left” and “Left strike timing” are displayed, and “04” is displayed in the upper portion thereof. In the display of “04”, “0” on the left side indicates the starting memory number of FIG. 1 and “4” on the right side indicates the starting memory number of FIG.

  And since the 2nd movable accessory 550a and the 3rd movable accessory 600a rotate counterclockwise all at once, it can make a player understand directly that it is a left-handed timing. Since the LED included in the game board 30 emits light so as to flow in a wavy shape while drawing an arc from right to left, it is possible to give the player a refreshing feeling when left-handed.

  In addition, the lamp display device 80 can be notified of left-handed strikes by the light emission mode of the right-handed instruction LED provided.

[One aspect of the present invention]
The following inventions can be cited as inventions related to the movable accessory described so far.

  (8) A display device capable of displaying an effect relating to a game, and a movable accessory movable from the first position to the second position, wherein the movable accessory transmits a driving force of a driving source. A movable portion connected to the power transmission portion and movable to the second position, and a decorative portion attached to the movable portion so as to be separable from the movable portion, wherein the decorative portion is movable A gaming machine capable of being converted at the second position into a first state that is not separated from the portion and a second state that is separated from the movable portion.

  (9) A game is executed based on the establishment of the start condition, and when the game has a special result, the special game state that gives a player an advantageous game value, and the game state that is advantageous to the player are said special A specific gaming state different from the gaming state can be generated, and the probability of the special result can be controlled to either a normal probability state or a high probability state higher than the normal probability state. Yes, the decoration unit is converted from the first state to the second state at a timing when the gaming state changes from the specific gaming state or when the probability state changes. Gaming machine.

  (10) The movable accessory has a timing at which the gaming state changes from the specific gaming state or a timing at which the probability state changes before the movement from the first position to the second position is completed. In the case, the game machine according to (9), wherein the movement to the first position and the conversion of the decoration portion to the second state are not executed.

[Game control device]
FIG. 42 is a block diagram of the game control system of the gaming machine 10. The gaming machine 10 includes a game control device 100. The game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) for comprehensively controlling games, and a gaming microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a gaming microcomputer) 111 is provided. The CPU unit 110 includes an input unit 120 having an input port, an output unit 130 having an output port, a driver, and the like, and a data bus 140 connecting the CPU unit 110, the input unit 120, and the output unit 130.

  The CPU unit 110 includes a game microcomputer (CPU) 111 called an amusement chip (IC) and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and generates a clock for a CPU operation clock, a timer interrupt, and a reference for a random number generation circuit. And an oscillation circuit (crystal oscillator) 113. The game control device 100 and electronic components such as a solenoid and a motor driven by the game control device 100 are supplied with a predetermined level of DC voltage such as DC32V, DC12V, and DC5V generated by the power supply device 400 so as to be operable. Is done.

  The power supply apparatus 400 includes a normal power supply unit 410 including an ACDC converter that generates a DC32V DC voltage from a 24V AC power supply, a DC-DC converter that generates a lower level DC voltage such as DC12V and DC5V from a DC32V voltage, and the like. , A backup power supply unit 420 that supplies a power supply voltage to the RAM inside the game microcomputer 111 at the time of a power failure, and a power failure monitoring circuit, and a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal that notify the game control device 100 of the occurrence and recovery of the power failure. And a control signal generation unit 430 that generates and outputs a control signal.

  In the present embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are integrated on a separate board or the game control device 100, that is, the main control device 100. You may comprise so that it may provide on a board | substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are provided on a board different from the power supply apparatus 400 or the main board as in the embodiment. By providing, it can remove from the object of replacement | exchange and can aim at cost reduction.

  The backup power supply unit 420 can be configured with one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power is supplied to the game microcomputer 111 (particularly, the built-in RAM) of the game control device 100, and the data stored in the RAM is held even during a power failure or after the power is shut off. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, for example, detects the occurrence of a power failure when the voltage drops below 17V, for example, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and resets the signal after a predetermined time. Is output. In addition, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from the time when the power is turned on or the power is restored.

  In addition, the game control device 100 is provided with an initialization switch 112. When the initialization switch 112 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated, and based on this, a process for forcibly initializing information stored in the RAM 111c in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 is performed. Done. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. The reset signal is a kind of forced interrupt signal and resets the entire control system.

  The gaming microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111a, a read-only ROM (read-only memory) 111b, and a RAM (random access memory) 111c that can be read and written as needed.

  The ROM 111b stores invariant information (programs, fixed data, various random number determination values, etc.) for game control in a nonvolatile manner, and the RAM 111c stores a work area for the CPU 111a and various signals and random number values during game control. Used as As the ROM 111b or the RAM 111c, an electrically rewritable nonvolatile memory such as an EEPROM may be used.

  In addition, the ROM 111b stores, for example, a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the contents of the effects, the presence or absence of the reach state, and the like. The variation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111a to determine the variation pattern by referring to the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as the start memory. The variation pattern table includes a loss variation pattern table selected when the result is lost, a jackpot variation pattern table selected when the result is a big hit, and the like. The variation pattern (variation mode) may include a pattern that causes reach.

  Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device whose display state can be changed, the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are predetermined. In the gaming machine 10 in which the gaming state becomes a gaming state advantageous to the player (special gaming state) when the special result mode is entered, the game is already derived at the stage where some of the plurality of display results are not yet derived and displayed. This means a display state in which the displayed display result satisfies the condition for the special result mode. In other words, the reach state is deviated from the display condition that is the special result mode even when the display device's variable display control progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed. There is no display mode. For example, a state where so-called full-rotation reach is performed in a variable display region while maintaining a state in which special result modes are aligned (so-called full rotation reach) is also included in the reach state. The reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device has progressed to reach a stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. The display state in the case where at least a part of the display results of the plurality of variable display areas satisfies the condition for the special result mode.

  Thus, for example, a decorative special figure fluctuation display game displayed on a display device corresponding to a special figure fluctuation display game fluctuates a plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle, and right fluctuation display areas on the display device. After displaying, when the display of the result mode is stopped in the order of left, right, and middle, the condition that becomes the special result mode is satisfied in the left and right variable display areas (for example, The state in which the variable display is stopped with the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition, when the variable display in all the variable display areas is temporarily stopped, the condition that the special result mode is satisfied in any two of the left, middle, and right variable display areas (for example, the same identification information It is also possible to set the reach state (except for the special result mode) to the reach state and display the remaining one variable display area in a variable manner from the reach state.

  And, the reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and the possibility of special result mode is different (expected value is different) as a system (reach type, type) of reach effects, normal reach (N reach), Special 1 reach (SP1 reach), Special 2 reach (SP2 reach), Special 3 reach (SP3 reach), and Premier reach are set. Note that the expectation values (expectation, reliability) increase in the order of no reach <normal reach <special 1 reach <special 2 reach <special 3 reach <premier reach. In addition, the reach state is included in a variable display mode at least when a special result mode is derived in a special figure variable display game (when a big hit is achieved). That is, it may be included in the variable display mode in the case where it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variable display game (when it is out of date). Therefore, the state in which the reach state has occurred is a state that is likely to be a big hit compared to the case in which the reach state does not occur.

  The CPU 111a executes a game control program in the ROM 111b, generates control signals (commands) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, and generates and outputs drive signals for the solenoid and the display device, thereby playing the game machine. 10 overall control is performed. Although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 is a jackpot random number for determining the jackpot of the special figure variation display game, a jackpot symbol random number for determining the jackpot symbol, a variation pattern in the special figure variation display game (various patterns A random number generation circuit for generating a variation pattern random number for determining a variation display game in a variation display without reach or a variation display without reach, and an oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113 Based on this, a clock generator is provided that generates a timer interrupt signal for a predetermined period (for example, 4 msec (milliseconds)) for the CPU 111a and a clock that gives the update timing of the random number generation circuit.

  Further, the CPU 111a obtains any one variation pattern table from among the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111b in the process related to the special figure variation display game. Specifically, the CPU 111a determines the game result (big hit or miss) of the special figure fluctuation display game, the probability state (normal probability state or high probability state) of the special figure fluctuation display game as the current gaming state, and the starting memory number. Based on the above, one of the plurality of variation pattern tables is selected and acquired. Here, when executing the special figure fluctuation display game, the CPU 111a serves as fluctuation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one of the plurality of fluctuation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111b.

  The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, and the like, and drives a payout motor 91 of the payout unit in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100 to thereby win a prize ball. Control to pay out. Further, the payout control device 200 controls the payout unit 91 to drive the payout motor 91 of the payout unit on the basis of the loan request signal from the card unit to pay out the rental money.

  The input unit 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a radio wave sensor 62 (panel radio wave sensor) that detects the emission of radio waves to the gaming machine, a gate switch 34a of the general start gate 34, and a start port 1 in the first start winning port 36. Connected to the switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a in the second start prize port 37, the start port 3 switch 42a in the third start prize port 42, the prize port switch 35a, and the big prize port switch 39a of the special variable prize device 39. An interface chip (proximity I / F) 121 is provided which receives a negative logic signal such as a high level of 11V and a low level of 7V supplied from these switches and converts it to a positive logic signal of 0V-5V. ing.

  The output of the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123 or the third input port 124 and is read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Of the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signals of the gate switch 34a, the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, the starting port 3 switch 42a, the winning port switch 35a, and the big winning port switch 39a are the third input. Input to port 124.

  Of the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the detection signal of the radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal output when the abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected are input to the second input port 123.

  Further, the second input port 123 has a detection signal from a fraud detection magnetic sensor switch 61 provided on the front frame 12 of the gaming machine 10, a frame radio wave fraud signal output from the payout control device 200, and a payout busy signal. Is entered. Note that a vibration sensor switch that detects vibration may be provided in the gaming machine so that the detection signal is input to the second input port 123. The frame radio wave illegal signal is a signal output based on the detection of radio waves by the frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12 (main body frame). Is the payout busy signal in a state in which the payout control device 200 can accept a command? It is a signal indicating whether or not.

  Of the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the output to the third input port 124 is also supplied from the game control device 100 to a test firing test device (not shown) via the relay board 70. Further, the detection signals of the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, and the start port 3 switch 42a among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121 are input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the third input port 124. It is configured.

  As described above, the proximity I / F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I / F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12 V from the power supply device 400 in addition to a voltage such as 5 V required for normal IC operation. It has become.

  The data held by the third input port 124 is read by asserting the enable signal CE2 (changing to an effective level) by decoding the address assigned to the third input port 124 by the gaming microcomputer 111. be able to. The same applies to the second input port 123 and the first input port 122 described later.

  In addition, the input unit 120 includes a signal from the glass frame open detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 of the gaming machine 10 and the front frame open detection switch 64 provided on the front frame 12, and a status indicating a payout abnormality. A game is acquired via the data bus 140 by taking in a signal, a shot ball switch signal indicating a shortage of game balls before paying out, an overflow switch signal indicating overflow, and a touch switch signal based on an input of a touch switch provided on the operation handle 24. A first input port 122 for supplying to the microcomputer 111 is provided. The overflow switch signal is a signal that is output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored in the lower plate 23 (full).

  Further, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 125 for inputting a signal such as a power failure monitoring signal or a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 or the like. The Schmitt buffer 125 receives these input signals. It has a function to remove noise from. The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 and the initialization switch signal from the initialization switch 112 are once input to the first input port 122 and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signal from the various switches described above. This is because the number of terminals receiving external signals provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 is limited.

  On the other hand, the reset signal RST from which noise has been removed by the Schmitt buffer 125 is directly input to a reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 and also supplied to each port of the output unit 130. Further, the reset signal RST is directly output to the relay board 70 without going through the output unit 130, thereby turning off the test test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test board. It is configured as follows.

  Further, the reset signal RST may be configured to be output to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70. The reset signal RST is not supplied to the ports 122, 123, and 124 of the input unit 120. Data set to each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RST is input needs to be reset to prevent malfunction of the system, but each data of the input unit 120 is input immediately before the reset signal RST is input. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded when the gaming microcomputer 111 is reset.

  The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 132 disposed on a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the effect control apparatus 300 and a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the payout control apparatus 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. The one-way communication is such that no signal can be input to the game control device 100 from the side of the effect control device 300.

  Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140, and is used to notify special test information of the accreditation organization (not shown) via the relay board 70, and data indicating special symbol information of the variable display game, a signal indicating the probability status of the jackpot, etc. Is configured to be mountable. The buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on a game control device (main board) of a pachinko gaming machine as an actual machine (a mass-produced / sold product) installed in the game store. A detection signal output from the proximity I / F 121, such as a start port switch, that is not required to be processed is supplied to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

  On the other hand, detection signals such as the magnetic sensor switch 61 and the radio wave sensor 62 that cannot be supplied to the test fire testing device as they are are once taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information. An error signal indicating that the state is not possible is supplied from the data bus 140 to the trial test apparatus via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70.

  The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies the signal to the test firing test apparatus, a connector that relays and transmits the signal line of the detection signal of the switch that does not pass through the buffer, and the like. Yes. A chip enable signal CE output from the gaming microcomputer 111 is also supplied to the port on the relay board 70, and the signal of the port selected and controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test firing test apparatus.

  In addition, the output unit 130 receives opening / closing data of a solenoid (general power solenoid) 37c that is connected to the data bus 140 and opens the normal variation winning device 37 and a solenoid (large winning port solenoid) 39b that opens the special variation winning device 39. A second output port 134 for outputting is provided.

  In addition, the output unit 130 includes a third output port 135 for outputting ON / OFF data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the contents displayed on the collective display device 50, and the collective display device 50. A fourth output port 136 is provided for outputting on / off data of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED is connected.

  Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a fifth output port 137 for outputting information related to the gaming machine 10 such as jackpot information to the external information terminal 71. The external information terminal 71 is provided with a photo relay, which can be connected to, for example, an external device (such as an information collection terminal or an amusement hall internal management device (hall computer)) installed in a game store. It can be supplied to the device. Further, a launch permission signal is also output from the fifth output port 137 to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132.

  Further, the output unit 130 receives a switching data signal of the power solenoid 37c and the big prize solenoid 39b output from the second output port 134, and generates and outputs a solenoid driving signal 138a. The second driver 138b for outputting the ON / OFF drive signal of the segment line on the current supply side of the collective display device 50 output from the third output port 135, and the current of the collective display device 50 output from the fourth output port 136 A third driver 138c that outputs an on / off drive signal for the lead-in digit line, and a fourth driver 138d that outputs an external information signal supplied from the fifth output port 137 to an external device such as a management device to the external information terminal 71 Is provided.

  The first driver 138a is supplied with DC32V from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage so that a solenoid operating at 32V can be driven. Also, DC12V is supplied to the second driver 138b that drives the segment lines of the collective display device 50. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit line is for drawing out the digit line corresponding to the display data with a current, the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

  A dynamic drive method is achieved by flowing a current to the anode terminal of the LED through the segment line by the second driver 138b that outputs 12V, and drawing the current through the segment line from the cathode terminal by the third driver 138c that outputs the ground potential. The power supply voltage flows through the LEDs sequentially selected in step 1 so that the LEDs are lit. The fourth driver 138d that outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal 71 is supplied with DC12V in order to give the external information signal a level of 12V. Note that the buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, and the like may be provided on the output board 130 of the game control apparatus 100, that is, on the relay board 70 side instead of the main board.

  Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each gaming machine to the external inspection device 250. The photocoupler 139 is configured to be capable of two-way communication so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can transmit and receive data to and from the inspection device 250 through serial communication. Note that such data transmission / reception is performed using a serial communication terminal included in the gaming microcomputer 111 in the same manner as a normal general-purpose microprocessor, and thus ports such as the input ports 122, 123, and 124 are not provided.

[Production control device]
Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 (sub board) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 43 is a block diagram of an effect control system of the gaming machine 10.

  The effect control device 300 is for displaying video on the display device 41 in accordance with commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 and the main control microcomputer 311, similarly to the game microcomputer 111. A VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 serving as a graphic processor for performing image processing, and a sound source LSI 314 for controlling output of sound in order to reproduce various melody and sound effects from the speaker 19.

  The main control microcomputer 311 holds a program ROM 321 composed of a PROM (programmable read only memory) storing a program executed by the CPU and various data, a RAM 322 that provides a work area, and retains stored contents even when power is not supplied in the event of a power failure A possible FeRAM 323 is connected to an RTC (real time clock) 338 that serves as a clock means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day of the week, time, etc.). A RAM for providing a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311.

  A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes the command from the game microcomputer 111, determines the contents of the presentation, instructs the VDP 312 about the contents of the output video, instructs the sound source LSI 314 to reproduce the sound, turns on the decoration lamp, motors And control of solenoid drive control and production time management.

  The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a for providing a work area and a scaler 312b for enlarging and reducing images. The VDP 312 has an image ROM 325 in which character images and video data are stored, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used to develop and process image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325. ) 326 is connected.

  Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in a parallel manner. By transmitting and receiving data in parallel, commands and data can be transmitted in a shorter time than in the case of serial.

  From the VDP 312 to the main control microcomputer 311, a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC for synchronizing the video of the display device 41 and lighting of the decoration lamps provided on the glass frame 15 and the game board 30, and a synchronization signal for giving data transmission timing STS is input. The VDP 312 informs the main control microcomputer 311 that it is waiting to receive commands and data from the interrupt control signals INT0 to n and the main control microcomputer 311 in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing in the VRAM. A wait signal WAIT and the like are also input.

  The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by an LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC, and vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, and the video generated by the VDP 312 is input to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

  A sound ROM 327 storing sound data is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 314 are connected via an address / data bus 340. An interrupt signal INT is input from the tone generator LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier that drives an upper speaker 19 a provided on the glass frame 15 and a lower speaker 19 b provided on the front frame 12. The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

  In addition, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 that receives a command transmitted from the game control device 100. An effect control command signal (effect command) includes a decoration special figure hold number command, a decoration special figure command, a change command, a stop information command, and the like transmitted from the game control apparatus 100 to the effect control apparatus 300 via the command I / F 331. As received. Since the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 operates at DC 5V and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC 3.3V, the command I / F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function. Yes.

  The effect control device 300 includes a board decoration LED control circuit 332 for driving and controlling a board decoration device 46 having LEDs (light emitting diodes) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40), and a glass frame 15. Frame decoration LED control circuit 333 for driving and controlling a frame decoration device (for example, the frame decoration device 18 and the like) having LEDs (light emitting diodes) and board effects provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40). There is provided a board effect movable body control circuit 334 that drives and controls the device 44 (for example, a movable accessory that enhances the effect of the effect in cooperation with the effect display on the display device 41).

  These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control lamps, motors, solenoids, and the like are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via an address / data bus 340. A frame effect movable body control circuit for driving and controlling a frame effect device such as a motor provided on the glass frame 15 may be provided.

  Further, the effect control device 300 includes an effect button switch 25 a built in the effect button 25 provided on the glass frame 15, a touch panel 25 b provided on the surface of the effect button 25, and a motor in the board effect device 44. A function for detecting the on / off state of the production effect switch 47 (production motor switch) for detecting the initial position and the like, and a detection signal input to the main control microcomputer 311, or a volume adjustment switch provided in the production control device 300 A switch input circuit 336 that detects the state of 335 and inputs a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 is provided.

  In the present embodiment, the accessory effect switch 47 includes a sensor 564, a sensor 609, a sensor 668, a sensor 704, and the like.

  The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 drives a motor or a solenoid to supply a desired level of DC voltage to the effect control device 300 having the above-described configuration and electronic components controlled thereby. In addition to DC32V, display device 41 consisting of a liquid crystal panel, DC12V for driving motors and LEDs, and DC5V as the power supply voltage for command I / F 331, a voltage of DC15V for driving motors, LEDs, and speakers is generated. Is configured to do.

  Further, when an LSI operating at a low voltage such as 3.3 V or 1.2 V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, a DC − for generating DC 3.3 V or DC 1.2 V based on DC 5 V is used. A DC converter is provided in the effect control device 300. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

  The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply apparatus 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to put the device into a reset state. In addition, VDP 312 (VDRESET signal), sound source LSI 314, amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) for driving speakers, and control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET) for driving and controlling lamps and motors, etc., are output from main control microcomputer 311. Signal) to reset them. In addition, a cooling FAN 45 that cools various parts of the gaming machine 10 is connected to the effect control device 300, and the cooling FAN 45 is driven in a state in which the power of the effect control device 300 is turned on.

  Next, game control performed in these control circuits will be described. The CPU 111a of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 extracts a random number value for hit determination of the normal figure based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a provided to the normal figure start gate 34, and the ROM 111b. Is compared with the determination value stored in the table, and a hit / decision of the normal variation display game is determined.

  Then, the universal symbol display game is displayed on the universal symbol display device, after the identification symbol is varied and displayed for a predetermined time, and then stopped. When the result of the general-purpose variable display game is a win, a special result mode is displayed on the general-purpose display, and the general-purpose solenoid 37c is operated to move the movable member 37b of the normal variable winning device 37 for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds) Control to open as described above. That is, the game control device 100 serves as conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member 37b). In addition, when the result of the normal map change display game is out of control, control is performed to display the result form of the shift on the general map display.

  In addition, the start winning (starting memory) is stored based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the start opening 1 switch 36a provided in the first starting winning opening 36, and based on the start memory, the special figure 1 variable display game is stored. The big hit determination random number value is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111b to determine whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is missed.

  Further, the start memory 2 is stored based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the start port 2 switch 37a provided in the normal variation winning device 37 and the start port 3 switch 42a provided in the third start winning port 42. Based on the storage, the jackpot determination random number value of the special figure 2 variable display game is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111b to determine whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is missed.

  Then, the CPU 111a of the game control device 100 outputs a control signal (effect control command) including a determination result of the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game to the effect control device 300. Then, after the identification symbol is variably displayed for a predetermined time on the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52, a special figure variation display game for stopping and displaying is displayed. In other words, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the variable display game is based on winning in the starting winning area (the first starting winning port 36, the normal variation winning device 37, the third starting winning port 42) of the game balls flowing down the game area 32. It constitutes a game control means for controlling the progress.

  In addition, in the effect control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the display device 41 displays a decoration special figure fluctuation display game corresponding to the special figure fluctuation display game. Furthermore, in the production control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the production state setting, the sound output from the speakers 19a and 19b, the process of controlling the light emission of various LEDs, and the like are performed. That is, the production control device 300 serves as production control means for controlling production related to a game (such as a variable display game).

  Then, the CPU 111a of the game control device 100 displays a special result state on the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 and generates a special gaming state when the result of the special figure variation display game is a win. Let In the process of generating the special game state, the CPU 111a performs control to open the open / close member 39c of the special variable prize device 39 by the special prize opening solenoid 39b, for example, so that the game ball can flow into the special prize opening. .

  Then, either a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls wins the grand prize opening or a predetermined openable time (for example, 27 seconds or 0.05 seconds) elapses from the opening of the big prize opening. One round (R) is to open the grand prize opening until such a condition is achieved, and control (cycle game) is continued (repeated) for a predetermined number of rounds (for example, 16 times, 6 times, etc.). . That is, the game control device 100 serves as a special winning opening / closing control means for performing control for opening / closing the special winning opening when the stop result mode becomes the special result mode. Further, when the result of the special figure variation display game is out of order, the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 are controlled to display the result form of the deviation.

  In addition, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state as a gaming state after the special gaming state ends based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. The high probability state (probability variation state) is a state in which the probability of a hit result in the special figure variation display game is higher than the normal probability state. Moreover, even if it becomes a high probability state based on the result aspect of either the special figure 1 fluctuation display game or the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game Both are in a high probability state.

  In addition, the game control device 100 can generate a short-time state (specific game state) as a game state after the special game state ends based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. In the short-time state, the normal fluctuation display game and the normal variation winning device 37 are controlled to be in the short-time operation state, and the normal variation winning device 37 per unit time is compared to the case where the normal variation winning device 37 is in the normal operation state. Since the opening time is controlled so as to be substantially increased, the ordinary power support state (electric support state) is established. Even in a high probability state (normal probability variation state) excluding the latent probability variation state, the ordinary power support (electric support) is executed in a time-short state overlappingly.

  For example, in the short-time state, it is possible to perform time-reduced variation in which the execution time of the above-described usual map variation display game (ordinary diagram variation time) is set to a second variation display time shorter than the normal first variation display time (for example, 10,000 msec is 1000 msec). In the short time state, the execution time of the special figure change display game (special figure change time) is also shortened from the normal time, and the time reduction fluctuation of the special figure change display game is also executed.

  Further, in the short-time state, it is possible to control so that the normal map stop time for displaying the result of the normal map change display game is a second stop time (for example, 704 msec) shorter than the first stop time (for example, 1604 msec). It is.

  Also, in the short time state, when the normal variation winning game 37 is released as a result of the normal variation display game being won, the first release time (for example, 100 msec) in which the release time (normal power release time) is the normal state. It is possible to control so that the second opening time is longer (for example, 1352 msec).

  Further, in the short-time state, the number of times of opening the normal variation winning device 37 (the number of times of normal power release) is greater than the number of times of opening the first time (for example, 2 times) with respect to the result of one hit of the normal-variation display game. It is possible to set the number of second releases (for example, 4 times). In the short time state, it is possible to set the probability of being a hit result of the normal-variable display game (normal probability) to a higher probability than the normal probability (low probability) in the normal operation state.

  In the short-time state, the normal variation winning device 37 is in an open state by changing any one or more of the normal time fluctuation time, the normal time stop time, the number of normal power releases, the normal power release time, and the normal figure probability. Make the conversion time longer than usual. Thereby, in the short time state, winning in the normal variation winning device 37 is easier than in the normal gaming state, and the number of executions of the special figure variation display game per unit time can be increased as compared with the normal gaming state. It is also possible to set a plurality of types of time-short states that are different from each other. In addition, the movable member 37b may be set not to be opened in the normal operation state (the normal probability is 0). Moreover, when it is a hit, either the first opening mode or the second opening mode may be selected. In this case, the selection probabilities of the first release mode and the second release mode may be different. Further, the high probability state and the short time state can be generated independently, and both can be generated simultaneously or only one can be generated.

[Control of game control device]
Hereinafter, control of the gaming machine that performs such a game will be described. First, the control executed by the game microcomputer (game microcomputer) 111 of the game control device 100 will be described. The control process by the gaming microcomputer 111 mainly includes a main process shown in FIGS. 44A and 44B and a timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 48 performed at a predetermined time period (for example, 4 msec).

[Main processing (game control device)]
First, the main process will be described. 44A and 44B are flowcharts showing a procedure of main processing by the game control apparatus 100. The main process is started when the power is turned on. In the flowchart of the process executed by the game control apparatus 100, the step code (number) is represented as “A ***”.

  As shown in FIG. 44A, when starting the main process, the game control apparatus 100 first executes a process for prohibiting interruption (A1001). Furthermore, a stack pointer setting process is executed for setting a stack pointer that is the start address of an area in which the value of a register or the like is saved when an interrupt occurs (A1002).

  Subsequently, register bank 0 is designated as the register bank to be used (A1003), and the upper address of the RAM top address is set in a predetermined register (A1004). For example, when the RAM address is in the range of 0000h to 01FFh, 00h is set as the upper address.

  Next, the game control device 100 outputs a firing prohibition signal and sets the firing permission signal to a prohibited state (A1005). The firing permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a firing prohibition signal, and the launch of the game ball is prohibited. After that, the game control device 100 reads the state of the input port 1 (first input port 122) (A1006).

  Furthermore, the game control device 100 sets a power supply delay timer (A1007). By setting a predetermined initial value in the power supply delay timer, a program of slave control means (for example, payout control apparatus 200 or effect control apparatus 300) that performs various controls in accordance with instructions from game control apparatus 100 serving as main control means A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) is set for waiting until the computer starts normally. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 is first started up and the command is sent to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the production control device 300) is started up. Can avoid missing commands. That is, the game control device 100 delays the start of the main control means (game control device 100) and waits for the start of the slave control devices (the payout control device 200, the effect control device 300, etc.) when the power is turned on. A standby means for setting the standby time is provided.

  The power supply delay timer is measured using a storage area (a RAM area or a register that is not subject to validity determination) that is not a target for RAM validity determination (checksum calculation). Thereby, when calculating check data such as the checksum of the RAM area, it is not necessary to exclude a part of the RAM area, so that it is possible to prevent the control at power-on from becoming complicated.

  Note that an initialization switch signal is input to the first input port 122, and the operation of the initialization switch 112 is reliably performed by reading the state of the first input port 122 before the start of the standby time. It can be detected. In other words, if the state of the initialization switch 112 is read after the standby time has elapsed, the initialization switch 112 is operated after waiting for the standby time to elapse, or the initialization switch 112 is operated from when the power is turned on until the standby time elapses. It is necessary to continue doing. However, by reading the status before the start of the standby time, it can be detected by operating immediately after turning on the power without performing such troublesome operations. Can be prevented from being accepted.

  When the power supply delay timer is set (A1007), the game control apparatus 100 performs the time measurement of the standby time and the process of monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the standby time (A1008 to A1012).

  When the power failure monitoring process is started, the game control device 100 first sets the number of times (for example, twice) that the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 is read and checked via the port and the data bus (for example, two times). A1008), it is determined whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on (A1009).

  When the power failure monitoring signal is on (the result of A1009 is “Y”), the gaming control device 100 determines whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on for the number of checks set in the process of step A1008. Determine (A1010). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on for the number of checks (the result of A1010 is “N”), the process returns to the process of determining whether or not the power failure monitoring signal in step A1009 is on.

  In addition, when the game control device 100 determines that the power failure monitoring signal remains on for the number of checks (the result of A1010 is “Y”), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the gaming machine Wait until the power is turned off. In this way, it is possible to prevent a power outage from being erroneously detected due to noise, etc. by determining that a power outage has occurred when the power outage monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period of time, and appropriately deal with problems at power-on. can do.

  That is, the game control device 100 serves as a power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during a predetermined standby time. As a result, it is possible to cope with a power failure that occurs during the period in which the activation of the game control device 100 that constitutes the main control means is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with a problem at the time of power-on. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the stored contents at the time of the previous power shut-off are retained, so backup processing is performed when a power failure occurs here There is no need. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM, and the control burden can be reduced.

  On the other hand, when the power failure monitoring signal is not on (result of A1009 is “N”), that is, when a power failure has not occurred, the game control device 100 updates the power-on delay timer by −1 (A1011), It is determined whether or not the timer value is 0 (A1012). If the value of the timer is not 0 (the result of A1012 is “N”), that is, if the standby time has not ended, the process returns to the process of setting the number of checks of the power failure monitoring signal in step A1008.

  In addition, when the value of the timer is 0 (the result of A1012 is “Y”), that is, when the standby time has ended, the game control apparatus 100 reads out and writes RWM (read / write) such as RAM or EEPROM. (Memory) access is permitted (A1013), and off-data is output to all output ports (set to no output) (A1014).

  Next, the game control device 100 sets a serial port (a port pre-installed in the game microcomputer 111, which is used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 in this embodiment) (A1015). ). Further, it is determined whether or not the initialization switch is turned on from the state of the first input port 122 read in advance (A1016).

  When the initialization switch is OFF (the result of A1016 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the value of the power outage inspection area 1 in the RWM is normal power outage inspection area check data. (A1017). If it is normal (the result of A1017 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the value of the power failure inspection area 2 in the RWM is normal power interruption inspection area check data (A1018).

  Furthermore, if the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (the result of A1018 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 executes a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum of a predetermined area in the RWM (A1019). Then, it is determined whether or not the calculated checksum matches the checksum when the power is turned off (A1020). If the checksums match (the result of A1020 is “Y”), the process proceeds to step A1021 in FIG. 44B, and the process when the power is restored normally from the power failure is executed.

  In addition, when the initialization switch is on (result of A1016 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 determines that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (result of A1017 is “N”). Alternatively, if the result of A1018 is “N”) and the checksum is not normal (the result of A1020 is “N”), the process proceeds to step A1026 in FIG. 44B and the initialization process is executed. That is, the initialization switch forms an initialization operation unit that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 initializes data stored in the RAM based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. Make.

  The game control apparatus 100 saves the initial value at the time of power failure recovery in the area to be initialized (A1021). The areas to be initialized are a power failure inspection area, a checksum area, and an area related to error fraud monitoring. The busy signal status area for storing the state of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can accept the command, is also cleared, indicating that the state of the payout busy signal has not been determined. Undefined state. After that, the game control apparatus 100 examines an area for storing the game state in the RWM and determines whether or not the game state is a high probability state (A1022).

  Here, when the gaming state is not a high probability state (the result of A1022 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 skips the processing of Step A1023 and Step A1024 and proceeds to the processing of Step A1025. On the other hand, when the gaming state is a high probability state (the result of A1022 is “Y”), the ON information is saved in the high probability notification flag area (A1023), for example, a high probability notification LED provided in the batch display device 50 (Error indicator) ON (lighted) data is saved in the segment area (A1024). And the command at the time of a power failure restoration corresponding to the process number prepared in order to rationally perform the below-mentioned special figure game process is transmitted to an effect control board (effect control apparatus 300) (A1025), and step A1031 Execute the process.

  On the other hand, when the processing of step A1026 is executed after execution of steps A1016, A1017, A1018, and A1020, the game control device 100 sets the RAM access prohibited area to access permission (A1026). Further, all RAM areas including the busy signal status area are cleared to 0 (A1027), and the RAM access prohibition area is set to access prohibition (A1028).

  Then, the game control device 100 saves the initial value at the time of RAM initialization in the area to be initialized (A1029). The area to be initialized is an area related to the setting of the customer waiting demonstration area and the production mode. Furthermore, the game control device 100 transmits a command at the time of RAM initialization to the effect control board (A1030), and executes the process of step A1031.

  Note that the power failure recovery command sent in step A1025 and the RAM initialization command sent in step A1030 include a model designation command indicating the type of gaming machine, and the number of suspensions shown in FIG. The decorative special figure 1 holding number command and the decorative special figure 2 holding number command, and the probability information command indicating the state of the probability are included. Also, depending on the state when the power is turned off or when the power is turned on, if the special figure fluctuation display game is being executed when the power is turned off, the recovery screen command is used. If the customer is waiting when the power is turned off, the customer waiting demo command is used. When initialized at power-on, a power-on command is included. Furthermore, an effect mode information command indicating the state of the effect mode depending on the model, and a time-saving count information command indicating the number of remaining games in the time-saving state are included. The RAM initialization command includes a RAM initialization command.

  The game control device 100 activates a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the game microcomputer 111 (clock generator) (A1031). The CTC circuit is provided in a clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator divides an oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113 and a timer interrupt signal having a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111a based on the divided signal. And a CTC circuit for generating a signal CTC for giving a trigger for updating the random number supplied to the random number generation circuit.

  After executing the CTC activation process of step A1031, the game control device 100 activates and sets the random number generation circuit (A1032). Specifically, the CPU 111a performs setting of a code (specified value) for activating the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit. Also, a bit transposition pattern of a hard random number (here, a big hit random number) generated by the hardware of the random number generation circuit is set.

  Bit transposition pattern is a method of permutation when the extracted random bit arrangement (the arrangement before the upper bit transposition) is replaced in a predetermined order and stored as a different bit arrangement (the arrangement after the lower bit transposition). It is a pattern that defines

  In the present embodiment, by replacing the bits of the random numbers according to the bit transposition pattern, the regularity of the random numbers can be broken and the confidentiality of the random numbers can be improved. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. Further, the user may arbitrarily set it.

  After that, the game control device 100 extracts the value of a predetermined register (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit at the time of power-on, and corresponding various initial value random numbers (random numbers that determine the big hit symbol (big hit symbol) RWM as the initial value (start value) of RWM as the initial value (start value) of random number 1, big hit symbol random number 2), random number that determines the normal symbol hit (per random number), random number that determines the normal symbol hit symbol (per hit random number), etc. (A1033) and interrupt is permitted (A1034). The random number generation circuit in the CPU 111a used in the present embodiment is configured such that the initial value of the soft random number register changes every time the power is turned on, and this value is used as the initial value (start value) of various initial value random numbers. By doing so, it is possible to break the regularity of random numbers generated by software, making it difficult for a player to obtain illegal random numbers.

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 executes an initial value random number update process for updating the values of various initial value random numbers and breaking the regularity of the random numbers (A1035). Although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit symbol random number, and the hit random number are configured to be generated using random numbers generated in a random number generation circuit. However, the big hit random number is a so-called “high-speed counter” that is updated based on a clock with a speed equal to or higher than the CPU operating clock. The big hit symbol random number and the hit random number have the same period as the timer interrupt processing that is the processing unit of the program. Is a “low-speed counter” that is updated based on the CTC output (CTC (CTC2) different from CTC (CTC0) for timer interrupt processing).

  In the big hit symbol random number and the hit symbol random number, a so-called “initial value changing method” is adopted in which each initial value random number (generated by software) is used to change the start value every time the random number goes around. Each random number may be updated by a counter by +1 or 1, or may be updated by a random method in which all values within a range appear without overlapping until one round is completed. That is, the big hit random number is a random number that is updated only by hardware, and the big hit symbol random number is a random number that is updated by hardware and software.

  After the initial value random number update process in step A1035, the game control device 100 sets the number of times of checking by reading the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via the port and the data bus (A1036), and monitoring the power failure. It is determined whether or not the signal is on (A1037). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on (the result of A1037 is “N”), the process returns to the initial value random number update process of step A1035. That is, when no power failure has occurred, the initial value random number update processing and the power failure monitoring signal check (loop processing) are repeated. By permitting an interrupt before the initial value random number update process (A1035) (A1034), if a timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process, the interrupt process is preferentially executed. It is possible to prevent the interruption process from being pressed by waiting in the value random number update process.

  Note that the initial value random number update process of step A1035 includes a method of performing the initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process in addition to the main process. When such a method is adopted, both of the initial value random number update processes are performed. In order to avoid the execution of the update process, when the initial value random number update process is performed in the main process, it is necessary to disable the interrupt and then update and release the interrupt. On the other hand, if the initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process is not performed as in the present embodiment and only in the main process, there is no problem even if the interrupt is canceled before the initial value random number update process. This has the advantage that the main process is simplified.

  When the power failure monitoring signal is on (the result of A1037 is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on for the number of checks set in the process of step A1036. Determine (A1038). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on for the number of checks (the result of A1038 is “N”), the process returns to step A1037 to determine whether the power failure monitoring signal is on.

  In addition, the game control device 100 interrupts once when the power failure monitoring signal is on for the number of checks (the result of A1038 is “Y”), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred. Is prohibited (A1039) and off-data is output to all output ports (A1040).

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 saves the power failure inspection area check data 1 in the power failure inspection area 1 (A1041), and saves the power failure inspection area check data 2 in the power failure inspection area 2 (A1042). Further, a checksum calculation process for calculating a checksum when the RWM is turned off is executed (A1043), and the calculated checksum is saved (A1044). Finally, a process for prohibiting access to the RWM is executed (A1045), and the system waits until the gaming machine is powered off.

  In this way, the check data is saved in the power failure inspection area and the checksum at the time of power shutoff is calculated to determine whether the information stored in the RWM before the power shut down is properly backed up. It can be judged at the time of re-input.

  From the above, the main control means (game control apparatus 100) for overall control of the game, and the slave control means (payout control apparatus 200, effect control apparatus 300, etc.) for performing various controls in accordance with instructions from the main control means. ), The main control means is a standby means (game control apparatus) for setting a predetermined standby time for delaying the start of the main control means and waiting for the start of the slave control device when the power is turned on. 100) and a power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the predetermined waiting time.

  The power supply device 400 includes a power supply device 400 that supplies power to various devices. The power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when the occurrence of a power failure is detected, and the power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) When a power failure monitoring signal is continuously received over a predetermined period, it is determined that a power failure has occurred.

  Also, the main control means (game control device 100) is based on the RAM 111c capable of storing data, an initialization operation unit (initialization switch) operable from the outside, and the operation of the initialization operation unit. An initialization means (game control device 100) for initializing data stored in the RAM 111c, and the operation state of the initialization means is read before the start of the waiting time.

  In addition, the main control means (game control apparatus 100) permits access to the RAM 111c after the standby time has elapsed.

[Checksum calculation processing]
FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the checksum calculation process. The checksum calculation process is executed in steps A1019 and A1043 of the main process shown in FIGS. 44A and 44B.

  First, the game control apparatus 100 sets the start address of the RWM as the start value of the calculated address (A1101). Then, the number of repetitions is set (A1102), and “0” is set as a calculated value (A1103). The number of bytes of RAM used is set as the number of repetitions.

  Thereafter, the game control apparatus 100 sets a value obtained by adding the calculated value to the content of the calculated address as a new calculated value (A1104), updates the calculated address by +1 (A1105), and updates the number of repetitions by -1 (A1106). Then, it is determined whether the checksum calculation is completed (A1107).

  If the checksum calculation has not ended (the result of A1107 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 repeats the processing from step A1104 to step A1107. When the checksum calculation is completed (the result of A1107 is “Y”), the checksum calculation process is terminated.

[Initial value random number update processing]
FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the initial value random number update process. The initial value random number update process is executed in step A1035 of the main process shown in FIGS. 44A and 44B.

  First, the game control device 100 updates the jackpot symbol initial value random number by +1 (increases by 1) (A1201). Subsequently, the winning initial value random number is updated by +1 (A1202), the winning symbol initial value random number is updated by +1 (A1203), and the initial value random number updating process is terminated.

  Here, the “big hit symbol initial value random number” is a random number that becomes an initial value of a random number that determines the big hit stop symbol of the special figure. Also, the “hit initial value random number” is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the hit of the usual figure variation game, and the “hit symbol initial value random number” is a random number that determines the hit stop symbol of the normal figure. It is a random number that is the initial value.

  As described above, the randomness of the random number can be improved by continuing to increment the initial value random number as long as time permits in the main process.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the procedure of timer interrupt processing. The timer interrupt process is started when a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator is input to the CPU 111a. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, timer interrupt processing is started.

  When the timer interrupt process is started, the game control device 100 first designates the register bank 1 as a register bank to be used (A1301), and sets the upper address of the RAM head address in a predetermined register (A1302). Switching from register bank 0 used in the main process to register bank 1 at the start of the timer interrupt process is equivalent to saving the register used in the main process. When timer interrupt processing is started, the interrupt is automatically disabled.

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 executes input processing for inputting from various sensors and switches, capturing signals, that is, reading the state of each input port (A1303). Further, based on the output data set in various processes, an output process for performing drive control of an actuator such as a solenoid (large winning opening solenoid 39b) is executed (A1304). If a firing prohibition signal is output in the processing of step A1005 in the main processing, a firing permission signal is output by performing this output processing, and the firing permission signal can be set to a permitted state. .

  Next, the game control device 100 executes payout command transmission processing for outputting the command set in the transmission buffer in various processing to the payout control device 200 (A1305), and further, random number update processing 1 (A1306), random number update Process 2 (A1307) is executed. Thereafter, it is monitored whether there is a normal signal input from the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the start port 3 switch 42a, the gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a, and the big winning port switch 39a, and an error. A winning prize switch / state monitoring process is executed (A1308) for monitoring (such as whether the front frame or the glass frame is open).

  Further, a special figure game process for performing a process related to the special figure fluctuation display game is executed (A1309), and then a general figure game process for carrying out a process relating to the normal figure fluctuation display game is executed (A1310).

  Next, the game control device 100 is provided in the gaming machine 10 and executes a segment LED editing process for driving a segment LED that displays special information variation game and various information related to the game to display desired contents. (A1311).

  Furthermore, the game control apparatus 100 executes a magnet fraud monitoring process that checks the detection signal from the magnetic sensor switch 61 to determine whether there is any abnormality (A1312). Furthermore, a radio wave fraud monitoring process (panel radio wave fraud monitoring process) for checking whether there is any abnormality by checking the detection signal from the radio wave sensor 62 of the game board is executed (A1313).

  After that, the game control device 100 executes an external information editing process for setting a signal to be output to various external devices in the output buffer (A1314). Thereafter, the timer interrupt process is terminated. Note that, when the timer interrupt process returns, the interrupt disabled state and the register bank specification are automatically restored, but depending on the CPU used, the interrupt is permitted after the external information editing process. Or a process of returning the register bank designation to the register bank 0 may be performed.

[Input processing]
Next, details of the input process (A1303) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing a procedure of input processing.

  First, the game control device 100 reads the state of the switch detection signal taken into the input port 1, that is, the first input port 122 (A1401). If there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port, the bit state is cleared (A1402).

  Next, the game control device 100 saves (stores) the read state of the input port 1, that is, the first input port 122 in the switch control area 1 in the RWM (A1403). Subsequently, after preparing the address of the input port 2, that is, the second input port 123 (A1404), the address of the switch control area 2 in the RWM is prepared (A1405). Subsequently, unused bit data is prepared (A1406), and bit data to be inverted is prepared (A1407). Then, a switch reading process is executed (A1408). In this embodiment, “preparation” means setting a value in a register, but is not limited to this, and a value may be set in an RWM or other memory.

  Next, the game control device 100 prepares an address of the switch control area 3 in the RWM (A1409), and prepares an address of the input port 3, that is, the third input port 124 (A1410). Further, unused bit data is prepared (A1411), and bit data to be inverted is prepared (A1412). Further, thereafter, a switch reading process is executed (A1413), and the input process is terminated.

[Switch read processing]
Next, the details of the switch reading process (A1408, A1413) in the above-described input process will be described. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the switch reading process.

  First, the game control device 100 reads the state of the signal taken into the target input port (A1501). If there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port, the state of that bit is cleared (A1502), the bit that needs to be inverted is inverted (A1503), and saved in the port input state 1 of the target switch control area ( (A1504). Thereafter, the process waits until a delay time (0.1 ms) until the second reading elapses (A1505).

  When the delay time (0.1 ms) elapses, the game control device 100 performs the second reading of the state of the signal captured in the target input port (A1506). If there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port, the state of the bit is cleared (A1507), the bit that needs to be inverted is inverted (A1508), and the port input state of the target switch control area (first time data) ) And save the inverted data (second time data) (A1509). After that, a definite bit pattern is created in which the same state bit is 1 and the different bit is 0 in the first and second reads (A1510), and the determinate bit pattern and port input state 2 are ANDed to confirm this time Bits are set (A1511).

  Next, the game control device 100 creates an undetermined bit pattern in which the same status bit is 0 and the different bit is 1 in the first and second readings (A1512), and the undetermined bit pattern and the previous interrupt The logical product with the definite state is calculated and used as the previous hold bit (A1513). As a result, it is possible to obtain a signal state from which noise due to chattering of the switch or the like is removed.

  Then, the game control device 100 combines the current confirmed bit and the previous held bit and saves it as the current confirmed state (A1514). Further, an exclusive OR of the previous state and the final state is taken and saved as a rising edge (A1515). Thereafter, the switch reading process ends.

  If the timer interrupt cycle is short (for example, 2 ms), the switch reading is performed once for each interrupt process, and the signal changes by comparing the result with the previous reading. There is a method of determining whether or not it has been done, but in such a case, if the state of the switch read in the previous interrupt is lost before the next interrupt processing, there is a possibility that it cannot be determined correctly. On the other hand, it is possible to avoid the above-described problem by performing the switch reading process twice in one interrupt process with a predetermined time difference as in the present embodiment.

[Output processing]
Next, details of the output process (A1304) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the output process.

  First, the game control device 100 outputs (resets) off-data to a port 135 (see FIG. 3) that outputs segment data of the collective display device (LED) 50 (A1601). Next, the data to be output to the solenoid output port 134 that outputs the data of the special winning opening solenoid 39b is synthesized and output (A1602).

  Then, the game control apparatus 100 updates the value of the digit counter for sequentially scanning the digit lines of the collective display device (LED) 50 (A1603). Further, the output data of the digit line of the LED corresponding to the value of the digit counter is acquired (A1604). The acquired data and external information data are combined (A1605), and the combined data is output to the digit output / external information output port 136 (A1606). Thereafter, the segment line output data is loaded from the segment area in the RWM corresponding to the digit counter value (A1607), and the loaded data is output to the segment output port 135 (A1608).

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 loads and synthesizes the data to be output to the external information terminal 71 (A1609), and further synthesizes the synthesized data and the output data for permission to fire (A1610), and finally synthesizes them. Data is output to the external information / firing permission signal output port 137 (A1611). Next, the data output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70. (A1612). Thereafter, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70 that outputs a test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70. (A1613).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 loads and synthesizes data to be output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70 that outputs a test signal to the test fire test apparatus, and the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70. The synthesized data is output (A1614). Furthermore, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal of the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70 ( A1615). Then, the data output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70. (A1616), the output process is terminated.

[Payout command transmission processing]
Next, details of the payout command transmission process (A1305) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing a procedure of payout command transmission processing.

  The game control device 100 first checks whether or not there is a count in the winning number counter area 2 (A1701). The winning number counter area is provided in the RAM 111c of the game control apparatus 100, and a winning number counter area 1 and a winning number counter area 2 are provided. The winning number counter area 1 is an area used to transmit a payout command (prize ball command) for instructing the payout control device 200 to pay out a prize ball, and a prize for which a payout command has not yet been transmitted. The winning data corresponding to the ball is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 1 serves as a prize ball command counter capable of storing information relating to the prize ball command.

  The winning number counter area 2 is used to transmit a main winning ball signal to be output to an external device every time the number of winning balls (scheduled number of payouts) generated by winning a winning opening reaches a predetermined number (here, 10). The winning data corresponding to the winning ball which is the area to be used and for which the main winning ball signal generation processing is not performed is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 2 serves as a main winning ball signal counter capable of storing information related to the main winning ball signal. In addition to the main prize ball signal, a payout prize ball signal is output to the external device every time the number of prize balls actually paid out from the payout control apparatus 200 reaches a predetermined number (here, 10). By checking these two signals, it is possible to monitor unauthorized payout.

  Each of these winning number counter areas is provided with a winning number counter area for each of the number of winning balls set for each winning opening (for example, three winning balls, ten winning balls, and 14 winning balls). Accordingly, 1 is added to the count number of the corresponding winning number counter area based on the winning at the winning opening. That is, information on the winning can be stored in units of one winning in the winning area. Note that a larger area than the winning number counter area 2 is assigned to the winning number counter area 1 so that more winning data can be stored. This is because the main prize ball signal can be transmitted regardless of the state of the transmission destination, whereas the payout command may be suspended depending on the state of the payout control device 200 that is the transmission destination, and more unsent This is because data may be accumulated.

  In the process of checking whether or not there is a count in the winning number counter area 2 in step A1701, the game control apparatus 100 receives a winning that is a check target among a plurality of winning number counter areas provided for each number of winning balls. It is determined whether there is a count number other than “0” in the number counter area.

  When there is no count number in the winning number counter area 2 (the result of A1701 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 updates the address of the winning number counter area 2 to be checked (A1702). Further, it is determined whether or not the check of the count numbers in all the winning number counter areas has been completed (A1703).

  When all the checks are completed (the result of A1703 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 proceeds to the process of step A1712. On the other hand, if all the checks have not been completed (the result of A1703 is “N”), the process returns to step A1701, and the processes from step A1701 to step A1703 are repeated.

  In addition, when there is a count number (the result of A1701 is “Y”), the game control device 100 subtracts (−1) the count number of the target winning number counter area (A1704), and the winning number counter area 2 The payout number corresponding to the address is acquired (A1705). Then, the value in the prize ball remaining area and the number of payouts are added (A1706), and the addition result is saved in the prize ball remaining area as a new prize ball remaining number (A1707). Note that as the value of the remaining prize ball area before the processing of step A1707, a fraction that has not reached a predetermined number as a reference for output of the main prize ball signal is stored.

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 subtracts 10 from the addition result (A1708), and determines whether or not the subtraction result is 0 or more (A1709). If it is not equal to or greater than 0 (the result of A1709 is “N”), the process proceeds to step A1712. On the other hand, if it is 0 or more (the result of A1709 is “Y”), the value of the main prize ball signal output count area is updated by 1 (A1710), and the subtraction result is saved in the prize ball remaining area (A1711). Further, the process returns to step A1708.

  Through the above processing, the main prize ball signal is output to an external device such as a hall computer. That is, the game control device 100 serves as an external information output means for outputting a main prize ball signal including information on the number of prize balls determined to be paid out as a result of winning a game ball to a predetermined prize area to the outside of the gaming machine. . By outputting the main prize ball signal, when game ball payouts such as during big hits are concentrated, the output of the prize ball signal is delayed with the payout of game balls, and the exact generated during the big hit is delayed. It is possible to prevent a problem that the number of prize balls cannot be counted.

  If the payout command transmission timer is not 0, the game control apparatus 100 updates −1 (A1712), and determines whether or not the payout command transmission timer has reached 0 (A1713). If the payout command transmission timer is not 0 (the result of A1713 is “N”), the payout command transmission process is terminated. If the payout command transmission timer is 0 (the result of A1713 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the payout busy signal status (flag) is busy (busy state flag) (A1714).

  The payout busy signal is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control apparatus 200 can immediately start payout control. If the payout control cannot be started immediately, the payout busy signal is in an on state (busy state). It is said. That is, the payout busy signal can be said to be a signal indicating whether or not a payout command (prize ball command) can be received. That is, the payout busy signal is a status signal indicating whether or not the payout control means (payout control device 200) can start payout control. The payout busy signal status (flag) is information that sets whether or not the payout control device 200 can immediately start payout control based on the state of the payout busy signal, and is an idle that can immediately start payout control. Any one of a state, a busy state where the payout control cannot be started immediately, and an undefined state where the state is undefined is set.

  When the payout busy signal status is busy (the result of A1714 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 ends the payout command transmission process. When not busy, the idle state and the undefined state are included. In this way, when the payout control device 200 cannot immediately start payout control and does not transmit a payout command, it is possible to perform useless processing by not performing subsequent processing relating to the transmission of the payout command. To prevent and reduce the burden of control.

  The indefinite state is set, for example, by clearing the busy signal status area in the process at power-on. This indeterminate state means that an idle state or a busy state is set based on the state of the payout busy signal being maintained for a predetermined period of time indicating that the payout control can be started immediately or cannot be executed. To eliminate. That is, when a power failure occurs and returns from the power failure, even if a state signal indicating that the payout control can be started is output from the payout control device 200, a prize ball command is immediately sent to the payout control device 200. A prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control device 200 in response to the fact that a state signal indicating that payout control can be started from the payout control device 200 is continuously output for a predetermined period. As a result, the payout control device 200 receives the prize ball command and knows that the payout process can be performed immediately, and then transmits the prize ball command, and the payout control corresponding to the prize ball command is performed. It can be prevented from being broken.

  When the payout busy signal status is not busy (the result of A1714 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 checks whether there is a count in the winning number counter area 1 (A1715). In the process of checking whether the winning number counter area 1 has a count, among the plurality of winning number counter areas provided for each number of winning balls, a count number other than “0” is displayed in the winning number counter area to be checked. It is determined whether or not there is.

  When there is no count number (the result of A1715 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 updates the address of the winning number counter area 1 to be checked (A1716), and all the winning number counter areas are updated. It is determined whether or not the count number has been checked (A1717). If all checks are completed (the result of A1717 is “Y”), the payout command transmission process is terminated. On the other hand, if all the checks have not been completed (the result of A1717 is “N”), the process returns to step A1715, and the processes from step A1715 to A1717 are repeated.

  In addition, when there is a count number (the result of A1715 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 subtracts (−1) the count number of the target winning number counter area (A1718), and the target winning number counter A payout command corresponding to the area is acquired (A1719). Then, the payout command (payout number command) is stored in the payout serial transmission buffer (A1720), an initial value is set in the payout command transmission timer (A1721), and then the payout command transmission process is terminated. The payout command transmission timer is for managing transmission intervals, and for example, 200 ms is set as an initial value.

  As a result, a payout command (prize ball command) in units of one win in the winning area is generated and transmitted to the payout control device 200. The payout control device 200 performs control for paying out a predetermined number of prize balls based on the payout command. That is, the game control apparatus 100 can start the payout control with a status signal indicating whether or not the payout control means output from the payout control means (payout control apparatus 200) can start payout control. In this case, a prize ball command transmission means for sending a prize ball command to the payout control means is provided.

  As described above, the game control device 100 performs control to transmit the award ball command based on the state signal output from the payout control device 200, so that the award is given only when the payout control device 200 can immediately execute payout control. A ball command will be sent. As a result, data corresponding to a winning that has not yet been paid out is held on the game control device 100 side, so that it is backed up by the game control device 100 when a power failure occurs, and is backed up to the payout control device 200. Even if it does not have the function to do, accurate payout control can be realized.

  In a conventional gaming machine (for example, a gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2000-312759), when a power-off state occurs for some reason, the payout control device 200 backs up data in its storage means and immediately before power-off. The payout control state based on the data is maintained. However, the conventional gaming machine requires a function for backing up, resulting in a problem of increasing costs. According to the present embodiment, accurate payout control can be realized without providing the payout control apparatus 200 with a function for backing up.

  Also, since the main prize ball signal transmitted to the external device is output regardless of the state of the payout busy signal, the main prize ball signal can be output without delay. The time can be accurately grasped, for example, the base value can be grasped accurately. Also, since the prize ball command counter capable of storing information relating to the prize ball command and the main prize ball signal counter capable of storing information relating to the main prize ball signal are separately provided, the prize ball command and the main prize ball having different transmission timings are provided. Signal information can be managed separately, and information can be managed reliably.

  From the above, the game control is comprehensively performed, and the winning areas provided in the gaming area 32 (the first starting winning port 36, the second starting winning port 37, the third starting winning port 42, the general winning port 35, Game control means (game control device 100) for transmitting a prize ball command based on the winning of the game ball to the special variable prize winning device 39), and paying out of the game ball based on the prize ball command transmitted from the game control means A payout control means (payout control device 200) for performing control, and the game control means outputs a status signal (busy signal) indicating whether or not the payout control means output from the payout control means can start payout control. ) To send the prize ball command to the payout control means, and when a power failure occurs and the power is restored from the power failure, the payout control means outputs a status signal indicating that the payout control can be started. As if In response to the status signal indicating that payout control can be started from the payout control means without being immediately transmitted to the payout control means, and the status signal is output continuously over a predetermined period. Is transmitted to the payout control means.

  In addition, a plurality of winning areas (first start winning opening 36, second starting winning opening 37, third starting winning opening 42, general winning opening 35, special variable winning apparatus 39) having different numbers of winning balls are provided in the game area 32, The game control means (game control device 100) includes a prize ball command counter (game control device 100) capable of specifying whether or not a prize ball command for instructing game ball payout control is transmitted for each prize ball number. When the status signal indicates that the payout control can be started and there is an unsent prize ball command in each prize ball command counter, the prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control means (payout control device 200). The status signal specifies whether the payout control means can start payout control before specifying whether there is an unsent prize ball command in each prize ball command counter. Will be.

  In addition to performing overall game control, access to predetermined winning areas (first start winning port 36, second starting winning port 37, third starting winning port 42, general winning port 35, special variable winning device 39) Game control means (game control device 100) that transmits a prize ball command based on winning of a game ball, and payout control means (payout) that performs payout control of a game ball based on a prize ball command transmitted from the game control means Control device 200), and the game control means indicates that the payout control means output from the payout control means can start payout control, indicating whether or not the payout control means can start payout control. A prize ball command transmission means (game control device 100) for sending a prize ball command to the payout control means, and information on the number of prize balls determined to be paid out when the game ball is awarded to a predetermined prize area. Including a prize ball signal (May An external information output means (game control device 100) for outputting a prize ball signal) to the outside of the gaming machine, and the external information output means is a state signal output from the payout control means, and the payout control means performs payout control. The prize ball signal is output regardless of whether or not it can be started.

  In addition, the prize ball command transmission means (game control device 100) immediately receives a prize ball command even when a power failure occurs and the status signal indicates that the payout control can be started when the power failure is restored. Is not transmitted to the payout control means (payout control device 200), and a prize ball command is issued in response to a state in which the state signal indicates that the payout control can be started for a predetermined period of time. This means that it is transmitted to the payout control means.

  Further, the game control means (game control device 100) has a prize ball command counter (game control device 100) capable of storing information relating to a prize ball command and a prize capable of storing information relating to a prize ball signal (main prize ball signal). A ball signal counter (game control device 100), and the prize ball command transmission means (game control device 100) is a predetermined prize area (first start prize port 36, second start prize port 37, third start prize). A prize ball command is generated in units of one prize to the mouth 42, the general prize opening 35, and the special variable prize winning device 39), and one prize ball when the status signal indicates that the payout control can be started. It is configured to transmit a command to the payout control means (payout control device 200), and the prize ball command counter (game control device 100) can store information on the winning in units of one winning in a predetermined winning area. And the prescribed input The game ball is updated at the time of winning the game ball to the area, and the update is performed in response to the transmission of the prize ball command to the payout control means, so that the number of prize ball commands not transmitted can be stored. The output means accumulates the number of award balls determined to be paid out when a game ball is awarded to a predetermined prize area, and outputs a prize ball signal to the outside of the gaming machine every time the accumulated value reaches a predetermined number. The winning ball signal counter is configured to store information on the winning in units of one winning in a predetermined winning area, and is updated at the time of winning a game ball in the predetermined winning area and outputs external information. By updating in accordance with the process of accumulating prize balls by means, it is possible to store the number of prize balls that have not yet been accumulated.

[Random number update process 1]
FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the procedure of random number update processing 1. The random number update process 1 is executed in step A1306 of the timer interrupt process. The random number update process 1 is a process for updating the jackpot symbol random number, the hit random number, and the initial value (start value) of the symbol random number that are the targets of the initial value random number update process.

  The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the jackpot symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (A1801).

  When the jackpot symbol random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (the result of A1801 is “N”), the game control device 100 executes the processing after step A1804. On the other hand, when the big hit symbol random number is waiting for the initial value setting (the result of A1801 is “Y”), the big hit symbol initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (A1802). Then, the next initial value of the loaded jackpot symbol random number is set in a register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (A1803).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the winning random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (A1804). If the winning random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (the result of A1804 is “N”), the processing after step A1807 is executed.

  On the other hand, when the winning random number is waiting for the initial value setting (the result of A1804 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 loads the winning initial value random number as the next initial value (A1805). Then, the next initial value of the loaded random number is set in the register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (A1806).

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the winning symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (A1807). If the winning symbol random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (the result of A1807 is “N”), the random number update processing 1 is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the winning symbol random number is waiting for the initial value setting (the result of A1807 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 loads the winning symbol initial value random number as the next initial value (A1808). Then, the next initial value of the loaded winning symbol random number is set in the register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (A1809), and the random number update process 1 is terminated.

[Random number update process 2]
FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the random number update process 2. The random number update process 2 is executed in step A1307 of the timer interrupt process. The random number update process 2 is a process for updating the fluctuation pattern random number for determining the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation display game of the special figures 1 and 2.

  In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, there are a 1-byte random number (variation pattern random number 2) and a 2-byte random number (variation pattern random number 1) as the variation pattern random numbers. Each time an interrupt occurs, the update target is switched and processed. Furthermore, when the random number to be updated is 2 bytes, the update process is performed at different interrupts for the upper byte and the lower byte. That is, the update of the 2-byte fluctuation pattern random number 1 (reach fluctuation mode determining random number) by the random number update process 2 executed in one interrupt process for the main process is executed for either the upper 1 byte or the lower 1 byte. It is comprised so that.

  The game control apparatus 100 first updates a random number update scan counter for sequentially designating which random number to be updated from among a plurality of random numbers to be updated (A1901). Next, the address of the effect random number update table corresponding to the value of the random number update scan counter is calculated (A1902). Then, a random number upper limit determination value is acquired from the table referred to based on the calculated address (A1903). The table to be referred to at this time stores an upper limit determination value for each type of random number, that is, a value for determining whether or not the random number has made a round.

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 loads the value of the M1 counter to which a random value is set (A1904).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 acquires a mask value for masking the value of the M1 counter, and masks the value of the M1 counter (A1905). Note that the mask value is a bit number that varies depending on the random number to be updated. For example, when the lower 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is updated, the lower 3 bits of the M1 counter and the upper 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 Is updated to the lower 4 bits of the M1 counter. This is because the upper limit varies depending on the type of random number. As a mask value, when the lower 1 byte of the variation pattern random number 1 is updated, the lower 3 bits of the M1 counter are updated. When the upper 1 byte of the variation pattern random number 1 is updated, the lower 1 byte of the variation pattern random number 1 is updated. Although 4 bits have been exemplified, the numerical value is an example and the present invention is not limited to this.

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the random number area (random number counter) to be updated is the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (A1906). If the random number area is the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (the result of A1906 is “Y”), the remaining value by masking the value of the M1 counter with the upper 1 byte as a mask value as the addition value ( Hereinafter, this is referred to as “masked value”) and set to a mask update value obtained by adding “1”, the lower 1 byte is set to “0” (A1907), and the process proceeds to step A1909.

  In addition, when the random number area is not the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (the result of A1906 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 sets the upper 1 byte as “0” as the addition value and sets the lower 1 byte. The mask update value is set (A1908), and the process proceeds to step A1909. The reason why “1” is added to the masked value is to prevent the masked value from being “0” and to prevent the value from changing by adding “0”.

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the random number to be updated is a 2-byte random number (A1909). If it is a 2-byte random number (the result of A1909 is “Y”), the value of the random number area to be updated (2 bytes) is set (A1910), and the process proceeds to step A1912. On the other hand, if the random number to be updated is not a 2-byte random number (the result of A1909 is “N”), “0” is set as the upper 1 byte of the random value, and the random number area to be updated is set as the lower 1 byte of the random value. A value (1 byte) is set (A1911), and the process proceeds to step A1912.

  The game control apparatus 100 sets a value obtained by adding the addition value determined in the process of step A1907 or A1908 to the random number value as a new random value, and whether the new random value is larger than the upper limit determination value acquired in the process of A1903. It is determined whether or not (A1913).

  If the new random number value is not greater than the upper limit determination value (the result of A1913 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 places the new random value in the random number area below the 1-byte random number or 2-byte random number. Save (A1915). When the new random number value is larger than the upper limit determination value (the result of A1913 is “Y”), a value obtained by subtracting the upper limit determination value from the new random number value is set as a new new random value (A1914). A random number value is saved in a random number area lower than the 1-byte random number or the 2-byte random number (A1915).

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the updated random number is a 2-byte random number (A1916). If it is not a 2-byte random number (the result of A1916 is “N”), the random number update processing 2 is terminated. On the other hand, if it is a 2-byte random number (the result of A1916 is “Y”), a new random value (or a value if a new random number is calculated again) is saved in the upper random number area of the 2-byte random number. (A1917), and the random number update process 2 ends.

  In this way, the CPU 111a updates the variation pattern random number for determining the variation pattern in the variation display game of FIG. 1 and FIG. Accordingly, the CPU 111a displays the special figure variation display game among various random numbers extracted based on the inflow of game balls into the starting areas of the first starting winning opening 36, the second starting winning opening 37, and the third starting winning opening 42. Random number updating means for updating a variation pattern random number for determining the variation mode (variation pattern).

[Prize mouth switch / status monitoring process]
FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing a procedure of a winning mouth switch / status monitoring process. The prize opening switch / status monitoring process is executed in step A1308 in the timer interrupt process.

  First, the game control apparatus 100 prepares a winning opening monitoring table 1 corresponding to one of the large winning opening switches 39a (two) in the large winning opening (special variable winning apparatus 39) (A2001). Then, an illegal & winning monitoring process is performed to monitor whether there is an illegal winning in the big winning opening even though the big winning opening is not open (A2002). Details of the fraud & prize winning monitoring process will be described later.

  After that, the game control device 100 prepares a winning opening monitoring table 2 corresponding to the other of the large winning opening switches 39a (two) in the large winning opening (special variable winning apparatus 39) (A2003). Then, the illegal winning / winning monitoring process for monitoring the illegal winning and detecting the normal winning is executed (A2004).

  Then, the game control device 100 prepares a winning port monitoring table corresponding to the start port 2 switch 37a in the normal variation winning device 37 (A2005). Then, an illegal & prize winning monitoring process for monitoring an illegal prize and detecting a normal prize is executed (A2006). Subsequently, a winning opening monitoring table of winning opening switches that can always win is prepared (A2007). In the present embodiment, the winning opening switches that can always win are the winning opening switch 35a, the starting opening 1 switch 36a, and the starting opening 3 switch 42a. A winning opening switch that does not require fraud monitoring is the start opening 1 switch 36a or the like.

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 executes a winning number counter updating process for updating the winning number (A2008). Subsequently, a start port error monitoring process for monitoring a winning error at the start winning port is executed (A2009). Then, a state scan counter for sequentially designating which switch or signal among the plurality of switches and signals whose states are to be monitored is to be monitored this time is updated (A2010). The status scan counter is updated in the range of 0 to 3.

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 prepares the gaming machine state monitoring table 1 for setting the state to be monitored according to the value of the state scan counter (A2011). Then, a gaming machine state check process for determining a state such as whether an error has occurred is executed (A2012). Details of the gaming machine state check process will be described later.

  By referring to the state scan counter value in the gaming machine state monitoring table 1, when the state scan counter value is 0, the state based on the abnormality detection signal 1 output by the occurrence of disconnection of the switch connector or the like (switch abnormality) 1 error) monitoring is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is 1, monitoring of the state (shoot ball break error) based on the chute ball break switch signal from the payout control device 200 is set. When the value of the state scan counter is 2, monitoring of the state based on the overflow switch signal (overflow error) is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is 3, the state based on the dispensing abnormality status signal (dispensing abnormality error) Monitoring is set.

  Next, the game control device 100 prepares the gaming machine state monitoring table 2 for setting the state to be monitored according to the value of the state scan counter (A2013). Then, a gaming machine state check process for determining a state such as whether an error has occurred is executed (A2014).

  By referring to the state scan counter value in the gaming machine state monitoring table 2, when the state scan counter value is 0, the state (glass frame open error) is monitored based on the signal output from the glass frame open detection switch. When the value of the state scan counter is 1, monitoring of the state (main body frame open error, front frame open error) based on the signal output from the front frame open detection switch is set. When the value of the state scan counter is 2, monitoring of the state based on the frame radio wave improper signal (frame radio wave fraud) is set. When the value of the state scan counter is 3, monitoring of the state based on the touch switch signal is set. Is set.

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the state scan counter is 0 (A2015). If the value of the error scan counter is not 0 (the result of A2015 is “N”), the winning prize switch / state monitoring process is terminated. In this case, there is no state monitoring target in the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 referred to next.

  In addition, when the value of the error scan counter is 0 (the result of A2015 is “Y”), the gaming control device 100 prepares the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 (A2016), and an error has occurred. A game machine state check process for determining the state of the machine is executed (A2017).

  By referring to the state scan counter value in the gaming machine state monitoring table 3, when the state scan counter value is 0, a state based on the abnormality detection signal 2 output due to occurrence of disconnection of the connector of the switch (switch abnormality) 2 error) monitoring is set. The gaming machine state monitoring table 3 is not defined when the state scan counter is 1 to 3.

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 executes a payout busy signal check process for setting a busy signal status (a payout busy signal flag) based on a payout busy signal indicating whether the payout control device 200 can start payout control (A2018). ), The winning prize switch / status monitoring process is terminated. Details of the payout busy signal check process will be described later.

  Note that the processing from step A2016 to A2018 is executed only when the value of the state scan counter updated for each timer interrupt is 0, so that it is executed once every four timer interrupts. . That is, when the timer interruption is performed every 4 ms, the processing from A2016 to A2018 is performed every 16 ms.

[Unauthorized & winning monitoring process]
FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the fraud & prize winning monitoring process. The fraud & prize winning monitoring process is executed in steps A2002, A2004, and A2006 in the prize opening switch / status monitoring process shown in FIG.

  The fraud & winning monitoring process is a process that is performed on the large winning opening switch 39a of the special variable winning apparatus 39 and the winning opening switch (starting opening 2 switch 37a) in the normal variable winning apparatus 37. For the 2nd starting prize opening (ordinary variable prize winning device 37) and large prize winning opening (special variable prize winning device 39), it is easy to perform fraud in which the opening and closing member is forcibly opened and the game ball is inserted and the prize ball is paid out. In addition to detecting winnings, fraud is monitored.

  First, the game control device 100 checks the fraud monitoring period flag of the winning prize switch to be monitored for error (A2101), and determines whether it is during the fraud monitoring period (A2102). For example, the fraud monitoring period is a period other than during the special gaming state in which the special variable winning device 39 is opened when the winning port switch to be monitored for error is the large winning port switch 39a.

  Then, when it is the fraud monitoring period (the result of A2102 is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not there is an input to the target prize opening switch (A2103). If there is no input to the target prize opening switch (the result of A2103 is “N”), the target notification timer update information is loaded (A2112). If there is an input to the target winning opening switch (the result of A2103 is “Y”), the target illegal winning number is updated by +1 (A2104), and the illegal winning number after addition is determined to be the fraudulent occurrence of the monitoring target. It is determined whether or not the number is more than 5 (for example, 5) (A2105).

  The reason why the number of judgments is five is that, for example, when a large winning opening in the open state is converted to a closed state, the game ball is caught in the door member of the large winning opening, and the gaming ball passes the valid period of the count switch. This is to prevent a case where a prize is won or a signal is noisy and not to be judged as illegal, and an error is not easily determined even though it is not illegal.

  If the number is not equal to or greater than the determination number (the result of A2105 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 prepares a winning mouth monitoring table for the target winning mouth switch (A2110). If the number is equal to or greater than the determination number (the result of A2105 is “Y”), the number of fraudulent winnings is limited to the fraud occurrence determination number (A2106), and an initial value (for example, 60000 ms) is saved in the target fraudulent winning notification timer area. (A2107).

  Next, the game control device 100 prepares the target fraud occurrence command as an effect command (A2108), and further prepares a fraudulent winning occurrence flag as the fraud flag (A2109). Then, the prepared illegal flag is compared with the value of the target illegal flag area (A2120).

  On the other hand, if it is not the fraud monitoring period (the result of A2102 is “N”), the game control device 100 prepares a winning opening monitoring table for the target winning opening switch (A2110), and the number of winnings for setting the winning ball Counter update processing is executed (A2111). Details of the winning number counter updating process will be described later.

  Then, the game control device 100 loads the target notification timer update information (A2112), and determines whether or not the notification timer is permitted to be updated (A2113). If the update of the notification timer is not permitted (result of A2113 is “N”), the fraud & prize winning monitoring process is terminated. On the other hand, when update of the notification timer is permitted (result of A2113 is “Y”), if the target notification timer is not 0, −1 is updated (A2114). Note that the minimum value of the notification timer is set to zero.

  The update of the notification timer is permitted when the winning port switch subject to error monitoring is a winning port switch (start port 2 switch 37a) in the normal variation winning device 37. In addition, the notification timer is allowed to be updated when the winning port switch subject to error monitoring is one large winning port switch 39a, and is permitted when the winning port switch subject to error monitoring is the other large winning port switch 39a. Not. As a result, it is possible to prevent the notification timer from being updated twice as much as the unauthorized notification about the special variation winning device 39, and to be up in half of the specified time (for example, 60000 ms).

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the notification timer is 0 (A2115), and when the value is not 0 (the result of A2115 is “N”), that is, when the time is not up. Ends the fraud & prize winning monitoring process. If the value of the notification timer is 0 (the result of A2115 is “Y”), that is, if the time has expired or has already expired, the target fraud cancel command is prepared as an effect command (A2116). Then, an illegal winning cancellation flag is prepared as an illegal flag (A2117). And it is determined whether it is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (A2118).

  The game control device 100 is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (the result of A2118 is “Y”), that is, when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 in the current fraud & prize winning monitoring process. Clears the target number of illegal prizes (A2119).

  In addition, the game control device 100 does not execute the processing of step A2119 or when it is not the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (the result of A2118 is “N”), that is, the fraud & prize winning monitoring process before the previous time. When the value of the notification timer becomes 0, the prepared illegal flag is compared with the value of the target illegal flag area (A2120).

  When the prepared fraud flag matches the value of the target fraud flag area (the result of A2120 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 ends the fraud & prize winning monitoring process. If the prepared illegal flag does not match the value of the target illegal flag area (the result of A2120 is “N”), the prepared illegal flag is saved in the target illegal flag area (A2121), and the production command is set. The process is executed (A2122). Thereafter, the fraud & prize winning monitoring process is terminated.

  Through the above process, a fraud occurrence command is transmitted to the production control device 300 when a fraud occurs, and a fraud release command is transmitted to the production control device 300 along with a fraud release, and the start and end of fraud notification are set. The Rukoto.

[Winner counter update process]
FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing a procedure of winning number counter update processing. The winning number counter updating process is executed in step A2111 of the fraud & winning monitoring process shown in FIG.

  First, the game control apparatus 100 acquires the number of winning port switches to be monitored from the winning port monitoring table (A2201), and determines whether or not there is an input (more accurately, an input change) to the target winning port switch. (A2202). If there is no input (the result of A2202 is “N”), the table address is updated to the address of the next record (A2211), and it is determined whether or not the monitoring of all the switches has been completed (A2212).

  On the other hand, when there is an input to the target prize opening switch (the result of A2202 is “Y”), the game control device 100 loads the value of the target winning number counter area 1 (A2203) and sets the loaded value. +1 is updated (A2204). Further, it is determined whether an overflow occurs due to the updated value (A2205).

  If no overflow has occurred (the result of A2205 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 saves the updated value in the winning number counter area 1 (A2206). After the processing of step A2206 is completed, or when an overflow occurs (result of A2205 is “Y”), the value of the target winning number counter area 2 is loaded (A2207).

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 updates the loaded value by +1 (A2208), and determines whether an overflow occurs due to the updated value (A2209). If no overflow occurs (the result of A2209 is “N”), the updated value is saved in the winning number counter area 2 (A2210). After the process of step A2206 is completed or when an overflow occurs (result of A2209 is “Y”), the table address is updated to the address of the next record (A2211). Then, it is determined whether or not the monitoring of all the switches has been completed (A2212).

  If the monitoring of all the switches has not been completed (the result of A2212 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 returns to the process of step A2202 for determining whether or not there is an input to the target winning prize switch. If all the switches have been monitored (the result of A2212 is “Y”), the winning number counter updating process is terminated. As a result of the above processing, the winning number counter areas 1 and 2 are updated based on winning in the winning area and the winning information is stored.

[Start port error monitoring process]
FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the start port error monitoring process. The winning number counter updating process is executed in step A2009 of the fraud & winning monitoring process shown in FIG.

  The game control apparatus 100 first determines whether or not there is a winning at the first starting winning opening 36 (starting opening 1) (A2301). If there is no winning at the first start winning opening 36 (the result of A2301 is “N”), it is determined whether or not there is a win at the third starting winning opening 42 (starting opening 3) (A2307).

  When there is a winning at the first start winning opening 36 (start opening 1) (result of A2301 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the previous winning is also the first start winning opening 36. (A2302). When the previous winning is also the first start winning opening 36 (the result of A2302 is “Y”), the number of consecutive winnings stored in the consecutive winning amount area in the RWM is updated by +1 (A2303), and the number of consecutive winnings is the upper limit. It is determined whether the value is equal to or greater than a value (for example, 4) (A2304). When the number of consecutive winnings is equal to or greater than the upper limit value (the result of A2304 is “Y”), the processing after step A2313 is executed. If the number of consecutive winnings is less than the upper limit (the result of A2304 is “N”), it is determined whether or not there is a winning at the third starting winning port 42 (starting port 3) (A2307).

  On the other hand, when the previous winning is not the first start winning opening 36 (the result of A2302 is “N”), the game control device 100 saves 1 in the continuous winning number area in the RWM (A2305), and starts in the RWM. In the mouth determination data area, starting port 1 winning information indicating that the first starting winning port 36 has been won is saved (A2306), and it is determined whether or not the third starting winning port 42 has been won (A2307). ).

  When there is no winning at the third start winning opening 42 (starting opening 3) (the result of A2307 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 executes the processing after step A2318. If there is a winning at the third start winning opening 42 (result of A2307 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the previous winning is also the third starting winning opening 42 (A2308).

  When the previous winning is also the third start winning opening 42 (the result of A2308 is “Y”), the number of consecutive winnings stored in the consecutive winning amount area in the RWM is updated by +1 (increase by 1) (A2309) Then, it is determined whether the number of consecutive winnings is an upper limit value (for example, 4) or more (A2310). When the number of consecutive winnings is less than the upper limit (the result of A2310 is “N”), the processing after step A2318 is executed. When the previous winning is not the third start winning opening 42 (the result of A2308 is “N”), 1 is saved in the continuous winning number area in the RWM (A2311), and the third opening winning determination data area in the RWM is set to the third. The starting port 3 winning information indicating that the starting winning port 42 has been won is saved (A2312), and the processing after step A2318 is executed.

  When the number of consecutive winnings is equal to or greater than the upper limit (the result of A2304 or A2310 is “Y”), the game control device 100 keeps the number of consecutive winnings at the upper limit (A2313), and sets the initial value ( For example, 60 seconds) is saved (A2314), the error occurrence flag is saved in the starter error flag area in the RWM (A2315), the starter error occurrence command is prepared as an effect command (A2316), and the effect command setting process Is executed (A2317), and the start port error monitoring process is terminated. The presentation control device 300 that has received the start-port error generation command performs notification (warning) of the occurrence of an error by the display device 41 or the like. Details of the effect command setting process will be described later.

  As a process after A2318, the game control device 100 first determines whether or not the start port error notification timer is 0 (A2318). When the start port error notification timer is 0 (the result of A2318 is “Y”), the start port error monitoring process is terminated. If the start port error notification timer is not 0 (the result of A2318 is “N”), the start port error notification timer is updated by −1 (decrease by 1) (A2319), and the start port error notification timer is 0 again. It is determined whether or not (A2320). When the start port error notification timer is 0 (the result of A2320 is “Y”), a normal flag is saved in the start port error flag area in the RWM (A2321), and the start port error cancel command is prepared as an effect command. (A2322), the effect command setting process is executed (A2323), and the start port error monitoring process is terminated. The presentation control device 300 that has received the start port error cancel command stops the notification (warning) of the error occurrence.

  The winning switching mechanism 105 of the starting winning port unit 101 operates so as to alternately win the game ball at the first starting winning port 36 (starting port 1) and the third starting winning port 42 (starting port 3). If the same start winning opening is continuously won, there is a possibility that the winning switching mechanism 105 may be broken or illegal winning may be caused by a thread fishing ball. Therefore, a failure of the winning switch mechanism 105 or an illegal winning is checked by the start port error monitoring process. When the number of consecutive winnings to the same starting winning port among the first starting winning port 36 and the third starting winning port 42 reaches an upper limit value (for example, 4) (when the same starting winning port is won four consecutive times), the production control The apparatus 300 notifies the occurrence of an error. For a period corresponding to the initial value (for example, 60 seconds) of the start port error notification timer, the effect control device 300 can perform notification (warning) of the occurrence of an error. As described above, the game control device 100 constitutes a start-up port error monitoring unit, and the effect control device 300 forms a start-up port error notification unit.

[Game machine status check processing]
FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the gaming machine state check process. The gaming machine state check process is executed in steps A2012, A2014, and A2017 in the prize opening switch / state monitoring process shown in FIG.

  The game control apparatus 100 first acquires a state monitoring table corresponding to the state scan counter (A2401). The state scan counter is set to a value in the range of 0 to 3 corresponding to the gaming state. The relationship between the state monitoring table and the state scan counter is the same as described in the prize opening switch / state monitoring process shown in FIG.

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the check target signal is ON (A2402). When the signal to be checked is not on (result of A2402 is “N”), that is, when the signal to be checked is off, a state off flag is prepared as a state flag (A2403), and a target state off command is acquired. And prepare (A2404). Further, the target state-off monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (A2405). The state off flag indicates a normal state with respect to an error signal, and indicates a non-touch state with respect to a touch switch signal.

  On the other hand, when the check target signal is on (result of A2402 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 prepares a state on flag as a state flag (A2406), acquires the target state on command, and prepares (A2407). Further, the target state on-monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (A2408). The state on flag indicates an abnormal or illegal state for an error signal, and indicates a touched state for a touch switch signal.

  When the process of step A2405 or step A2408 ends, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the target signal control area matches the state of the acquired signal (A2409). If they match (the result of A2409 is “Y”), the process proceeds to step A2412. If they do not match (the result of A2409 is “N”), the acquired signal state is saved in the target signal control area (A2410), and the target state monitoring timer is cleared (A2411).

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 updates the target state monitoring timer by +1 (A2412). Further, it is determined whether or not the updated value of the state monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the corresponding timer comparison value (A2413). If the updated state monitoring timer value is less than the corresponding timer comparison value (the result of A2413 is “N”), the gaming machine state check process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the updated state monitoring timer value is equal to or greater than the corresponding timer comparison value (the result of A2413 is “Y”), the game control device 100 updates the state monitoring timer by −1, and the timer comparison value− The value is kept at 1 (A2414). Furthermore, it is determined whether or not the prepared status flag matches the value of the target status flag area (A2415). If they match (A2415 result is “Y”), the gaming machine state check process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the prepared state flag does not match the value of the target state flag area (the result of A2415 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 saves the prepared state flag in the target state flag area. (A2416). Finally, an effect command setting process for setting an effect command is executed (A2417), and the gaming machine state check process ends. The effect command here is either a state off command or a state on command. If the state on command is an error command, the effect control device 300 is caused to start error notification.

[Payout busy signal check processing]
FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the payout busy signal check process. The payout busy signal check process is executed in step A2018 in the winning opening switch / state monitoring process shown in FIG.

  The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the payout busy signal input from the payout control device 200 is on (A2501). The payout busy signal is turned on when the payout control device 200 cannot start payout control.

  When the payout busy signal is not on (result of A2501 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 prepares an idle state flag as a determination status (A2502), and sets an off-confirmation monitoring timer comparison value (for example, 32 msec). (A2503). On the other hand, when the payout busy signal is on (the result of A2501 is “Y”), a busy state flag is prepared as a determination status (A2504), and an on-confirmation monitoring timer comparison value (for example, 32 msec) is set (A2505). ).

  After that, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the busy signal state area matches the state (ON / OFF) of the current payout busy signal (A2506). If they match (the result of A2506 is “Y”), the process proceeds to step A2509. If they do not coincide (the result of A2506 is “N”), the current payout busy signal state is saved in the busy signal state area (A2507), and the busy signal monitoring timer is cleared to 0 (A2508).

  Next, the game control device 100 updates the busy signal monitoring timer by 1 (A2509), and determines whether the monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the timer comparison value (A2510). If the monitoring timer is less than the timer comparison value (the result of A2510 is “N”), the payout busy signal check process is terminated.

  When the monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the timer comparison value (result of A2510 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 updates the busy signal monitoring timer by −1 and keeps the value by 1 smaller than the timer comparison value (A2511). The prepared state flag is saved in the payout busy signal flag area (busy signal status area) (A2512), and the payout busy signal check process is terminated.

  In the payout busy signal check process, a payout busy signal flag (busy signal status) is set based on the payout busy signal. At this time, even if the state of the payout busy signal changes, the busy signal flag is not changed immediately, but the busy signal flag is changed when the changed state continues over the timer comparison value. It is hard to be affected by such as.

  In addition, since the busy signal flag is cleared when the power is turned on, the busy signal flag is not set and becomes an indefinite state until one of the signal states continues for the timer comparison value. Thus, when a power failure occurs and the power supply recovers from the power failure, even if a status signal indicating that the payout control can be started is output from the payout control device 200, the prize ball command is immediately issued. In response to the fact that a state signal indicating that the payout control can be started from the payout control device 200 is continuously output for a predetermined period of time, a prize ball command is sent to the payout control device 200. Will be sent. As a result, the payout control device 200 receives the prize ball command and knows that the payout process can be performed immediately, and then transmits the prize ball command, and the payout control corresponding to the prize ball command is performed. It can be prevented from being broken.

[Special Figure Game Processing]
Next, details of the special game process (A1309) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special game process. In the special figure game process, the input of the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, and the start port 3 switch 42a is monitored, the entire process related to the special figure variation display game is controlled, and the special figure display is set.

  The game control apparatus 100 first executes a start port switch monitoring process for monitoring winnings of the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, and the start port 3 switch 42a (A2601). In the starting port switch monitoring process, when a game ball wins the first variable winning device 37 that forms the first starting winning port 36, the second starting winning port, and the third starting winning port 42, various random numbers (such as big hit random numbers) are extracted. The game result prior determination is performed to determine in advance the game result based on the winning in the stage before the start of the special figure variation display game based on the winning. The details of the start port switch monitoring process will be described later.

  Next, the game control device 100 executes a special winning opening switch monitoring process (A2602). In the big winning opening switch monitoring process, the detection of the game ball by the count switch 39a provided in the special variable winning device 39 is monitored. Details of the special winning opening switch monitoring process will be described later.

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 updates -1 (subtracts 1) (A2603) if the special figure game processing timer is not 0. The special game process timer is timed by the interrupt period (4 msec) of the timer interrupt process by updating -1. The minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to zero. Next, it is determined whether or not the special figure game processing timer is 0 (A2604). If the special figure game process timer is not 0 (the result of A2604 is “N”), the process proceeds to step A2615.

  If the special game process timer is 0 (the result of A2604 is “Y”), that is, if the time has expired or has already expired, the game control apparatus 100 corresponds to the special figure game process number. A special figure game sequence branch table to be referred to for branching to the process is set in the register (A2605). Further, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is acquired using the special figure game sequence branch table (A2606). Subsequently, a subroutine call is made with a special figure game process number, and a game branch process corresponding to the special figure game process number is executed (A2607).

  When the game process number is “0” in step A2607, the game control apparatus 100 monitors the start of fluctuation of the special figure fluctuation display game, sets the fluctuation start of the special figure fluctuation display game, sets the effect, A special figure routine process for setting information necessary for performing the special figure changing process is executed (A2608). Details of the special figure routine processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the game process number is “1” in step A2607, the game control device 100 sets a special figure stop display time, special information for performing special figure display processing, and the like. The process during the figure change is executed (A2609). Details of the special figure changing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the game processing number is “2” in step A2607, the game control device 100 sets the fanfare command according to the type of jackpot or sets each jackpot if the game result of the special figure variation display game is a jackpot. A special chart display process is performed for setting the fanfare time according to the special winning opening opening pattern, setting information necessary for performing the fanfare / interval process (A2610). Details of the special figure display processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the game process number is “3” in step A2607, the game control apparatus 100 sets the opening time of the big prize opening, updates the number of times of opening, and processes information necessary for performing the big prize opening opening process. Processing during fanfare / interval for setting and the like is executed (A2611). Details of the fanfare / interval processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the game process number is “4” in step A2607, the game control device 100 sets an interval command if the big hit round is not the final round, while setting an ending command if the final round is, A process for opening a special winning opening is performed to set information necessary for performing the special winning opening remaining ball process (A2612). Details of the special winning opening open process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the game process number is “5” in step A2607, the game control device 100 sets a time for discharging the remaining balls in the big winning opening if the big hit round is the final round, A big winning opening remaining ball process for setting information necessary for the big hit end process is executed (A2613). Details of the winning prize remaining ball processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the game process number is “6” in step A2607, the game control apparatus 100 executes a jackpot end process for setting information necessary for executing the special figure routine process (A2614). Details of the jackpot end process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the process based on the special figure game process number is completed, the game control apparatus 100 prepares a special figure 1 fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 1 display 51 (A2615), and then the special figure 1 display. The symbol variation control process according to 51 is executed (A2616). And after preparing the special figure 2 fluctuation | variation control table for controlling the fluctuation | variation of the special figure 2 indicator 52 (A2617), the symbol fluctuation | variation control process which concerns on the special figure 2 indicator 52 is performed (A2618). Details of the symbol variation control process will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Starter switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the start port switch monitoring process (A2601) in the special figure game process will be described. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the start port switch monitoring process.

  First, the game control device 100 prepares a winning monitoring table for the first starting winning opening 36 (starting opening 1) (A2701), executes a hard random number acquisition process (A2702), and wins the first starting winning opening 36. It is determined whether or not there is (A2703). If there is no winning at the first start winning opening 36 (the result of A2703 is “N”), the processing after step A2709 is executed. On the other hand, if there is a winning at the first start winning opening 36 (the result of A2703 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not it is during the special drawing time (in the normal power support state) (A2704).

  When it is determined that the game control device 100 is not in the special drawing time reduction (in the normal power support state) (the result of A2704 is “N”), the game control device 100 executes the processing after step A2707. On the other hand, if it is in the special drawing time (in the normal power support state) (the result of A2704 is “Y”), a right-handed instruction notification command is prepared as an effect command (A2705), and an effect command setting process is executed ( A2706).

  That is, in the normal power support state (short-time state), a right-handed instruction notification command is prepared and an effect command setting process is executed regardless of the probability state (high probability state / low probability state) of the variable display game. . In the case of the present embodiment, the first start winning opening 36 is not left unless it is left-handed, and the ordinary variable winning device 37 is not right-winned. If the player does not hit right, the game ball does not pass through the normal start gate 34. Accordingly, the right-handed is more advantageous than the left-handed in the power-powered support state (short-time state), but when the first start winning opening 36 is won during the power-powered support state (that is, the power-powered support). In the case of left-handed during the state), a right-handed instruction notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 performs notification (warning) instructing right-handed using the display device 41 or the like. .

  Next, the game control device 100 prepares a table for setting information on hold by the first start winning port 36 (start port 1) (A2707), and then executes a special figure start port switch common process (A2708). Then, a winning monitoring table for the second starting winning opening (ordinary variable winning device 37) is prepared (A2709), a hard random number acquisition process is executed (A2710), and whether or not there is a winning at the second starting winning opening. Determine (A2711). If there is no winning at the second start winning opening (the result of A2711 is “N”), the processing after step A2716 is executed.

  On the other hand, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the ordinary electric accessory (ordinary variable winning device 37) is in operation when there is a prize at the second start prize opening (the result of A2711 is “Y”). That is, it is determined whether or not the normal variation winning device 37 is in an open state in which a game ball can be won (A2712). If the ordinary electric accessory is in operation (the result of A2712 is “Y”), the process proceeds to step A2714.

  On the other hand, when the ordinary electric accessory is not in operation (the result of A2712 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not an ordinary electric power fraud has occurred (A2713). When the number of fraudulent winnings to the normal variation winning device 37 is equal to or larger than the number of fraud determinations (for example, 5), it is determined that the normal power fraud is occurring. The normal variation winning device 37 cannot win a game ball in the closed state, and can win a game ball only in the open state. Accordingly, when the game ball wins in the closed state, it is a case where some abnormality or fraud occurs, and when there is a game ball won in such a closed state, the number is counted as an illegal winning number. Then, when the number of illegal winnings counted in this way is equal to or larger than a predetermined fraud occurrence determination number (upper limit value), it is determined that fraud has occurred.

  The game control device 100 prepares a table for setting information on hold by the second start winning opening (ordinary variable winning device 37) when the ordinary electric power fraud has not occurred (the result of A2713 is "N") (A2714) Then, the special figure start port switch common process is executed (A2715), and the processes after step A2716 are executed. Also, in A2713, when it is determined that the power transmission fraud is occurring (the result of A2713 is “Y”), the processing after Step A2716 is executed. That is, the second start memory is not generated any more.

  The game control device 100 prepares a winning monitoring table for the third starting winning port 42 (starting port 3) (A2716), executes a hard random number acquisition process (A2717), and the third starting winning port 42 (starting port 3). It is determined whether or not there is a prize (A2718). If there is no winning at the third start winning opening 42 (the result of A2718 is “N”), the start opening switch monitoring process is terminated. On the other hand, when there is a winning at the third start winning opening 42 (the result of A2718 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the special drawing is being short-running (in the normal power support state).

  When it is determined that the game control device 100 is not in the state of special drawing time (in the normal power support state) (the result of A2719 is “N”), the game control device 100 executes the processing after step A2722. On the other hand, if it is in the special drawing time (in the normal power support state) (the result of A2719 is “Y”), a right-handed instruction notification command is prepared as an effect command (A2720), and an effect command setting process is executed ( A2721).

  That is, in the normal power support state (short-time state), a right-handed instruction notification command is prepared and an effect command setting process is executed regardless of the probability state (high probability state / low probability state) of the variable display game. . In the case of the present embodiment, the third start winning opening 42 is not left unless it is left-handed, and the ordinary variable winning device 37 is not right-winned. If the player does not hit right, the game ball does not pass through the normal start gate 34. Therefore, in the power transmission support state (short-time state), right-handed is more advantageous than left-handed, but when there is a winning at the third start winning opening 42 during the power-powered support state (that is, power transmission support) In the case of left-handed during the state), a right-handed instruction notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 performs notification (warning) instructing right-handed using the display device 41 or the like. .

  Next, the game control device 100 prepares a table for setting information on hold by the third start winning port 42 (start port 3) (A2722), and then executes the special figure start port switch common process (A2723). The start port switch monitoring process is terminated.

[Hard random number acquisition processing]
Next, details of the hard random number acquisition processing (A2702, A2710, A2717) in the start port switch monitoring processing will be described. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing a procedure of hard random number acquisition processing.

  First, the game control device 100 sets start port no-win information indicating that there is no win in the start win port (A2801). Next, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the target switch (A2802). If there is no input to the target switch (the result of A2802 is “N”), the hard random number acquisition process is terminated. The target switch is the start port 1 switch 36a in the hard random number acquisition process in step A2702, and the start port 2 switch 37a in the hard random number acquisition process in step A2710. In the hard random number acquisition process of step A2717, the start port 3 switch 42a.

  When there is an input to the target switch (the result of A2802 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 reads the random number latch register status (the state of the random number latch register) and determines whether there is latch data in the target random number latch register. Is determined (A2803, A2804). If there is no latch data in the target random number latch register (the result of A2804 is “N”), the hard random number acquisition process is terminated.

  When there is latch data in the target random number latch register (the result of A2804 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 loads and prepares the jackpot random number extracted in the target hard random number latch register (A2805), and starts winning prize Information indicating that there is a start opening prize indicating that there is a prize for the mouth is set (A2806). The prepared jackpot random number is used in the special figure start port switch common processing.

[Special figure start port switch common processing]
Next, details of the special-purpose start-port switch common processing (A2708, A2715, A2723) in the start-port switch monitoring processing will be described. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure start port switch common process. The special figure start port switch common process is a process that is commonly performed for each input when there is an input from the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, or the start port 3 switch 42a.

  First, the game control device 100 manages information on the number of winnings to the monitored start port switch among the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, and the start port 3 switch 42a. The start port signal output count that is the number of outputs to the device is loaded (A2901), the loaded value is updated by 1 (A2902), and it is determined whether the output count overflows (A2903). If the number of outputs does not overflow (the result of A2903 is “N”), the updated value is saved in the start signal output number area of the RWM (A2904), and the process proceeds to step A2905. On the other hand, if the number of outputs overflows (the result of A2903 is “Y”), the process proceeds to step A2905. In the present embodiment, values from “0” to “255” can be stored in the start port signal output frequency area. When the loaded value is “255”, the updated value becomes “0” by +1 update, and it is determined that the output count overflows.

  Next, the game control device 100 updates the number of reserved special figures (starting memory number) corresponding to the monitored start port switch among the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, and the start port 3 switch 42a. Is less than the upper limit value (A2905). If the number of special figure hold to be updated is not less than the upper limit (the result of A2905 is “N”), the special figure start port switch common process is terminated. If the number of special figure reservations to be updated is less than the upper limit (the result of A2905 is “Y”), the number of special figure reservations to be updated (the number of special figure reservations or the number of special figure 2 reservations) is updated by one. (A2906).

  Then, the game control apparatus 100 prepares a decoration special figure hold number command (decoration special figure 1 hold number command or decoration special figure 1 hold number command) corresponding to the monitoring target start switch and the special figure hold number as an effect command. (A2907) and the effect command setting process is executed (A2908). Subsequently, the target start opening winning flag is saved (A2909).

  Next, the game control device 100 calculates the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the start port switch to be monitored and the number of reserved special figures (A2910), and stores the big hit random number prepared in step A2805 as the big hit random number of the RWM. Save in the area (A2911). Next, the jackpot symbol random number of the starter switch to be monitored is extracted, prepared (A2912), and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (A2913).

  Then, the game control device 100 saves the variation pattern random numbers 1 and 2 in the corresponding variation pattern random number storage area of the RWM (A2914). Next, the address of the change order flag storage area corresponding to the sum of the special figure 1 hold number and the special figure 2 hold number is calculated in the RWM (A2915), and the target change order flag storage area is set with the target change order flag storage area. Save (A2916). Thereby, the address of the storage area corresponding to any one of the holdings (for example, holdings 1 to 8) is calculated, and the change order flag indicating the change (change display game) in FIG. 1 or 2 is saved. Subsequently, the special figure hold information determination process is executed (A2917), and the special figure start port switch common process is terminated.

  Here, the game control device 100 (RAM 111c) extracts a predetermined random number based on the inflow of game balls to the start winning area of the first start winning port 36, the third starting winning port 42, and the normal variable winning device 37. A starting storage means for storing a predetermined number as an upper limit as a starting storage serving as the right to execute the variable display game is provided. In addition, the start storage means (game control device 100) uses, as a first start storage, various random number values extracted based on winning of game balls to the first start winning opening (start winning opening 36) up to a predetermined number. A variety of random numbers extracted based on the winning of game balls to the second start winning opening (ordinary variable winning device 37) or the third starting winning opening 42 are stored as the second start storage up to a predetermined number. .

[Special figure hold information judgment processing]
Next, the details of the special figure hold information determination process (A2917) in the start port common process will be described. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure hold information determination process. The special figure hold information determination process is a pre-reading (preliminary determination) process for determining the result related information corresponding to the start memory before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory.

  First, the game control device 100 prepares a low probability determination flag indicating that the determination is a low probability (A3001), and determines whether or not the big hit random number value matches the big hit determination value (low probability determination value). A pre-fetch jackpot determination process for determining whether or not is true is executed (A3002). Then, it is determined whether or not the determination result of the prefetch jackpot determination process is a jackpot (A3003). When the determination result is a big hit (the result of A3003 is “Y”), a big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target start-up switch is set (A3004), and the stop corresponding to the big hit symbol random number prepared in step A2912 The symbol information is acquired (A3005), and the process proceeds to step A3007. On the other hand, if the determination result is not a big hit (the result of A3003 is “N”), outlier stop symbol information is set (A3006), and the process proceeds to step A3007.

  Next, the game control device 100 saves the stop symbol information in the symbol information area in the RWM (A3007). Subsequently, a look-ahead stop symbol command (low probability) corresponding to the target start opening switch and stop symbol information is prepared as an effect command (A3008), and an effect command setting process is executed (A3009). The prefetch stop symbol command (low probability) indicates stop symbol information determined by the low probability determination value.

  Next, the game control device 100 prepares a high probability determination flag indicating that the determination is a high probability (A3010), and whether or not the big hit random number value matches the big hit determination value (high probability determination value). A pre-read jackpot determination process for determining whether the jackpot is a hit is executed (A3011). Then, it is determined whether or not the determination result of the prefetch jackpot determination process is a jackpot (A3012). When the determination result is a big hit (result of A3012 is “Y”), a big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target starter switch is set (A3013), and the stop corresponding to the big hit symbol random number prepared in step A2912 The symbol information is acquired (A3014), and the process proceeds to step A3016. On the other hand, if the determination result is not a big hit (the result of A3012 is “N”), the stop symbol information of the outage is set (A3015), and the process proceeds to step A3016.

  Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the jackpot occurrence probability is in a high probability state (probability change state, during special figure high probability) (A3016). When it is in a high probability state (the result of A3016 is “Y”), the stopped symbol information is saved in the symbol information area in the RWM (A3017), and the process proceeds to step A3018. When the state is not a high probability state (the result of A3016 is “N”), the process of step A3017 is not performed, and the process directly proceeds to the process of step A3018.

  Thus, in the case of a high probability state, the stop symbol information determined by the high probability determination value is overwritten in the symbol information area and finally saved. On the other hand, when the state is not the high probability state (in the case of the low probability state), the stop symbol information (A3007) determined by the low probability determination value is finally saved in the symbol information area. The stop symbol information finally saved in the symbol information area is used in the prefetching (A3020, A3021) of the variation pattern.

  After that, the game control device 100 prepares a look-ahead stop symbol command (high probability) corresponding to the target start port switch and stop symbol information as a production command (A3018), and executes a production command setting process (A3019). The pre-read stop symbol command (high probability) indicates stop symbol information determined by a high probability determination value. Next, a special figure information setting process for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting a fluctuation pattern is executed (A3020), and a fluctuation pattern setting process for setting a fluctuation mode of the special figure fluctuation display game is executed (A3020). A3021). The special figure information setting process in step A3020 and the fluctuation pattern setting process in step A3021 are the same as the processes executed at the start of the special figure fluctuation display game in the fluctuation start process in the special figure ordinary process described later.

  Next, the game control device 100 prepares a prefetch variation pattern command corresponding to the variation pattern number as an effect command (A3022), executes an effect command setting process (A3023), and ends the special figure hold information determination process. .

  With the above processing, the prefetch stop symbol command including the result of the special figure variation display game based on the start memory to be prefetched and the prefetch variation pattern command including the information of the variation pattern in the special figure variation display game based on the start memory are obtained. It is prepared and transmitted to the production control device 300. As a result, the determination result (prefetch result) of the result related information corresponding to the start memory (whether it is a big hit or the type of the fluctuation pattern) is controlled before the start timing of the special figure change display game based on the corresponding start memory. The device 300 can be notified, and in particular, by changing the decoration special figure start memory display displayed on the display device 41, the result related information is given to the player before the start timing of the special figure variable display game. It is possible to notify.

  That is, the game control device 100 determines a random number stored as start memory in the start memory means (game control device 100) before the execution of the variable display game based on the start memory (for example, whether or not a special result is obtained). Etc.) Pre-determination means. Note that the time when the random number value stored in correspondence with the start memory is determined in advance is not only at the start winning time when the start memory is generated, but any time before the variable display game based on the start memory is performed. Good.

  Furthermore, by the above processing, the prefetch determination result (low probability) and the prefetch stop symbol command both of the look-ahead determination result determined as a big hit with a low probability determination value and the look-ahead determination result determined as a big hit with a high probability determination value, respectively. (High probability) is transmitted to the production control device 300. Thereby, even if the jackpot probability state changes after transmission of the prefetch stop symbol command, the effect control device 300 can execute a prefetch notice (such as a pending change notice) in accordance with the probability state before and after the change.

[Look-ahead jackpot judgment processing]
Next, the details of the prefetch jackpot determination process (A3002, A3011) in the special figure hold information determination process will be described. FIG. 65 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the prefetch jackpot determination process.

  The game control device 100 first sets a lower limit determination value of the big hit determination value (A3101), and determines whether or not the value of the target big hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (A3102). The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The big hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the big hit random number is greater than or equal to the lower limit judgment value that is the lower limit value of the big hit judgment value and less than or equal to the upper limit judgment value that is the upper limit value of the big hit judgment value It is determined that it is a big hit.

  When the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (the result of A3102 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 sets a judgment result other than the jackpot (A3107) and performs the prefetching jackpot determination process. finish.

  In addition, when the value of the big hit random number is not less than the lower limit determination value (the result of A3102 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 determines whether the determination flag is a high probability determination flag (A3103). If the determination flag is a high probability determination flag (the result of A3103 is “Y”), an upper limit determination value with a high probability is set (A3104). On the other hand, when the determination flag is not the high probability determination flag (when it is the low probability determination flag) (the result of A3103 is “N”), the upper limit determination value during the low probability is set (A3105).

  When the upper limit determination value of the jackpot random number value is set, the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the target jackpot random number value is larger than the upper limit determination value (A3106). When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (the result of A3106 is “Y”), the determination result is set to a deviation (other than the big hit) (A3107). On the other hand, when the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the upper limit determination value (the result of A3106 is “N”), the big hit is set as the determination result (A3108). When the determination result is set, the look-ahead jackpot determination process ends.

[Big prize opening switch monitoring process]
Next, details of the special winning opening switch monitoring process (A2602) in the special figure game process will be described. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special winning opening switch monitoring process.

  First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the special figure game process number is “4”, that is, whether or not the special winning opening is being opened (A3201). If the special winning opening is being opened (the result of A3201 is “Y”), the process proceeds to step A3203. If the special winning opening is not being opened (the result of A3201 is “N”), whether the value of the special figure game processing number is “5”, that is, whether or not the special winning opening remaining ball processing is being executed. Determination is made (A3202).

  The game control device 100 proceeds to the processing of step A3203 when the winning ball remaining ball processing is in progress (the result of A3202 is “Y”). Also, when the winning prize remaining ball processing is not being performed (the result of A3202 is “N”), the winning prize switch monitoring process is terminated. Since the special figure game process number does not shift to the next until the special figure game process timer becomes 0, the progress of the game can be checked by the special figure game process number.

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not there is an input to the special prize opening switch 39a (A3203). When there is no input to the big prize opening switch (the result of A3203 is “N”), the big prize opening switch monitoring process is terminated. If there is an input to the big prize opening switch (the result of A3204 is “Y”), the big prize mouth count command is prepared as a production command (A3204), and the production command setting process (A3205) is executed.

  Subsequently, the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the value of the special figure game process number is “4”, that is, whether or not the special winning opening is being opened (A3106). When it is not in the process of opening the big prize opening (the result of A3106 is “N”), the big prize opening switch monitoring process is terminated. Also, when the special winning opening is being opened (the result of A3106 is “Y”), the special winning count is updated by one.

  Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the number of the big winning mouth count is equal to or more than the upper limit (the number of game balls that can be won in one round, for example, “9”) (A3208). When the number of the big winning mouth count is not equal to or greater than the upper limit (the result of A3208 is “N”), the big winning mouth switch monitoring process is terminated. Also, when the number of the big prize mouth count is equal to or more than the upper limit (the result of A3208 is “Y”), the special game process timer area is cleared to 0 (A3209), and the big prize mouth switch monitoring process is terminated. This closes the grand prize opening and ends one round.

[Special figure routine processing]
Next, details of the special figure routine process (A2608) in the special figure game process will be described. FIG. 67 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure normal processing.

  First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the special figure 1 hold number and the special figure 2 hold number are both 0 (A3301). When both the special figure 1 hold number and the special figure 2 hold number are 0 (the result of A3301 is "Y"), the process proceeds to step A3310. When at least one of the special figure 1 hold number and the special figure 2 hold number is not 0 (the result of A3301 is “N”), the change order corresponding to the hold (hold 1) (oldest hold) that is digested first The variable order flag is loaded from the flag storage area (for the total number of holdings 1) (A3302).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the change order flag indicates the change in the special figure 1 (the special figure 1 change display game) (A3303). When the change order flag indicates a change in the special figure 1 (the result of A3303 is “Y”), a special special figure hold number command corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number is prepared as an effect command (A3304). Command setting processing is executed (A3305). This decoration special figure hold number command includes information regarding a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the current special figure 1 hold number (the special figure 1 hold number after execution of the special figure 1 variable display game to be started). Then, the special figure 1 fluctuation start process for starting the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is executed (A3306), and the special figure ordinary process is terminated.

  Further, when the change order flag does not indicate the change in the special figure 1 (the result of A3303 is “N”), that is, indicates the change in the special figure 2, the game control device 100 holds the special figure 2 on hold. The decoration special figure holding number command corresponding to the number is prepared as an effect command (A3307), and an effect command setting process is executed (A3308). This decoration special figure hold number command includes information on a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the current special figure 2 hold number (the special figure 1 hold number after execution of the special figure 2 variable display game to be started). Then, a special figure 2 fluctuation start process for starting the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is executed (A3309), and the special figure ordinary process is terminated.

  The game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the customer waiting demonstration has started when both the special figure 1 hold number and the special figure 2 hold number are 0 (the result of A3301 is “Y”) (A3310). . If the customer waiting demo has already started (the result of A3310 is “Y”), the process proceeds to step A3314. If the customer waiting demo has not been started (the result of A3310 is “N”), a customer waiting demo flag is set in the customer waiting demo flag area (A3311), and the customer waiting demo command is prepared as a production command (A3312). Command setting processing is executed (A3213). Receiving the customer waiting demo command, the effect control device 300 executes the customer waiting demo on the display device 41 or the like.

  Subsequently, the game control apparatus 100 sets “0” related to the special figure normal process as the process number (A3314), and saves the process number in the special figure game process number area (A3315). Then, the variation symbol discrimination flag area is cleared (A3316), the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the special prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area in the RWM (A3317), and the special figure routine processing is terminated.

  In this way, the change order flag is loaded from the change order flag storage area (for the hold number total 1) corresponding to the hold (hold 1) that is consumed first, and the type of change display game indicated by the change order flag is displayed. (Special Figure 1 Fluctuation Display Game or Special Figure 2 Fluctuation Display Game) is started. That is, the variable display game is executed in the order in which the winnings (start-up memory) are generated, and the suspension is digested from the oldest in the winning order.

[Special Figure 1 Change Start Processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (A3306) in the special figure ordinary process will be described. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 fluctuation start process. The special figure 1 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game.

  The game control device 100 saves a special figure 1 variation flag indicating the type of special figure variation display game to be executed (here, special figure 1) in the variation symbol discrimination flag area (A3401). Subsequently, a big hit flag 1 setting process for setting shift information and big hit information to the big hit flag 1 for determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit is executed (A3402). Details of the big hit flag 1 setting process will be described later.

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 executes a special figure 1 stop symbol setting process related to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information) (A3403). Details of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process will be described later. Further, the game control device 100 executes special figure information setting processing for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting a variation pattern (A3404). Details of the special figure information setting process will be described later.

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 prepares a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting information table which is a table in which information for referring to various information related to the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is set (A3405). ). After that, the game control device 100 executes a variation pattern setting process for setting a variation pattern which is a variation mode in the special figure 1 variation display game (A3406). Details of the variation pattern setting process will be described later.

  Next, the game control device 100 executes a change start information setting process for setting change start information of the special figure 1 change display game (A3407), and ends the special figure 1 change start process. Details of the change start information setting process will be described later.

  Then, the game control device 100 sets “1” related to the special figure changing process as the process number (A3408), and saves the process number in the special figure game process number area (A3409).

  Then, the game control device 100 clears the customer waiting demo flag area (A3410), and saves a signal related to the start of fluctuation in FIG. 1 in the test signal output data area (A3411). Thereafter, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (A3412), and the initial value (for example, the blinking cycle timer of the special figure 1 display 51) is saved in the special figure 1 blink control timer area. 100 ms) is set (A3413). Subsequently, an initial value (for example, 0) is saved in the special figure 1 variation symbol number area (A3414), and the special figure 1 variation start process is terminated.

[Special Figure 2 Variation Start Processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (A3309) in the special figure ordinary process will be described. FIG. 69 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 fluctuation start process. The special figure 2 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, and the same process as the special figure 1 fluctuation start process shown in FIG. Is what you do.

  The game control apparatus 100 first saves a special figure 2 fluctuation flag indicating the type of special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 2) in the fluctuation symbol discrimination flag area (A3501). Subsequently, a big hit flag 2 setting process for setting deviation information and big hit information to the big hit flag 2 for determining whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is a big hit is executed (A3502).

  Next, the game control device 100 executes a special figure 2 stop symbol setting process related to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (symbol information) (A3503). Further, special figure information setting processing for setting special figure information, which is a parameter for setting a variation pattern, is executed (A3504). Subsequently, a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information related to the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, is prepared (A3505).

  After that, the game control device 100 executes a variation pattern setting process for setting a variation pattern of the special figure 2 variation display game (A3506). Then, the fluctuation start information setting process for setting the fluctuation start information of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is executed (A3507).

  Next, the game control device 100 first sets “1” related to the special figure changing process as the process number (A3508), and saves the process number in the special figure game process number area (A3509).

  Then, the game control device 100 clears the customer waiting demo flag area (A3510), and saves a signal related to the fluctuation start in FIG. 2 in the test signal output data area (A3511). After that, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (A3512), and the initial value (for example, the blinking cycle timer of the special figure 2 display 52) is saved in the special figure 2 blink control timer area. 100 ms) is set (A3513). Subsequently, an initial value (for example, 0) is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation symbol number area (A3414), and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process is terminated.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
Next, details of the big hit flag 1 setting process (A3402) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 70 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big hit flag 1 setting process.

  First, the game control device 100 saves deviation information in the big hit flag 1 area (A3601). Next, a big hit random number is loaded from the RWM special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1), prepared (A3602), and the special figure one big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to zero. (A3603). Note that for the number of holdings 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers or the like) about the special figure starting storage whose digestion order is the earliest (here, the earliest in the special figure 1). Thereafter, a jackpot determination process for determining whether the prepared jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value or not is executed (A3604).

  When the determination result of the big hit determination process (A3604) is a big hit (the result of A3605 is “Y”), the game control device 100 overwrites the big hit information in the area of the big hit flag 1 in which the loss information is saved in step A3601. Save (A3606) and end the big hit flag 1 setting process. On the other hand, if the determination result of the big hit determination process (A3604) is not a big hit (the result of A3605 is “N”), the big hit flag 1 setting process is terminated while the shift information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area. Thus, in the present embodiment, the result of the special figure 1 variable display game is either “big hit” or “out of game”.

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
Next, the details of the big hit flag 2 setting process (A3502) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big hit flag 2 setting process. In this process, the same process as that in the big hit flag 1 setting process shown in FIG. 70 is performed on the second start-up memory.

  The game control device 100 first saves the shift information in the big hit flag 2 area (A3701). Next, a big hit random number is loaded from the RWM special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1), prepared (A3702), and the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to zero. (A3703). Note that for the number of reservations 1 is an area for storing information (random number or the like) about the special figure starting storage whose digestion order is the earliest (here, the earliest in the special figure 2). Thereafter, a jackpot determination process for determining whether the prepared jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value or not is executed (A3704).

  When the determination result of the big hit determination process (A3704) is a big hit (the result of A3705 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 overwrites the big hit information in the area of the big hit flag 2 in which the loss information is saved in step A3701. Save (A3706) and end the big hit flag 2 setting process. On the other hand, if the determination result of the big hit determination process (A3704) is not a big hit (the result of A3705 is “N”), the big hit flag 2 setting process is terminated while the deviation information is saved in the big hit flag 2. As described above, in the present embodiment, the result of the special figure 2 variable display game is either “big hit” or “out of game”.

[Big hit judgment processing]
Next, the details of the big hit determination process (A3604, A3704) in the big hit flag 1 setting process and the big hit flag 2 setting process will be described. FIG. 72 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big hit determination process. The jackpot determination process is a process common to the jackpot determination process in other processes executed during the timer interrupt process.

  The game control device 100 first sets a lower limit determination value of the big hit determination value (A3801), and determines whether or not the target big hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (A3802). The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The big hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the big hit random number is greater than or equal to the lower limit judgment value that is the lower limit value of the big hit judgment value and less than or equal to the upper limit judgment value that is the upper limit value of the big hit judgment value It is determined that it is a big hit.

  When the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (the result of A3802 is “Y”), the game control device 100 sets a judgment result other than a jackpot (A3807) and ends the jackpot determination process. To do.

  In addition, when the value of the big hit random number is not less than the lower limit determination value (the result of A3802 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the big hit occurrence probability is in a high probability state (probability change state). (A3803). If the state is a high probability state (the result of A3803 is “Y”), an upper limit determination value with a high probability is set (A3804). On the other hand, when the state is not a high probability state (the result of A3803 is “N”), an upper limit determination value with a low probability is set (A3805).

  When the upper limit determination value of the jackpot random number value is set, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the target jackpot random number value is larger than the upper limit determination value (A3806). When the value of the big hit random number is larger than the upper limit judgment value (the result of A3806 is “Y”), the judgment result is set to a deviation (other than the big hit) (A3807). On the other hand, if the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the upper limit determination value (the result of A3806 is “N”), the big hit is set as the determination result (A3808). When the determination result is set, the big hit determination process is terminated.

[Special figure 1 stop symbol setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (A3403) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process.

  The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (A4001). If the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (the result of A4001 is “Y”), the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) ) Is loaded with the jackpot symbol random number (A4002). Next, a special figure 1 big hit symbol table is set (A4003). Subsequently, a stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded jackpot symbol random number is acquired and saved in the special symbol 1 stop symbol number area (A4004). By this processing, the type of special result (type of jackpot) is selected.

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 sets a special figure 1 big hit stop symbol information table (A4005), acquires a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number, and saves it in the stop symbol pattern area (A4006). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special symbol display (here, the special symbol 1 indicator 51) and a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit information area (A4007). In the present embodiment, the round number upper limit value is 16R or 6R.

Next, the game control device 100 acquires probability variation determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number,
Save in the probability variation determination data area (A4008). The probability variation determination data may include information on a probability state after the jackpot state ends (high probability / low probability) and a general power support state (short time state) after the jackpot state ends. In the present embodiment, the probability variation determination data includes low probability data (usually, no electric support), high probability data 1 (probability change, with electric support), and high probability data 2 (latency probability change, no electric support). Thereafter, a special decoration command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (A4011).

  On the other hand, when the big hit flag 1 is not big hit (the result of A4001 is “N”), the game control device 100 saves the stop symbol number at the time of loss in the special symbol 1 stop symbol number area (A4009), and the loss stop symbol pattern. Is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (A4010), and a decoration special symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (A4011). Through the above processing, a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

  Thereafter, the decoration special figure command is saved in the decoration special figure command area (A4012), and the effect command setting process is executed (A4013). This decoration special drawing command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (A4014), the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 (A4015), and the special figure 1 stop symbol is saved. The setting process ends.

[Special figure 2 stop symbol setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (A3503) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process.

  The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (A4101), and if it is a big hit (the result of A4101 is “Y”), the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) ) Is loaded with the jackpot symbol random number (A4102). Next, a special figure 2 big hit symbol table is set (A4103). Subsequently, a stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded jackpot symbol random number is acquired and saved in the special symbol 2 stop symbol number area (A4104). By this processing, the type of special result (type of jackpot) is selected.

  After that, the game control device 100 sets the special figure 2 big hit stop symbol information table (A4105), acquires the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number, and saves it in the stop symbol pattern area (A4106). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on a special symbol display (here, special symbol 2 indicator 52) or a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit information area (A4107). In the present embodiment, the round number upper limit value is 16R or 6R.

Next, the game control device 100 acquires probability variation determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number,
Save in the probability variation determination data area (A4108). The probability variation determination data may include information on a probability state after the jackpot state ends (high probability / low probability) and a general power support state (short time state) after the jackpot state ends. For example, the probability variation determination data includes low probability data (usually, without electric support), high probability data 1 (with probability change, with electric support), high probability data 2 (latency probability change, without electric support), and the like. Thereafter, a special decoration command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (A4111).

  On the other hand, when the big hit flag 2 is not big hit (the result of A4101 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 saves the stop symbol number at the time of loss in the special symbol 2 stop symbol number area (A4109), and the loss stop symbol pattern. Is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (A4110), and a special decoration command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (A4111). Through the above processing, a stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

  Thereafter, the decoration special figure command is saved in the decoration special figure command area (A4112), and the effect command setting process is executed (A4113). This decoration special drawing command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (A4114), the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 (A4115), and the special figure 2 stop symbol is saved. The setting process ends.

[Special figure information setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure information setting process (A3404, A3504) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing the procedure of special figure information setting processing.

  First, the game control device 100 sets a variation group selection pointer table (A4201), and acquires a variation group selection pointer corresponding to the probability state and the stop symbol pattern number (a number indicating the stop symbol pattern) (A4202). For example, the probability state includes a probability state 1 (normally, no electric support), a probability state 2 (probability change, with electric support), and a probability state 3 (latent probability change, no electric support). The probability state here includes not only probability variation / normal (high probability state / low probability state) but also presence / absence of electric support (general power support state / non-general power support state). Further, in the present embodiment, the stop symbol pattern numbers include: No. 0 (missing symbol), No. 1 (16R probability variation big hit symbol), No. 2 (6R probability variation big hit symbol A), No. 3 (6R probability variation big hit symbol B), There are number 4 (6R probability variation big hit symbol C) and number 5 (6R normal big hit symbol C).

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the stop symbol pattern is an off symbol (A4203). If the stop symbol pattern is an outlier symbol (the result of A4203 is “Y”), the variable group selection pointer is updated to a value corresponding to the total value of the special figure 1 holding number and the special figure 2 holding number (A4204), step The processing shifts to A4205. Here, when the power transmission support state is not set, the variation group selection pointer is set for each of the pending totals 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 and 6 to 8 to change the distribution of the variation pattern. Further, in the case of the normal power support state, the change group selection pointer is set to change the distribution of the change pattern every 1, 2, 3, 4 to 8 for the total number of holds.

  On the other hand, if the stop symbol pattern is not a missing symbol (the result of A4203 is “N”), that is, if it is a big hit symbol, the game control apparatus 100 does not perform the process of step A4204 and proceeds to the process of step A4205. That is, in the case of a big hit symbol, the variable group selection pointer is set in step A4202 without being affected by the special figure 1 hold number or the special figure 2 hold number.

  Next, the game control device 100 saves the variable group selection pointer in the variable group selection pointer area (A4205), and ends the special figure information setting process.

[Variation pattern setting process]
Next, details of the variation pattern setting process (A3406, A3506) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 76 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the variation pattern setting process.

  First, the game control apparatus 100 sets a variation group selection address table (A4301), acquires the address of the variation group table corresponding to the variation group selection pointer, and prepares it (A4302). Furthermore, the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is loaded from the fluctuation pattern random number 1 storage area (for holding number 1) of the target (Special Figure 1 or Special Figure 2) and prepared (A4303). Then, the 2-byte sorting process is executed (A4304), and the address of the variation pattern selection table obtained as a result of the sorting is acquired and prepared (A4305).

  Next, the game control device 100 loads and prepares random numbers from the fluctuation pattern random number 2 storage area (for holding number 1) of the target (special figure 1 or special figure 2) (A4306). Then, a sorting process is executed (A4307), and the fluctuation pattern number obtained as a result of the sorting is acquired and saved in the fluctuation pattern number area (A4308). In this way, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern setting means for setting a variation pattern, which is a game execution mode, from among a plurality of variations.

[2-byte sort processing]
Next, details of the 2-byte sorting process (A4304) in the variation pattern setting process will be described. FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing a procedure of 2-byte sorting processing. The 2-byte sorting process is a process for selecting a variation pattern selection table of the special figure variation display game from the variation group table based on the variation pattern random number 1.

  First, the game control device 100 checks whether the top data of the selection table (the variation group table prepared in A4302) is a code with no distribution (ie, “0”) (A4401). Here, the variation group table stores a predetermined distribution value in association with at least one variation pattern selection table, but the variation group table defines only the variation pattern selection table in which the variation pattern is “no reach”. In the case of (for example, a part of the variation group table in the case where the result is out of order), since there is no need for distribution, a distribution value “0”, that is, a code without distribution is defined at the top.

  When the first data of the selection table (variation group table) is a code without distribution (the result of A4402 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 updates the address of the data corresponding to the distribution result. (A4407), the 2-byte sorting process is terminated. On the other hand, if the top data of the selection table (variation group table) is not a code without distribution (the result of A4402 is “N”), the first distribution value specified in the selection table (variation group table) is the first distribution value. Obtain (A4403).

  Subsequently, a new random value is calculated by subtracting the distribution value acquired in step A4403 from the random value prepared in step A4303 (the value of fluctuation pattern random number 1) (A4404), and the calculated new random value Is smaller than “0” (A4405). If the new random value is not smaller than “0” (the result of A4405 is “N”), after updating to the address of the next distribution value (A4406), the process proceeds to step A4403. Perform the following processing. That is, the distribution value specified next in the selection table (variation group table) is acquired (A4403), and then the new random value is obtained by subtracting the distribution value from the random value determined in the previous step A4405. Is calculated (A4404), and it is determined whether or not the calculated new random value is smaller than “0” (A4405).

  The above processing is executed until it is determined in step A4405 that the new random value is smaller than “0” (the result of A4405 is “Y”). As a result, any one variation selection table is selected from at least one variation selection table defined in the selection table (variation group table). If it is determined in step A4405 that the new random value is smaller than “0” (result of A4405 is “Y”), it is updated to the address of the data corresponding to the distributed result (A4407), 2 bytes. The distribution process ends.

[Distribution processing]
Next, details of the distribution process (A4307) in the variation pattern setting process will be described. FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the distribution process. The distribution process is a process for selecting the variation pattern of the special figure variation display game from the variation pattern selection table based on the variation pattern random number 2.

  First, the game control device 100 checks whether or not the top data of the target selection table (the variation pattern selection table prepared in step A4305) is an unallocated code (ie, “0”) (A4501). Here, the variation pattern selection table stores a predetermined distribution value in association with at least one variation pattern (variation pattern number), but in the case of a selection table that does not require distribution, a distribution value “0”, That is, a code without distribution is defined at the top.

  When the first data of the target selection table (variation pattern selection table) is a code without distribution (the result of A4502 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 sets the address of the data corresponding to the distribution result. Update (A4507), and the distribution process ends. On the other hand, when the first data of the target selection table (variation pattern selection table) is not a code without sorting (result of A4502 is “N”), it is first defined in the target selection table (variation pattern selection table). One sort value is acquired (A4503).

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 calculates a new random value by subtracting the distribution value acquired in Step A4503 from the random value prepared in Step A4306 (the value of the variation pattern random number 2) (A4504). It is determined whether the calculated new random number value is smaller than “0” (A4505). If the new random value is not smaller than “0” (the result of A4505 is “N”), the address is updated to the address of the next distribution value (A4506), and the process proceeds to step A4503. Perform the following processing.

  That is, the distribution value specified next in the target selection table (variation pattern selection table) is acquired (A4503), and then the distribution value is subtracted from the random value determined in the previous step A4505. A random number value is calculated (A4504), and it is determined whether or not the calculated new random value is smaller than “0” (A4505). The above processing is executed until it is determined in step A4505 that the new random number value is smaller than “0” (the result of A4505 is “Y”). As a result, at least one variation pattern (variation pattern number) defined in the target selection table (variation pattern selection table) is selected.

  If the game control apparatus 100 determines in step A4505 that the new random value is smaller than “0” (the result of A4505 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 updates the address of the data corresponding to the distribution result. (A4507), the distribution process is terminated.

[Variation start information setting process]
Next, details of the change start information setting process (A3407, A3507) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 79 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the change start information setting process.

  The game control device 100 first clears the random number storage area of the target variation pattern random numbers 1 and 2 (A4601). Next, a variation time value table is set (A4602), a variation time value corresponding to the variation pattern number is acquired (A4603), and saved in the special figure game processing timer area. Thereafter, a change command (MODE, ACTION) corresponding to the change pattern number is prepared as an effect command (A4604), and an effect command setting process is performed (A4605).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 updates the special figure holding number corresponding to the variation symbol determination flag by -1 (A4606), and sets the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the variation symbol determination flag (A4607). Next, the random number storage area is shifted (A4608), and the free area after the shift is cleared (A4609).

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 shifts the change order flag storage area (A4610), clears the empty area after the shift (A4611), and ends the change start information setting process.

  Through the above processing, information related to the start of the special figure variation display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a determination unit that determines various random values stored in the start storage unit (game control device 100). Further, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern determining means capable of determining a variation pattern of identification information executed in the variation display game based on the determination information of the start memory.

  Information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later, and the effect control device 300 responds to the determined variation pattern based on the reception of the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game. To set the detailed contents of the decoration special map change display game. The information related to the start of the special figure variation display game includes a decoration special figure hold number command including information related to the start memory number (holding number), a decoration special figure command including information related to the stop symbol, and a fluctuation of the special figure variation display game. A variation command including information related to the pattern is cited, and the command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 in this order. In particular, by transmitting the decoration special figure command before the variation command, the processing in the effect control device 300 can be efficiently advanced.

[Special figure changing process]
Next, the details of the special figure changing process (A2609) in the special figure game process will be described. FIG. 80 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure changing process.

  First, the game control apparatus 100 uses a symbol stop command (a special symbol 1 symbol stop command or a special symbol 2 symbol stop command) corresponding to a variable symbol discrimination flag (a special symbol 1 variation flag or a special symbol 2 variation flag) as an effect command. Preparation (A4701) and execution command setting processing are executed (A4702). Upon receiving the symbol stop command, the effect control device 300 stops the corresponding decoration special figure fluctuation display game (decoration special figure 1 fluctuation display game or decoration special figure 2 fluctuation display game).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 sets a display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern number indicating the stop symbol pattern (A4703), and saves the set display time in the special-figure game processing timer area (A4704). In the case of the present embodiment, when the stop symbol pattern is an outlier symbol pattern, 800 msec is set as the display time, and when the stop symbol pattern is a big hit symbol pattern, the display time is set at 2000 msec.

  Next, the game control device 100 sets a process number “2” related to the special figure display process (A4705), and saves the process number in the special figure game process number area (A4706).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 saves the signal related to the end of fluctuation in FIG. 1 in the test signal output data area (A4707), and further saves the signal related to the end of fluctuation in FIG. 2 in the test signal output data area (A4707). A4708).

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 sets a control timer initial value (for example, 256 msec) in a symbol determination frequency signal control timer area used when outputting a symbol determination frequency signal related to the number of executions of the special symbol variable display game to the external information terminal. Is saved (A4709).

  After that, the game control device 100 sets a stop flag related to the variable stop on the special figure 1 display 51 as the special figure 1 variable display game control information on the special figure 1 display 51. (A4710). Further, as information for controlling the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in the special figure 2 display 52, a stop flag related to the fluctuation stop in the special figure 2 display 52 is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (A4711). Then, the special figure changing process transition setting process is terminated.

[Special figure display processing]
Next, the details of the special figure display process (A2610) in the special figure game process will be described. FIG. 81 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special figure displaying process.

  The game control device 100 first has a jackpot flag 1 set in the jackpot flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process, and a jackpot flag 2 set in the jackpot flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process. Are loaded (A4801), and the RWM jackpot flag 1 area and jackpot flag 2 area are cleared (A4802).

  Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the loaded big hit flag 2 is a big hit (A4803), and if it is a big hit (the result of A4803 is “Y”), the big hit of the second special figure variable display game Test signal related to the start of (Special figure 2 big hit) (for example, the condition device operating signal is on, the accessory continuous actuator operating signal is on, the special symbol 2 signal is on) in the test signal output data area of the RWM Save (A4810) and set the round number upper limit value table (A4811).

  On the other hand, if the result of checking the big hit flag 2 is not a big hit (the result of A4803 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the loaded big hit flag 1 is a big hit (A4804). In some cases (the result of A4804 is “Y”), a test signal related to the start of a big hit (special figure 1 big hit) of the first special figure variation display game (for example, the condition device operating signal is on, the accessory continuous operating device is operating) The signal is turned on and the signal per special symbol is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area of the RWM (A4805), and processing for setting the round number upper limit value table is executed (A4811).

  When the big hit flag 1 is not big hit (the result of A4804 is “N”), the game control device 100 sets “0” related to the special figure routine process as the process number (A4806), and processes the special figure game process number area. The number is saved (A4807), and the variable symbol discrimination flag area is cleared (A4808). Then, a fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the special prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area (A4809), and the special figure display in-process is terminated.

  After that, the game control device 100 acquires the round number upper limit value (16 or 6 in the case of the present embodiment) corresponding to the round number upper limit information, and saves it in the round number upper limit area of the RWM (A4812). Subsequently, a round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area of the RWM (A4813).

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 loads a decoration special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern from the decoration special figure command area of the RWM, prepares it as an effect command (A4814), and executes an effect command setting process (A4815). ). After that, a probability information command related to information in which the probability that the winning result is the normal probability state (low probability state) in the normal map variation display game and the special map variation display game is prepared as an effect command (A4816). Setting processing is executed (A4817). Subsequently, a fanfare command corresponding to the round number upper limit value is prepared as an effect command (A4818), and an effect command setting process is executed (A4819).

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 saves the jackpot fanfare time (for example, 10000 msec) in the special game processing timer area (A4820). Then, the winning prize mouth illegal winning number area is cleared (A4821), and an illegal monitoring period non-monitoring period flag is saved in the big winning opening illegal monitoring period flag area (A4822). Thereafter, the fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1 is executed (A4823), and the special figure display process is terminated. In other words, the special game in which the game control device 100 converts the special variable winning device 39 to the open state based on the result being a special result in either the first special figure fluctuation display game or the second special figure fluctuation display game. Special gaming state generating means for generating a state is provided.

[Fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1]
Next, the details of the fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1 (A4823) in the special figure display process will be described. FIG. 82 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the fanfare / inter-interval process transition setting process 1.

  First, the game control device 100 sets “3”, which is a process number related to the fanfare / interval process (A5501), and saves the process number in the special game process number area (A5502).

  Next, the game control device 100 outputs external information related to the start of the big hit (special gaming state) (for example, the big hit 1 signal is on, the big hit 2 signal is on, the big hit 3 signal is on, and the big hit 4 signal is on). Save to the data area (A5503), signals related to the end of the high probability state and the short time state (for example, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is turned off, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal is turned off, the special symbol 1 variation time shortened state signal Is turned off, the special symbol 2 variation time shortening state signal is turned off, and the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (A5504). Note that the normal symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal and the normal electric accessory 1 opening extension state signal are always off. After that, the number of rounds area for managing the number of rounds executed in the special gaming state is cleared (A5505), and the game status display number is turned off to turn off the display LED (for example, the second gaming state display unit 58). The number without time saving is saved in the area (A5506), and the usual low probability flag is saved in the ordinary game mode flag area in the RWM (A5507).

  Then, the game control device 100 clears the variation symbol discrimination flag area (A5508), and turns off the game state display LED (third game state display unit) 59 provided on the game board 30 related to the display of the high probability state. The high probability notification flag area is cleared (A5509), and the special figure low probability & no time reduction flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area in the RWM (A5510). Next, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery in the RWM that saves the command output to the effect control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery (A5511). As a result, the high-probability state and the short-time state (the ordinary power support state) are terminated.

  Thereafter, a signal related to the right-handed instruction (for example, the firing position designation signal 1 is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (A5512), and the right-handed display LED (for example, the first gaming state display unit 57) is turned on. Therefore, the right-handed state number is saved in the game state display number 2 area (A5513), and the fanfare / interval process transition setting process 1 is terminated.

[Fanfare / In-interval processing]
Next, the details of the fanfare / interval processing (A2611) in the special figure game processing will be described. FIG. 83 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the fanfare / interval processing.

  First, the game control device 100 updates the number of rounds in the special gaming state by +1 (A5701), prepares a round command corresponding to the number of rounds in the special gaming state (big hit state) as an effect command (A5702), A setting process (A5703) is performed.

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 saves the special prize opening time (for example, 29 seconds) in the special game process timer area (A5704), and sets the process number to “4” related to the special prize opening process ( A5705), the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (A5706). Thereafter, a signal related to the opening of the special winning opening (for example, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area (A5707), and the number of winning prizes for the special winning opening is stored. The information of the mouth count number area is cleared (A5708). Then, the ON data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (A5709), and the processing during the fanfare / interval is ended.

[Processing during the grand prize opening]
Next, the details of the special prize opening process (A2612) in the special game process will be described. FIG. 84 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special winning opening opening process of the present embodiment.

  The game control apparatus 100 first determines whether the current round is the final round by comparing the current round number in the special game state being executed with the round number upper limit value in the round number upper limit area of the RWM ( A5901). If it is not the final round (result of A5901 is “N”), an interval command related to the interval between rounds is prepared as an effect command (A5902), and an effect command setting process is executed (A5904).

  In the case of the final round (result of A5901 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 prepares an ending command related to display control of the ending display screen at the end of the special gaming state as an effect command (A5903). Then, the effect command setting process is executed (A5904).

  Thereafter, the processing number is set to “5” related to the winning ball remaining ball processing (A5905), and the processing number is saved in the special game processing number area (A5906). The remaining ball processing time (for example, 1.9 seconds) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (A5907), and then off data for turning off the big prize opening solenoid 39b is saved in the big prize opening solenoid output data area ( A5908), the process for opening the special winning opening is completed.

[Large winning ball remaining ball processing]
Next, the details of the big winning opening remaining ball process (A2613) in the special figure game process will be described. FIG. 85 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special winning opening remaining ball process.

  The game control apparatus 100 first determines whether the current round is the final round by comparing the current round number in the special game state being executed with the round number upper limit value in the round number upper limit area of the RWM ( A6101).

  Then, when the current round in the special gaming state is not the final round (result of A6101 is “N”), the game control device 100 sets “3” that is the processing number related to the fanfare / interval processing (A6102). Then, the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (A6103). Then, the interval time (for example, 0.1 second) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (A6104).

  Next, the game control device 100 saves a signal related to the end of opening of the special winning award (special variable winning device 39) (for example, the special electric accessory 1 operation signal is off) in the test signal output data area (A6105). Then, the winning prize remaining ball processing is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the current round in the special game state is the final round (result of A6101 is “Y”), “6” is set as the processing number related to the big hit end processing (A6106), and the processing number is set as the special game processing. Save in the number area (A6107). Then, the ending time (for example, 5.1 seconds) is saved in the special game process timer area (A6108).

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 saves a signal related to the end of opening of the special winning award (special variable winning device 39) (for example, the special electric accessory 1 operating signal is off) in the test signal output data area (A6109). Next, the information on the number-of-winner count area for storing the number of winning prizes is cleared (A6110), and the information on the number-of-rounds area for storing the number of rounds in the special gaming state is cleared (A6111). The information on the round number upper limit area for storing the upper limit value of the number of rounds in the special game state is cleared (A6112), and the winning prize remaining ball processing is ended.

[Big hits end processing]
Next, the details of the big hit end process (A2614) in the special figure game process will be described. FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big hit end process.

  First, the game control device 100 executes a subroutine call based on the probability variation determination data saved in the probability variation determination data area in step A4008 (A6401). When the probability variation determination data is low probability data (usually without power support), jackpot end setting processing 1 is executed (A6402). If the probability variation determination data is high probability data 1 (probability change, with electric support), jackpot end setting processing 2 is executed (A6403). When the probability variation determination data is high probability data 2 (latency probability change, no electric support), jackpot end setting processing 3 is executed (A6404).

  Next, the game control device 100 loads a probability information command from the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery, prepares it as an effect command (A6405), and executes an effect command setting process (A6406).

  Thereafter, the game control apparatus 100 sets “0” as the process number related to the special figure normal process (A6407), and saves the process number in the special figure game process number area (A6408). Then, a signal relating to the end of the big hit (for example, 1 signal for the big hit is turned off, 3 signals for the big hit are turned off, and 4 signals for the big hit are turned off) is saved in the external information output data area (A6409). The condition device in-operation signal is turned off, the accessory continuous operation device in-operation signal is turned off, the special symbol 1 signal is turned off, and the special symbol 2 signal is turned off) in the test signal output data area (A6410). Then, the probability variation determination flag area is cleared (A6411).

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 clears the information in the pointer area of the round LED indicating the number of rounds of the big hit (A6412), and saves the flag during the fraud monitoring period in the big prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area (A6413). ), The jackpot ending process is terminated.

[Big jackpot end setting 1]
Next, details of the jackpot end setting process 1 (A6402) in the jackpot end process will be described. FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big hit end setting process 1.

  First, the game control device 100 saves a signal related to the absence of time reduction (2 signals for big hits are turned off) in the external information output data area (A6501), and a signal related to the start of low probability & no time reduction (a special symbol 1 high probability state signal). Off, special symbol 2 high probability state signal off, special symbol 1 variation time shortened state signal off, special symbol 2 variation time shortened state signal off, normal symbol 1 high probability state signal off) test signal output data area (A6502).

  Next, the game control device 100 saves the number without time in the game state display number area (A6503) in order to turn off the display LED (for example, the second game state display unit 58) during time reduction (A6503). Save the special low probability flag in the special game mode flag area (A6504), and save the special low probability & short time flag in the special game mode flag area in the RWM (A6505). Then, a signal related to the left-handed instruction (for example, the firing position designation signal 1 is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (A6506), and the right-handed display LED (for example, the first game state display unit 57) is turned off. Therefore, the left-handed state number is saved in the game state display number 2 area (A6507), and the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery in the RWM (A6508).

[Big hit end setting process 2]
Next, details of the jackpot end setting process 2 (A6403) in the jackpot end process will be described. FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big hit end setting process 2.

  First, the game control device 100 saves a signal related to the start of time reduction (turns on two jackpot signals) in the external information output data area (A6601), and a signal related to the start with high probability & time reduction (special symbol 1 high probability state signal) ON, special symbol 2 high probability state signal on, special symbol 1 variation time shortened state signal on, special symbol 2 variation time shortened state signal on, normal symbol 1 high probability state signal on) test signal output data Save in the area (A6602).

  Next, the game control device 100 saves the number with the time shortage in the game state display number area (A6603) in order to turn on the time-shortening display LED (for example, the second game state display unit 58). Save the special high probability flag in the special game mode flag area (A6604) and save the special figure high probability & short time flag in the special game mode flag area in the RWM (A6605). Then, the probability information command (high probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery in the RWM that saves the command output to the effect control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery (A6606). In addition, although right-handed during the time, the right-handed setting is not performed because the right-handed from the big hit.

[Big jackpot end setting 3]
Next, details of the jackpot end setting process 3 (A6404) in the jackpot end process will be described. FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big hit end setting process 3.

  First, the game control device 100 saves a signal related to the absence of time reduction (2 signals for big hits are turned off) in the external information output data area (A6701), and a signal related to the start of high probability & no time reduction (special symbol 1 high probability state signal). On, special symbol 2 high probability state signal on, special symbol 1 variation time shortened state signal off, special symbol 2 variation time shortened state signal off, normal symbol 1 high probability state signal off) test signal output data area (A6702).

  The game control device 100 saves the number without time in the game state display number area (A6703) in order to turn off the display LED (for example, the second game state display unit 58) during the time reduction (A6703), and the normal game mode flag area The special figure low probability flag is saved (A6704), and the special figure high probability & no short time flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (A6705). Then, a signal related to the left-handed instruction (for example, the firing position designation signal 1 is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (A6706), and the right-handed display LED (for example, the first game state display unit 57) is turned off. Therefore, the left-handed number is saved in the game state display number 2 area (A6707), and the probability information command (latency) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (A6708).

[Direction command setting processing]
FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the effect command setting process for setting the effect command to be transmitted to the effect control device 300. This effect command setting process is a process common to the effect command setting process (A2417, A2706, A2721, A2908, etc.) executed during the timer interrupt process.

  The game control device 100 first reads the status of the effect serial transmission buffer (A7001). Further, it is determined whether or not the transmission buffer is full (A7002).

  If the transmission buffer is not full (the result of A7002 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 writes the command data (MODE (upper byte)) to the serial transmission buffer (A7003).

  When the transmission buffer is full (the result of A7002 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 returns to the process of step A7001.

  Further, the game control device 100 reads the status of the effect serial transmission buffer (A7004), and determines whether or not the transmission buffer is full (A7005). If the transmission buffer is full (the result of A7005 is “Y”), the process returns to step A7004.

  In addition, when the transmission buffer is not full (the result of A7005 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 writes command data (ACTION (lower byte)) to the serial transmission buffer (A7006), and then sets an effect command. The process ends.

  As described above, the effect command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 by serial communication, so that the burden on the game control device 100 can be reduced and the analysis of the effect command can be made difficult. Further, the command transmission timing is advanced and the number of data lines can be reduced. Furthermore, in the production control device 300, it is not necessary to take in a command in the strobe, and the burden can be reduced.

[Design variation control processing]
FIG. 91 shows a symbol variation control process (A2616, A2618) in the above-described special symbol game process, and a symbol variation control process in a later-described general game process. The symbol variation control process is a process for controlling the variation of a special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol, etc.) or a normal symbol (ordinary symbol) and setting display data for the special symbol or the normal symbol.

  The game control device 100 first checks whether the variation control flag relating to the control target symbol (for example, any of the first special diagram, the second special diagram, and the normal diagram) is changing (A7501). In the case of this embodiment, on the fluctuation control table prepared in step A2615, step A2617, and step A7614, the lower address of the fluctuation control flag area, the initial value of the blinking control timer, the fluctuation symbol number upper limit determination value, the display table 2 ( A stop address and a display table 1 (variation) address are defined.

  The game control device 100 acquires a symbol display table (for variation) corresponding to the symbol to be controlled (A7503) when the changing flag relating to the symbol to be controlled is changing (the result of A7502 is “Y”). ). In the case of the present embodiment, the address of the symbol display table (for variation) is defined on the variation control table prepared in step A2615, step A2617, and step A7614.

  Next, the game control device 100 updates the blinking control timer to be controlled by −1 (A7504), determines whether the updated blinking control timer is 0 (A7505), and the updated blinking control timer is updated. If it is not 0 (the result of A7505 is “N”), display data corresponding to the value of the variable symbol number area to be controlled is acquired (A7508). Then, the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (A7511), and the symbol variation control process is terminated.

  If the flashing control timer after the update is 0 (the result of A7505 is “Y”), the flashing control timer initial value corresponding to the target flashing timer area is saved (A7506), and the variable symbol number of the control target is changed. Is updated by +1 in the corresponding range (A7507), and display data corresponding to the value of the variable symbol number area to be controlled is acquired (A7508). Then, the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (A7511), and the symbol variation control process is terminated.

  On the other hand, the game control device 100 acquires a symbol display table (for stopping) corresponding to the symbol to be controlled when the changing flag relating to the symbol to be controlled is not changing (the result of A7502 is “N”). (A7509). In the case of the present embodiment, the address of the symbol display table (for stopping) is defined on the variation control table prepared in Step A2615, Step A2617, and Step A7614. Next, display data corresponding to the value of the stop symbol number area to be controlled is acquired (A7510), the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (A7511), and the symbol variation control process is terminated.

  The blinking control timer initial value saved in step A7506 is saved as a value defined in the variation control table prepared according to the game to be processed. Here, a value corresponding to 100 msec is defined as the initial value of the blinking control timer. This initial value of the blinking control timer is an interval at which the lighting pattern is updated during the fluctuation time in the collective display device 50.

  Further, the corresponding range in step A7507 is defined by the variation symbol number upper limit determination value defined in the variation control table prepared in accordance with the game to be processed. When the fluctuation symbol number upper limit value is reached by updating the fluctuation symbol number by +1 in step A7507, the fluctuation symbol number is set to 0, and the fluctuation symbol number is set to 0 (fluctuation symbol number upper limit judgment value-1). ) Is sequentially updated in the range of In steps A7508 and A7511, the display data (lighting pattern) corresponding to the variable symbol number is acquired and displayed, and the lighting pattern is updated (changed) a number of times equal to the variable symbol number upper limit determination value. As a result of this, a round of display is repeated.

  Thus, by defining the flashing control timer initial value and the fluctuation symbol number upper limit value in the fluctuation control table prepared according to the game to be processed, the interval and display for updating the lighting pattern in the batch display device 50 are completed. The number of updates to be performed can be set for each game.

[Normal game processing]
Next, the details of the normal game process (A1310) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 92 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal game process. In the usual game process, the input of the gate switch 34a is monitored, the whole process related to the usual figure change display game is controlled, and the display of the usual figure is set.

  First, the game control device 100 executes a gate switch monitoring process for monitoring an input from the gate switch 34a (A7601). Details of the gate switch monitoring process will be described later.

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 executes a general power prize switch monitoring process for monitoring an input from the start port 2 switch 37a (A7602). Details of the power receiving prize switch monitoring process will be described later.

  Next, if the usual game process timer is not 0, the game control apparatus 100 updates -1 (subtracts 1) (A7603). Note that the minimum value of the normal game processing timer is set to zero. Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the normal game process timer has become 0 (A7604).

  When the value of the usual game process timer is 0 (the result of A7604 is “Y”), that is, when the time has expired or has already expired, the game control apparatus 100 sets the ordinary game process number. A general game sequence branch table to be referred to branch to the corresponding process is set in the register (A7605).

  Furthermore, the game control apparatus 100 acquires the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the usual game process number based on the set ordinary game sequence branch table (A7606). Then, a subroutine call based on the usual game process number is performed to execute a game branching process corresponding to the usual game process number (A7607).

  When the game process number is “0” in step A7607, the game control apparatus 100 monitors the start of change of the normal map display game, sets the start of change of the base map display game, sets the effect, The usual figure usual process which performs the setting etc. of information required in order to perform the process during a usual figure change is performed (A7608). Details of the routine processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In addition, when the game process number is “1” in step A7607, the game control apparatus 100 executes a process for changing the normal map for setting information necessary for performing the process for displaying the normal map ( A7609). Details of the processing during normal map change will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In addition, when the game process number is “2” in step A7607, the game control apparatus 100 determines whether the current state of the time-variable display game is successful or not. The processing for displaying a normal map for setting the opening time, setting of information necessary for performing the processing for the normal map, etc. is executed (A7610). Details of the processing for displaying a normal map will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In addition, when the game process number is “3” in step A7607, the game control apparatus 100 sets the information necessary to continue the process during the normal drawing or to perform the remaining electric ball process. The middle processing is executed per figure (A7611). Details of the processing during the normal drawing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In addition, when the game process number is “4” in step A7607, the game control apparatus 100 executes the general electric ball remaining ball process for setting information necessary for performing the end process for the normal map (A7612). ). The details of the ordinary figure remaining sphere process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In addition, when the game process number is “5” in step A7607, the game control device 100 executes a normal figure end process for setting information necessary for performing the normal figure normal process (A7608). (A7613). Details of the process for ending the usual figure will be described later with reference to FIG.

  After that, the game control device 100 prepares a normal figure fluctuation control table for controlling fluctuations of the normal symbol by the normal figure indicator 53 (A7614). Thereafter, the symbol variation control process related to the control of the variation of the normal symbol by the ordinary symbol display 53 is executed (A7615), and the ordinary symbol game process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the value of the normal game process timer is not 0 (the result of A7604 is “N”), that is, when the time is not up, the game control apparatus 100 executes the processes after step A7614.

[Gate switch monitoring processing]
FIG. 93 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the gate switch monitoring process. The gate switch monitoring process is executed at step A7601 in the usual game process shown in FIG.

  The game control device 100 first determines whether or not there is an input to the gate switch 34a (A7701). If there is an input to the gate switch 34a (the result of A7701 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not the game state is a right-handed game (A7702). The game state to be hit to the right is a big hit state and a short time state (a general electric power support state). When the game state is a right-handed game (the result of A7702 is “Y”), the process proceeds to step A7705. If the game state is not right-handed (the result of A7702 is “N”), a left-handed instruction notification command (left-handed instruction command) is prepared as an effect command (A7703), and an effect command setting process is executed (A7704). Receiving the left-handed instruction notification command, the effect control device 300 performs a notification (warning) for instructing left-handed using the display device 41 or the like.

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 obtains the number of reserved drawings and determines whether or not the number of reserved drawings is less than an upper limit value (for example, 4) (A7705). The game control apparatus 100, when the number of pending reservations is less than the upper limit (the result of A7705 is “Y”), updates the number of reserved drawings by +1 (A7706), and corresponds to the updated number of pending orders The address of the random number storage area per hit is calculated (A7707). The winning random number is extracted and saved in the winning random number storage area of the RWM (A7708), the winning symbol random number is extracted and saved in the winning symbol random number storage area (A7709), and the gate switch monitoring process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when there is no input to the gate switch 34a (the result of A7701 is “N”), or the game control apparatus 100 determines that the number of reserved drawings is not less than the upper limit value (the result of A7705 is “ N "), the gate switch monitoring process is terminated.

[Penden winning switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the general power winning switch monitoring process (A7602) in the normal game process will be described. FIG. 94 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the general power winning switch monitoring process.

  First, the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the normal figure is being hit, that is, whether or not the normal figure change display game is in a hit state and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is executing a predetermined number of releasing operations. (A7801). If it is normal (the result of A7801 is “Y”), it is determined whether or not there is an input to the start port 2 switch 37a (A7802). When there is an input to the start port 2 switch 37a (the result of A7802 is “Y”), the count number of the utility counter is updated by +1 (A7803).

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the updated count of the general-purpose counter has reached an upper limit value (for example, 6) (A7804). When the count number reaches the upper limit (the result of A7804 is “Y”), the hit end pointer value (for example, 4 or 7) is loaded from the normal end pointer area in the RWM, and the value in the RWM is loaded. Is saved in the control pointer area during the normal map (A7805).

  Finally, the ordinary game processing timer is cleared (A7806), and the ordinary power prize winning switch monitoring process is terminated. In other words, if there is a public power winning that exceeds the upper limit during the normal winning state, the winning end value is saved in the normal processing control pointer area at that time, and the normal variation winning device 37 is closed. So that the hit state of the usual figure ends in the middle.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the game control device 100 is not hitting the normal map (the result of A7801 is “N”), when it is determined that there is no input to the start port 2 switch 37a (the result of A7802 is “N”). ), Or when it is determined that the count number has not reached the upper limit (the result of A7804 is “N”), the general power winning switch monitoring process is terminated.

[Usually normal processing]
Next, the details of the usual figure routine process (A7608) in the usual figure game process will be described. FIG. 95 is a flowchart showing a routine for ordinary processing.

  First, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the number of reserved drawings is 0 (A7901). If the number of reserved symbols is not 0 (the result of A7901 is “N”), a random number is loaded from the random number storage area per RWM (for the number of reserved numbers 1), and the random number storage area per RWM A random number random number is loaded from (for holding number 1), and the random number storage area for each normal symbol (for holding number 1) and the symbol random number storing area for each symbol (for holding number 1) are cleared to 0 after loading (A7902). ). Furthermore, whether or not the probability of a hit result in the normal map display game is higher than normal (high probability state), that is, whether or not it is in a short time state (normal power support state) Is determined (A7903). The probability per ordinary figure during the high probability is 250/251, and the probability per ordinary figure during the low probability is 0/251.

  The game control apparatus 100 sets a low probability lower limit determination value (here, 251), which is a lower limit determination value in the normal figure low probability, when the normal probability is not high (the result of A7903 is “N”) (A7904). If the normal probability is high (the result of A7903 is “Y”), the high probability lower limit determination value (here, 1) that is the lower limit determination value in the normal probability is set (A7905), and step A7906 Transition to processing.

  The game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the winning random number is equal to or greater than the upper limit determination value (251 in this case) (A7906). Note that the upper limit judgment value here is common between the high probability of ordinary figures and the low probability of ordinary figures. If the winning random number is greater than or equal to the upper limit determination value (the result of A7906 is “Y”), that is, if it is out of place, the process proceeds to step A7908. If the winning random number is less than the upper limit determination value (the result of A7906 is “N”), it is determined whether the winning random number is less than the lower limit determination value (A7907).

  When the winning random number is less than the lower limit determination value (the result of A7907 is “Y”), that is, in the case of a loss, the game control apparatus 100 saves the shift information in the hit flag area (A7908). Further, the stop symbol number is set as the normal symbol stop symbol number (A7909), the off symbol information is saved in the general symbol stop symbol information area (A7910), and the process proceeds to step A7914.

  When the winning random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value (the result of A7907 is “N”), that is, in the case of winning, the game control device 100 saves the winning flag area and saves the information (A7911). A corresponding hit stop symbol number is set (A7912), hit stop symbol information corresponding to the hit stop symbol number is saved in the normal stop symbol information area (A7913), and the process proceeds to step A7914. There may be several types of hit stop symbols, and there are two in the present embodiment.

  Next, the game control device 100 saves the stop symbol number in the general symbol stop symbol region (A7914), saves the stop symbol number in the test signal output data region (A7915), and shifts the random number storage region per universal symbol. (A7916) After clearing the vacant area after the shift to 0 (A7917), the number of reserved drawings is updated by -1 (A7918).

  That is, with the execution of the usual figure change display game relating to the oldest number of reserved maps 1, the ranks of the numbers 2 to 4 of the reserved drawings that are on hold after the number 1 of reserved maps are incremented one by one. As a result of this processing, the value for the number of reserved maps in the random number storage area from 2 to 4 is shifted from the value for the number of reserved maps in the random number storage area to 1 for the number of reserved maps in the random number storage area. Will be. Then, the value for the usual figure reservation number 4 in the random number storage area per ordinary figure is cleared, and the usual figure reservation number is decremented by one.

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 extracts the variation pattern random number 3 (A7919), sets the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern random number 3, and saves it in the usual game process timer area (A7920). For example, the variation time is distributed to 500 msec with probability 200/256, 1500 msec with probability 40/256, and 3000 msec with probability 16/256. Then, the process for setting the transition to the normal process is executed (A7921), and the normal process is terminated. In addition, the process transition setting process during normal map change will be described later.

  In addition, when the number of pending drawings is 0 (the result of A7901 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 sets “0” as the processing number for shifting to the usual drawing processing (A7922). The process number is saved in the usual game process number area (A7923). Thereafter, the flag for fraud monitoring period is saved in the ordinary power fraud monitoring period flag area (A7924), and the normal processing is terminated.

[Process transition setting process during normal map change]
FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the process change setting process during normal map change. The process for setting the transition to the normal map change process is executed in step A7921 in the normal map normal process shown in FIG.

  First, the game control device 100 sets “1” as the process number for shifting to the process for changing the usual figure (A8101), and saves the process number in the usual game process number area (A8102).

  After that, the game control device 100 saves a signal related to the start of the normal map change display game (normal symbol 1 changing signal ON) in the test signal output data area (A8103), and the normal map change display game is changing. The changing flag indicating this is saved in the usual variable control flag area (A8104). Then, the flashing control timer initial value (for example, 100 msec), which is the initial value of the flashing cycle timer of the normal display, is saved in the general flashing control timer area (A8105), and the initial value (here) Then, 0) is saved (A8106). Thereafter, the process transition setting process during normal map termination is completed.

[Processing during normal map changes]
Next, the details of the process during normal map change (A7609) in the normal game process will be described. FIG. 97 is a flowchart showing a procedure for processing during normal map change.

  First, the game control apparatus 100 sets the process number to “2” as a setting process for shifting to the process for displaying a normal figure (A8301), and saves the process number in the normal game process number area (A8302). After that, the game control device 100 saves the normal time display time (for example, 0.6 seconds), which is the display time of the result of the normal time variable display game on the normal time display, in the normal time game processing timer area (A8303). .

  Further, the game control apparatus 100 saves a signal related to the end of the normal change (normal symbol 1 changing signal is OFF) in the test signal output data area (A8304). Then, a stop flag indicating that the usual figure change display game is stopped is saved in the usual figure change control flag area (A8305), and the usual figure change process is terminated.

[Processing during normal map display]
Next, the details of the process for displaying a normal map (A7610) in the normal game process will be described. FIG. 98 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the normal map display process.

  First, the game control device 100 loads a hit flag (hit information or out-of-game information) set in the normal processing (A8401), and clears the RWM hit flag area (A8402). Then, it is determined whether or not hit information is set for the loaded hit flag (A8403).

  When the hit information is set for the hit flag (the result of A8403 is “Y”), the game control device 100 sets the hit processing setting table (A8404), and the hit control corresponding to the normal figure stop symbol information is set. A start pointer value (0 or 5 in this case) is acquired and saved in the control pointer area during the normal map (A8405). Also, a hit end pointer value (4 or 7 in this case) corresponding to the normal stop symbol information is acquired and saved in the end stop area for the normal symbol (A8406). Next, a time period for opening the normal power (for example, 1700 msec or 2600 msec) corresponding to the general-purpose stop symbol information is acquired and saved in the general-purpose game processing timer area (A8407). With the above processing, the opening mode of the normal variation winning device 37 in the short time state is set, and for example, it can be opened three times or twice.

  Subsequently, the game control apparatus 100 sets “3” as the process number for shifting to the normal process per game (A8408), and saves the process number in the normal game process number area (A8409). Thereafter, a signal relating to the hit of the normal variation display game (ordinary signal per ordinary symbol is turned on) and a signal relating to the start of ordinary electric operation (ordinary electric accessory 1 operating signal is turned on) are saved in the test signal output data area. (A8410). Further, the ON data is saved in the normal power solenoid output data area in order to output a signal for driving (ON) the normal power solenoid (A8411).

  Further, the game control device 100 clears the information in the ordinary power count number area for storing the number of winnings to the normal variation winning device 37 (A8412), and the number of winnings to the ordinary variation winning device 37 in the normal power fraud monitoring period is obtained. The stored information on the ordinary electric power illegal winnings area is cleared (A8413). Finally, a flag that defines the outside of the fraud monitoring period of the normal variation winning device 37 is saved in the normal power fraud monitoring period flag area (A8414).

  When no hit information is set for the hit flag (the result of A8403 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 sets “0” as the process number for shifting to the normal routine process (A8415). The process number is saved in the usual game process number area (A8416). Thereafter, the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the ordinary power fraud monitoring period flag area (A8417), and the normal display processing is terminated.

[Usual processing per map]
Next, the details of the normal game hitting process (A7611) in the normal game process will be described. FIG. 99 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the process for hitting the common map.

  First, the game control device 100 loads and prepares the control pointer during the normal drawing (A8601), and the value of the loaded control pointer during the normal drawing is the value of the control pointer upper limit value area during the normal drawing (the end of the hit). It is determined whether or not (A8602).

  When the value of the control pointer during the normal map does not reach the value of the upper limit value area of the control pointer during the normal map (the result of A8602 is “N”), the game control device 100 performs the control during the normal map. The pointer is updated by +1 (A8603). Further, the ordinary power operation transition setting process is executed (A8604), and the process during the normal figure is terminated. The details of the ordinary power operation setting process will be described later.

  In addition, when the value of the control pointer during the normal figure reaches the value of the control pointer upper limit value area during the normal figure (the value of the end of hit) (the result of A8602 is “Y”), Without executing the process for updating (+1) the normal process control pointer area in step A8603, the normal operation transition setting process is executed (A8604), and the normal process in normal map is terminated.

[Normal electric operation transition setting process]
Next, the details of the normal power operation transition setting process (A8604) in the normal map processing will be described. FIG. 100 is a flowchart illustrating the procedure of the ordinary power operation transition setting process. The normal electric operation transition setting process is a process for performing drive control of the normal electric solenoid 37c for opening and closing the normal variation winning device 37, and the process branches according to the value of the control pointer.

  The game control apparatus 100 first branches the process according to the value of the control pointer (A8701). Here, the value before updating in step A8603 is used as the control pointer. If the value of the control pointer is 0, 2, or 5, the process proceeds to step A8702 to control the closing of the normal variation winning device 37, so that the normal variation winning device 37 corresponding to the control pointer is controlled. The waiting time (for example, 300 msec) after closing is saved in the usual game processing timer area (A8702).

  Further, the game control device 100 sets off data in the general electric solenoid output data area to turn off the general electric solenoid 37c (A8703), and ends the general electric operation transition setting process.

  If the value of the control pointer is any one of 1 and 3, the game control device 100 shifts to the processing of step A8704 and controls the release of the normal variation winning device 37, so that it corresponds to the control pointer. The normal power open time (for example, 1700 msec) that is the open time of the normal variation winning device 37 is saved in the normal game processing timer area (A8704). Further, ON data is set in the normal power solenoid output data area in order to turn ON the normal power solenoid 37c (A8705), and the normal power operation transition setting process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the value of the control pointer is 6, the game control device 100 shifts to the processing of step A 8706 to control the release of the normal variation winning device 37, and therefore the normal variation winning device corresponding to the control pointer. The open time of normal power (for example, 2600 msec) which is the open time of 37 is saved in the normal game processing timer area (A8706). Further, ON data is set in the normal power solenoid output data area to turn ON the normal power solenoid 37c (A8707), and the normal power operation transition setting process is terminated.

  Further, if the value of the control pointer is any of 4 and 7, the game control device 100 proceeds to step A8708 to end the release control of the normal variation winning device 37 and to perform the ordinary electric ball remaining ball processing ( In order to execute (A7612), “4” is set as the process number (A8708), and the process number is saved in the usual game process number area (A8709).

  Subsequently, the game control apparatus 100 saves the ordinary power remaining ball processing time (for example, 600 msec) in the ordinary game processing timer area (A8710). Thereafter, off data is saved in the normal power solenoid output data area in order to set the normal power solenoid 37c to OFF (A8711), and the normal power operation transition setting process is terminated.

[Penden residual ball processing]
Next, the details of the ordinary electric ball remaining ball process (A7612) in the ordinary game process will be described. FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the ordinary electric ball remaining ball process.

  First, the game control apparatus 100 sets a process number “5” related to the end process for the normal game (A8901), and saves the process number in the normal game process number area (A8902). After that, the usual game ending time (for example, 100 msec) is saved in the usual game process timer area (A8903).

  Further, the game control device 100 saves a signal related to the end of the operation of the normal variation winning device 37 (the normal electric accessory 1 operating signal is OFF) in the test signal output data area (A8904). Subsequently, the ordinary power count number area for counting the number of winnings to the normal variation winning apparatus 37 is cleared (A8905), and further, the normal control pointer area per ordinary figure is cleared (A8906). After that, the normal pointer end pointer area is cleared (A8907), and the general electric power remaining ball processing is ended.

[End processing per regular map]
Next, the details of the normal game end process (A7613) in the normal game process will be described. FIG. 102 is a flowchart showing the procedure for the end-of-game hitting process.

  First, the game control device 100 sets a process number “0” related to the usual game routine process (A9101), and further saves the process number in the usual game process number area (A9102). Thereafter, a signal related to the end of the normal game is saved in the test signal output data area (A9103).

  In addition, the game control device 100 saves a flag (a fraud monitoring period flag) that defines the fraud monitoring period of the normal variation prize winning device 37 in the normal power fraud monitoring period flag area (A9104), and thereafter the per-figure end processing. Exit.

[Segment LED editing processing]
Next, the details of the segment LED editing process (A1311) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 103 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the segment LED editing process. In the segment LED editing process, the special figure 1 hold indicator 54, the special figure 2 hold indicator 55, the universal figure hold indicator 56, the first game state display unit 57, and the second game state display provided in the collective display device 50. Settings relating to driving of the segment LEDs constituting the unit 58, the third gaming state display unit 59, and the round display unit 60 are performed.

  The game control device 100 first updates the blinking control timer by +1 (A9201), and determines whether it is the output on timing (A9202). When the specific bit of the blinking control timer is 1, it is determined that the output is on. In this embodiment, since the specific bit is bit 5, a blinking period of 128 ms can be created.

  When it is the output on timing (the result of A9202 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 sets the common figure hold number display table 1 (A9203), and when it is not the output on timing (the result of A9202 is “N”). The general figure hold number display table 2 is set (A9204), display data corresponding to the general figure hold number is acquired and saved in the segment area of the general figure hold display 56 (A9205). If the number of holds is 0 to 2, the display data is the same in both of the table hold number display tables 1 and 2, so the figure hold indicator 56 does not flash, but if the number of holds is 3 to 4, Since the display data in the figure hold number display table 1 and the display data in the general figure hold number display table 2 are different, the common figure hold indicator 56 blinks.

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not it is the output on timing (A9206). When it is the output on timing (the result of A 9206 is “Y”), the special figure 1 hold number display table 1 is set (A 9207), and when it is not the output on timing (the result of A 9206 is “N”), the special figure 1 hold is held The number display table 2 is set (A9208), display data corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number is acquired and saved in the segment area of the special figure 1 hold display 54 (A9209).

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not it is the output on timing (A9210). When it is the output on timing (the result of A9210 is “Y”), the special figure 2 hold number display table 1 is set (A9211), and when it is not the output on timing (the result of A9210 is “N”), the special figure 2 is on hold. The number display table 2 is set (A9212), display data corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number is acquired and saved in the segment area of the special figure 2 hold display 55 (A9213).

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 sets a round display LED display table in which the display mode on the round display unit 60 is defined (A9214), acquires display data corresponding to the round display LED output pointer, and acquires the round display unit 60. Are saved in the segment area (A9215).

  Next, the game control device 100 sets the game state display table 1 in which the display mode on the second game state display unit 58 or the like is defined (A9216). Further, display data corresponding to the game state display number is acquired and saved in the segment area of each game state display part (A9217).

  Next, the game control device 100 sets the game state display table 2 in which the display mode on the first game state display unit 57 is defined (A9218). Further, display data corresponding to the game state display number 2 is acquired and saved in the segment area of the first game state display unit 57 (A9219).

  Subsequently, the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the high-probability notification flag should be turned on (A9220), and if the high-probability notification flag should not be turned on (the result of A9220 is “N”), that is, a low-probability state. In the case, the off-data of the high-probability notification LED (third gaming state display unit 59) is saved in the segment area (A9221). Thereafter, the segment LED editing process is terminated. When the high-probability notification flag should be turned on (result of A9220 is “Y”), that is, in the high-probability state, the state where the on-information is saved in the high-probability notification flag area (A1023) is maintained as it is. The segment LED editing process ends.

[Magnetic fraud monitoring processing]
Next, details of the magnet fraud monitoring process performed in the magnet fraud monitoring process (A1312) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 104 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the magnet fraud monitoring process. In the magnet fraud monitoring process, the presence / absence of an abnormality is determined based on a detection signal from the magnetic sensor switch 61, and fraud notification is started or stopped.

  The game control device 100 first turns on the magnet sensor (magnetic sensor switch 61), that is, abnormal from the state of the detection signal output from the magnetic sensor switch 61 and taken into the second input port 123 (input port 2). It is determined whether or not magnetism is detected (A9301).

  When the magnet sensor is on (result of A9301 is “Y”), that is, when abnormal magnetism is detected, the game control device 100 sets a magnet fraud monitoring timer that counts the abnormal magnetism detection period to +1. It is updated (A9302), and it is determined whether or not the timer has expired (A9303).

  The game control device 100 clears the magnet fraud monitoring timer when the magnet fraud monitoring timer expires (the result of A9303 is “Y”), that is, when abnormal magnetism is continuously detected for a certain period of time ( A9304), the magnet fraud notification timer initial value (for example, 60 seconds) is saved in the magnet fraud notification timer area (A9305).

  Then, the game control device 100 prepares a magnet fraud notification command as an effect command (A9306), and prepares a magnet fraud occurrence flag indicating that a magnet fraud has occurred as a magnet fraud flag (A9307). Further, it is determined whether or not the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag area (A9313). That is, when the magnetic sensor switch 61 is continuously turned on for a certain period of time (for example, eight interruptions) set by the magnet fraud monitoring timer, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred.

  On the other hand, the game control device 100 clears the magnet fraud monitoring timer when the magnet sensor (magnetic sensor switch 61) is not on (the result of A9301 is “N”), that is, when no abnormal magnetism is detected. (A9308). If the magnet fraud notification timer defining the magnet fraud notification time is not 0, -1 is updated (A9309). The minimum value of the magnet fraud notification timer is set to zero.

  Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is 0 (A9310). Even when the magnet fraud monitoring timer has not expired (the result of A9303 is “N”), the process proceeds to step A9309.

  If the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is not 0 (the result of A9310 is “N”), that is, if the time has not expired, the game control device 100 ends the magnet fraud monitoring process.

  Further, the game control device 100 determines that the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is 0 (the result of A9310 is “Y”), that is, the time has expired or has already expired, Is completed, or when the unauthorized notification has not been performed from the beginning, a command for terminating the unauthorized magnet notification is prepared as an effect command (A9311).

  Furthermore, the game control apparatus 100 prepares a magnet fraud release flag as a magnet fraud flag (A9312), and determines whether the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag area (A9313).

  When the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag area (the result of A9313 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 ends the magnet fraud monitoring process. On the other hand, if the prepared magnet fraud flag does not match the value of the magnet fraud flag region (result of A9313 is “N”), the prepared magnet fraud flag is saved in the magnet fraud flag region (A9314), and the production command is set. The process is executed (A9315). Thereafter, the magnet fraud monitoring process is terminated.

[Board radio fraud monitoring processing]
Next, the details of the board radio wave fraud monitoring process (A1313) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 105 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the board radio wave fraud monitoring process. In the board radio wave fraud monitoring process, the presence / absence of abnormality is determined based on the detection signal from the radio wave sensor 62 (board radio wave sensor) of the game board, and the start or end of fraud notification is set.

  The game control device 100 first turns on the radio wave sensor 62 from the state of the detection signal output from the radio wave sensor 62 and taken into the second input port 123 (input port 2) via the proximity I / F 121, that is, It is determined whether or not an abnormal radio wave is detected (A9401). When the radio wave sensor is on (result of A9401 is “Y”), that is, when an abnormal radio wave is detected, the radio wave fraud notification timer initial value (for example, 60 seconds) is saved in the radio wave fraud notification timer area ( A9402).

  Then, the game control device 100 prepares a board radio wave fraud notification command as an effect command (A9403), and prepares a board radio wave fraud occurrence flag indicating that a board radio wave fraud has occurred as a board radio wave fraud flag (A9404). Furthermore, it is determined whether or not the prepared board radio wave fraud flag matches the value of the board radio wave fraud flag area (A9409). That is, in the case of radio wave fraud, unlike the case of magnetic fraud, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred when an abnormal radio wave is detected.

  On the other hand, when the radio wave sensor is not on (the result of A9401 is “N”), that is, when the abnormal radio wave is not detected, the game control device 100 determines the radio wave fraud notification timer that defines the radio wave fraud notification time. If it is not 0, -1 is updated (A9405). Note that the minimum value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is set to zero.

  Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is 0 (A9406). If the value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is not 0 (the result of A9406 is “N”), that is, if the time has not expired, the board radio wave fraud monitoring process is terminated.

  Further, the game control device 100 determines that the value of the radio wave unauthorized notification timer is 0 (the result of A9406 is “Y”), that is, when the time has expired or has already expired, When the notification is completed or when the unauthorized notification has not been performed from the beginning, a command for terminating the unauthorized broadcast notification is prepared as an effect command (A9407). Further, a board radio wave fraud cancel flag is prepared as a board radio wave fraud flag (A9408), and it is determined whether or not the prepared board radio wave fraud flag matches the value of the board radio wave fraud flag area (A9409).

  When the prepared board radio wave fraud flag matches the value in the board radio wave fraud flag area (the result of A9409 is “Y”), the game control device 100 ends the board radio wave fraud monitoring process. If the values do not match (the result of A9409 is “N”), the prepared board radio wave fraud flag is saved in the board radio wave fraud flag area (A9410), and the effect command setting process is executed (A9411). Thereafter, the board radio wave fraud monitoring process is terminated.

[External information editing process]
Next, details of the external information editing process (A1314) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 106 is a flowchart showing the procedure of external information editing processing. FIG. 106A shows the first half of the external information editing process, and FIG. 106B shows the second half of the external information editing process. In the external information editing process, the start port error monitoring process (A2009), the payout command transmission process (A1305), the winning port switch / status monitoring process (A1308), the magnet fraud monitoring process (A1312), the panel radio wave fraud monitoring process (A1313). On the basis of the monitoring result in, information to be output to an external device such as an information collection terminal or game hall internal management device or a test firing test device is created and set in an output buffer.

  The game control device 100 first determines whether or not a switch abnormality error is occurring (A9501). If a switch abnormality error is occurring (result of A9501 is “N”), the off data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (A9502). If a switch abnormality error is occurring (the result of A9501 is “Y”), the ON data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (A9503).

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not a glass frame opening error is occurring (A9504). If a glass frame opening error is not occurring (the result of A9504 is “N”), it is determined whether or not a body frame opening error (front frame opening error) is occurring (A9505). When the body frame opening error is not occurring (result of A9505 is “N”), the door / frame opening signal OFF data is saved in the external information output data area (A9506), and the security signal OFF data is external information output data. Save in the area (A9507).

  When the glass frame opening error is occurring (result of A9504 is “Y”) or when the main body frame opening error is occurring (result of A9505 is “Y”), The ON data of the frame release signal is saved in the external information output data area (A9508), and the ON data of the gaming machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (A9509).

  After steps A9507 and A9509, the game control device 100 updates -1 if the security signal control timer is not 0 (A9510), and determines whether the security signal control timer is 0 (whether the time is up). Determine (A9511). The initial value of the security signal control timer is set to a predetermined time (for example, 256 msec) when data stored in the RAM is initialized by operating an initialization switch or the like (A1029 of the main process). The security signal control timer is counted from the RAM initialization time.

  When the security signal control timer is not 0 (the result of A9511 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 saves the security signal ON data in the external information output data area (A9512), and proceeds to the process of step A9513. That is, the fact that the data stored in the RAM has been initialized is output as external information.

  When the security signal control timer is 0 (the result of A9511 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not a magnet fraud is occurring (A9513). In addition, when a magnet fraud occurrence flag is saved in the magnet fraud flag area, it can be determined that a magnet fraud is occurring. If the magnet fraud is not occurring (the result of A9513 is “N”), it is further determined whether or not the panel radio wave fraud is occurring (A9514). If the board radio fraud flag is saved in the board radio fraud flag area, it can be determined that the board radio fraud is occurring.

  When the board radio wave fraud is not occurring (the result of A9514 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 further determines whether or not a big prize opening fraud is occurring (A9515). It should be noted that if the illegal prize occurrence flag for the big prize opening is saved in the illegal flag area, it can be determined that the big prize opening fraud is occurring. If the winning prize fraud is not occurring (the result of A9515 is “N”), it is further determined whether or not the ordinary power fraud is occurring (A9516). If the power transmission fraud has not occurred (the result of A9516 is “N”), it is determined whether or not a start-up port error has occurred (A9517). It should be noted that when the error occurrence flag is saved in the start port error flag area, it can be determined that the start port error is occurring. If the start port error is not occurring (the result of A9517 is “N”), it is further determined whether or not fraudulent radio waves are occurring (A9518).

  On the other hand, the game control device 100 determines that the prize winning hole fraud is not successful when the magnet fraud is occurring (result of A9513 is “Y”), or when the board radio wave fraud is occurring (result of A9514 is “Y”). If it is occurring (result of A9515 is “Y”), if a power transmission fraud is occurring (result of A9516 is “Y”), or if a start-up port error is occurring (result of A9517 is “Y”) ]), The ON data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (A9519). Thereafter, the ON signal of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (A9520), and main prize ball signal editing processing for setting information relating to the number of prize balls to be paid out is executed (A9521).

  The game control apparatus 100 executes the main prize ball signal editing process (A9521) even when the frame radio wave fraud is not occurring (the result of A9518 is “N”). Details of the main prize ball signal editing process will be described later. Subsequently, the game control apparatus 100 executes a start port signal editing process for editing the start port winning signal (A9522). Details of the start port signal editing process will be described later.

  Next, the game control device 100 updates −1 if the symbol determination number control timer for controlling the output time of the information related to the number of times of execution of the special figure variable display game is not 0 (A9523). Note that the minimum value of the symbol determination number control timer is set to zero.

  Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the symbol determination number control timer is 0 (A9524). When the value of the symbol determination count control timer is 0 (the result of A9524 is “Y”), that is, when the time has expired or has already expired, the off data of the symbol determination count signal is output as external information output data. The area is saved (A9525), and the external information editing process is terminated.

  In addition, when the value of the symbol determination count control timer is not 0 (the result of A9524 is “N”), that is, when the time has not expired, the game control device 100 sends the on-data of the symbol determination count signal to the external information. The output data area is saved (A9526), and the external information editing process is terminated.

[Main prize ball signal editing process]
Next, details of the main prize ball signal editing process (A9521) in the external information editing process will be described. FIG. 107 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the main prize ball signal editing process. In the main prize ball signal editing process, a main prize ball signal generated every time the number of prize balls (scheduled number to be paid out) generated by winning a prize opening reaches a predetermined number (here, 10) is output to an external device. It is processing.

  First, the game control device 100 updates -1 if the main prize ball signal output control timer is not 0 (A9601). The minimum value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is set to zero. Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is 0 (A9602).

  When the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is 0 (the result of A9602 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 further determines whether or not the number of main prize ball signal outputs is 0. (A9603).

  When the main prize ball signal output count is not 0 (the result of A9603 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 updates the main prize ball signal output count by −1 (A9604) and outputs the main prize ball signal output. The main prize ball signal output control timer initial value (for example, 128 msec) is saved in the control timer area (A9605).

  After that, the game control device 100 saves the on data for turning on the main prize ball signal in the external information output data area of the RWM (A9607), and ends the main prize ball signal editing process. If the number of main prize ball signals output is 0 (the result of A9603 is “Y”), off data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM. (A9608), and the main prize ball signal editing process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is not 0 (the result of A9602 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output on period. Is determined (A9606). Note that the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output-on period means that the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (for example, 64 msec).

  When the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output on period (result of A9606 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 outputs on data for turning on the main prize ball signal to the external information of the RWM. Save to the data area (A9607). Further, when the main prize ball signal output control timer is not in the output on period (result of A9606 is “N”), the off data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is set as the external information output data of the RWM. The area is saved (A9608), and the main prize ball signal editing process is terminated.

[Start signal editing process]
Next, details of the start port signal editing process (A9522) in the external information editing process will be described. FIG. 108 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the start port signal editing process. The start port signal editing process is a process commonly performed for each input when there is an input from the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, or the start port 3 switch 42a.

  First, the game control device 100 updates −1 if the start port signal output control timer is not 0 (A9701). The minimum value of the start port signal output control timer is set to 0. Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the start port signal output control timer is 0 (A9702).

  When the value of the start port signal output control timer is 0 (the result of A9702 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 determines whether the start port signal output count is 0 (A9703). If the number of start port signal outputs is not 0 (the result of A9703 is “N”), the start port signal output count is updated by −1 (A9704), and the start port signal output control is performed in the start port signal output control timer area. The timer initial value (for example, 128 msec) is saved (A9705).

  After that, the game control device 100 saves the ON data for turning on the start port signal in the external information output data area of the RWM (A9707), and ends the start port signal editing process.

  In addition, when the start port signal output count is 0 (the result of A9703 is “Y”), the game control device 100 outputs the off data for turning off the start port signal for the external device to the external information output of the RWM. The data is saved in the data area (A9708), and the start port signal editing process is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the value of the start port signal output control timer is not 0 (the result of A9702 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the start port signal output control timer is in the output on period. (A9706). Note that the fact that the start port signal output control timer is in the output-on period means that the value of the start port signal output control timer is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (for example, 64 ms).

  When the start port signal output control timer is in the output on period (result of A9706 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 sets the ON data for setting the start port signal to the ON state in the external information output data area of the RWM. (A9707), and the start port signal editing process is terminated.

  In addition, when the start port signal output control timer is not in the output on period (the result of A9706 is “N”), the game control device 100 sets off data for turning off the start port signal for the external device to the RWM. The data is saved in the external information output data area (A9708), and the start port signal editing process is terminated.

[Main processing (production control device)]
First, details of the main process executed by the effect control device 300 will be described. FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the main process (main program) executed by the effect control device 300. The main process is executed by the main control microcomputer 311 (production microcomputer) when the gaming machine 10 is powered on. Since the process in the effect control device 300 is a process common to all the embodiments and modifications except for the round effect setting process, the ending effect setting process, and the effect content determination process, the process executed in any of the embodiments Is not described.

  In the flowchart of the process executed by the effect control device 300, the step code (number) is represented as “B ***”.

  When the execution of the main process is started, the effect control device 300 first prohibits interruption (B0001). Next, the CPU 311 and VDP 312 are initialized (B0002, B0003), and an interrupt is permitted (B0004). When the interrupt is permitted, a command reception interrupt process for receiving a command transmitted from the game control device 100 is enabled.

  Next, the production control device 300 permits generation of display data to be displayed on the display device 41 and the like (B0005), and sets a random number seed used for random number generation (B0006). Then, the initial value at power-on is saved in the area to be initialized (B0007).

  Subsequently, the effect control device 300 clears WDT (watchdog timer) (B0008). The WDT is activated with the above-described CPU initial setting (B0002), and monitors whether the CPU 311 is operating normally. If the WDT is not cleared even after a certain period, the WDT times out and the CPU 311 is reset.

  Next, the effect control device 300 detects an operation signal of the effect button 25 (signal of the effect button switch 25a or the touch panel 25b) by the player, or changes the effect content (setting) according to the detected signal. The effect button input process is executed (B0009). In the effect button input process, an effect button operation effect process described later is executed. Subsequently, a hall / player setting mode process for accepting an operation such as a change in brightness or volume of the LED or liquid crystal by the player is executed (B0010). In the hall / player setting mode process, the player can customize the production according to the production points described later.

  Next, the effect control device 300 executes effect point control processing for adding or clearing effect points (B0011). In the production point control process, the production point is added by performing the production and operation to be added to the production point, and at the end of the game so that the production point can be carried over to the next game, etc. For example, information including production point information and the like is displayed on the display device 41 as a QR code (registered trademark).

  Next, the effect control device 300 executes a random number update process for updating a random number such as an effect random number (B0012), analyzes the received command received from the game control device 100, and executes a corresponding received command check process. (B0013). Details of the received command check process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the effect control device 300 executes effect display editing processing for updating various data in accordance with the content displayed on the display device 41 or the like, or setting a drawing to be displayed on the display device 41 in the display frame buffer. (B0014). The drawing data set at this time can update the image of the display device 41 without any problem as long as the VDP 312 can complete the drawing within a frame period of 1/30 seconds (about 33.3 msec). Then, drawing drawing preparation to the display frame buffer is completed and drawing command preparation end setting is executed (B0015).

  Subsequently, the effect control device 300 determines whether it is a frame switching timing (B0015). If it is not the frame switching timing (the result of B0016 is “N”), the process of B0016 is repeated until the frame switching timing is reached, and if it is the frame switching timing (the result of B0016 is “Y”), the display to the display device 41 is performed. The screen drawing is instructed (B0017). Since the frame period of the present embodiment is 1/30 second, for example, when a periodic V blank (image update) every 1/60 seconds (1/2 of the frame period) is executed twice, the frame is switched. . The interval may be further increased without updating the image in 1/60 seconds.

  In addition, the production control device 300 executes a sound control process for controlling the sound output from the speaker 19 (B0018).

  In addition, the effect control device 300 executes a decoration control process for controlling a decoration device (board decoration device 46, frame decoration device 18) made of LEDs or the like (B0019). In the decoration control process, for example, light emission control of a decoration device such as an LED is executed. Details of the decoration control process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In addition, the effect control device 300 executes a movable body control process for controlling an effect device (board effect device 44) such as an electric accessory driven by a motor and a solenoid (B0020). In the movable body control processing, operation control of the first movable accessory unit 500, the second movable accessory unit 550, the third movable accessory unit 600, the fourth movable accessory unit 650, and the fifth movable accessory unit 700 is executed. Then, other accessory action effects are executed according to the drive setting of the solenoid or the like.

  In addition, the effect control device 300 executes light guide plate control processing for controlling the light emission effect of the light guide plates (the first light guide plate 680 and the second light guide plate 683) (B0021). The light guide plate control process is a light guide plate control means in the gaming machine 10. Details of the light guide plate control processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Then, the effect control device 300 returns to the process B0008 after completing the process B0021 described above. Thereafter, the processing from B0008 to B0021 is repeated.

[Received command check processing]
Next, details of the received command check process (B0013) in the main process described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 110 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the received command check process executed by the effect control device 300.

  First, the effect control device 300 loads the value of the command reception counter in the command reception counter area of the RAM as the command reception number in order to check the number of commands received from the game control device 100 (B1101). Then, it is determined whether the number of received commands is not 0 (B1102). When the command reception number is 0, that is, when there is no command received from the game control apparatus 100 (result of B1102 is “N”), there is no command to be analyzed, and the received command check process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the command reception number is not 0, that is, if the command is received from the game control device 100 (the result of B1102 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 has a command reception counter in the command reception counter area. After subtracting the value by the number of received commands (B1103), the contents of the received command buffer in the RAM are copied to the command area for analysis (B1104). Here, since the received command buffer is a ring buffer, there is no problem even if the number of received commands is subtracted before the contents in the buffer are copied to the command area. Even if a new command is received during copying, the data is not overwritten.

  Then, the production control device 300 updates the command read index by +1 (adds 1 only) in the range of 0 to 31 (B1105). The reception command buffer is configured to store up to 32 received commands. The received commands are stored in the received command buffer in the order of command reading indexes 0 to 31. Here, the received commands are read in the index order and copied to the command area for analysis. Note that the storage area of the received command buffer corresponding to the read command read index is cleared at the timing when copying to the command area for analysis is completed.

  The effect control device 300 determines whether or not copying of the commands for the number of received commands loaded in the process of step B1101 is completed (B1106). If the copying is not completed (the result of B1106 is “N ]), The process from step B1104 to B1106 is repeated.

  When the effect control device 300 receives a command transmitted from the game control device 100, the contents of the received command are stored in the reception command buffer, and at the same time, the command reception counter value in the command reception counter area is added and updated. Although 32 commands can be stored in the reception command buffer, analysis of received commands is performed separately in a command area for analysis. When the contents of the received command are copied to the analysis command area, the received command buffer and the command reception counter value are cleared. In this way, it is possible to prepare for a large amount of command reception by always ensuring a free area without directly analyzing in the reception command buffer.

Subsequently, when the copying is completed (the result of B1106 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 loads the received command content in the analysis command area (B1107), and receives command analysis for analyzing the content. The process is executed (B1108). Details of the received command analysis processing will be described later with reference to FIG. Also, the address of the command area for analysis is updated (B1109). After that, it is determined whether or not the analysis of the command for the number of received commands loaded in the process of step B1101 is completed (B1110). If the analysis is not completed (the result of B1110 is “N”), step The processing from B1107 to B1110 is repeated. When the analysis is completed (the result of B1110 is “Y”), the received command check process is terminated.

[Received command analysis processing]
Next, details of the received command analysis process (B1108) in the received command check process described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the received command analysis process executed by the effect control device 300.

  The effect control apparatus 300 first separates the received command as the MODE part and the lower byte as the ACTION part (ACT part) (B1201). The command transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 is composed of a MODE section (MODE command) and an ACTION section (ACTION command), and is normally transmitted continuously from the MODE section indicating the type of command. The Therefore, the upper and lower orders of the received command are configured in the order of the MODE section and the ACTION section.

  Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE portion is in the normal range (B1202). That is, it is determined whether or not it is a value that can be taken by the MODE portion indicating the type of command (a value assigned as a command specification indicating the type). If the MODE portion is in the normal range (the result of B1202 is “Y”), it is similarly determined whether or not the ACTION portion is in the normal range (B1203). That is, it is determined whether or not the value can be taken by the ACTION section indicating the contents of the command (specific production instruction or the like) (value assigned as the command specification indicating the contents). If the ACTION part is in the normal range (the result of B1203 is “Y”), it is further determined whether the ACTION part for the MODE part is a correct combination (B1204). That is, it is determined whether or not the value of the ACTION section is a value that can be taken by the type of command specified by the MODE section. If the combination is correct (the result of B1204 is “Y”), command processing corresponding to the command system is executed in the processing after B1205.

  The production control device 300 first determines whether or not the value of the MODE portion is within the range of the variable command (B1205). Note that the variation command is a command for commanding a variation pattern of a decorative special symbol, and there is a variation command. If the MODE portion represents a variable command (the result of B1205 is “Y”), the variable command processing is executed (B1206), and the received command analysis processing is terminated.

  If the MODE portion does not represent a variable command (the result of B1205 is “N”), the effect control device 300 next determines whether or not the MODE portion is within the range of the big hit command (B1207). The jackpot command is a command for instructing an operation related to the effect during the jackpot (display of a fanfare screen or a round screen). For example, a fanfare command (A5117), a round command (A5702), an interval command (A5903), An ending command (A5905) or the like. If the MODE portion represents a jackpot command (the result of B1207 is “Y”), the jackpot command processing is executed (B1208), and the received command analysis processing is terminated.

  When the MODE portion does not represent the big hit command (the result of B1207 is “N”), the effect control device 300 next determines whether or not the MODE portion is within the design command range (B1209). Note that the symbol-related command includes a decorative special symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern. If the MODE section represents a symbol-based command (result of B1209 is “Y”), symbol-based command processing is executed (B1210), and the received command analysis processing is terminated.

  When the MODE unit does not represent the symbol-based command (the result of B1209 is “N”), the effect control device 300 next determines whether the MODE unit is within the range of the single-shot command (B1211). If the MODE portion represents a single command (result of B1211 is “Y”), single command processing is executed (B1212), and the received command analysis processing is terminated.

  When the MODE unit does not represent a single command (the result of B1211 is “N”), the effect control device 300 next determines whether or not the MODE unit is within the range of the pre-read symbol command (B1213). . The prefetch symbol commands include the prefetch symbol stop command described above. If the MODE portion represents a pre-read symbol system command (result of B1213 is “Y”), the pre-read symbol system command process is executed (B1214), and the received command analysis process is terminated.

  When the MODE portion does not represent the prefetched symbol system command (the result of B1213 is “N”), the effect control apparatus 300 next determines whether or not the MODE portion is within the range of the prefetched variation command (B1215). ). The prefetch fluctuation command includes the above-described prefetch fluctuation pattern command. If the MODE portion represents a prefetch fluctuation command (the result of B1215 is “Y”), the prefetch fluctuation command processing is executed (B1216), and the received command analysis process is terminated.

  On the other hand, if the MODE unit does not represent the prefetch fluctuation command (result of B1215 is “N”), the production control device 300 may have received an unexpected command (for example, a command used only during the test mode). Therefore, the received command analysis process is terminated. Further, when the MODE part is not in the normal range (result of B1202 is “N”), when the ACTION part is not in the normal range (result of B1203 is “N”), or when the ACTION part for the MODE part is not a correct combination ( When the result of B1204 is “N”), the received command analysis processing is terminated.

[Variable command processing]
Next, the details of the variable command processing (B1206) in the above-described received command analysis processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 112 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the variable command process executed by the effect control device 300.

  The effect control device 300 determines whether or not the special figure type (special figure 1 or special figure 2) of the received fluctuation command (fluctuation command) is unconfirmed (B1301). When the special figure type is unconfirmed (the result of B1301 is “Y”), the variable command processing is terminated. If the special figure type is not undetermined (the result of B1301 is “N”), the combination of the received variable command and symbol command is checked (B1302), and whether or not the variable command and symbol type are inconsistent. Is determined (B1303). Here, the term “inconsistency” means that there is a contradiction in performing an effect, for example, when a symbol system command of a big hit symbol is received while a variation command of a deviation is received. If the variation command and the symbol type are inconsistent (result of B1303 is “Y”), the variation command processing is terminated.

  When the variation command and the symbol type are not inconsistent (the result of B1303 is “N”), the effect control device 300 determines the variation pattern type from the variation command (variation command) (B1304), and the effect during the variation A variation effect setting process for setting a certain variation effect is executed (B1305). There are a plurality of effects for the same variable command. Subsequently, a special state change is set to the game state flag indicating the game state (P machine state) (B1306), and if the number of pre-read effects such as continuous effects is not 0, -1 is updated (B1307).

[Variation production setting processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 113, the details of the variation effect setting processing (B1305) in the above-described variation command processing will be described. FIG. 113 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the changing effect setting process executed by the effect control device 300.

  The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the variation pattern type is a reachless variation (a variation that does not reach a reach state) (B1401). When the variation pattern type is unreachable variation (the result of B1401 is “Y”), the first half notice group address table corresponding to the model code, special figure type, and production mode is set (B1402), and the variation command ( The address of the first-order notice allocation group table corresponding to the MODE part of the variable command) and the number of reserved special figure types is acquired (B1403). In the case of fluctuation without reach, since the fluctuation time is shortened as the number of holds increases, the address of the table corresponding to the number of holds is acquired.

  When the variation pattern type is not reachless variation (result of B1401 is “N”), that is, when the variation pattern type is reachable variation, the production control device 300 corresponds to the model code, special figure type, production mode, and symbol type. A notice distribution group address table is set (B1404), and the MODE part of the variable command (fluctuation command) and the address of the first half notice distribution group table corresponding to the variation pattern type are acquired (B1405).

  The effect control device 300 performs a lottery for a notice appearing during the first half fluctuation (before reach) after Steps B1403 and B1405 (B1406). Subsequently, a second half notice allocation group address table corresponding to the model code, special figure type, presentation mode, and symbol type is set (B1407), and the second half notice distribution group table address corresponding to the ACT part of the variable command is set. Acquired (B1408), a lottery of notices appearing during the latter half of the change (during reach) is performed (B1409). Thereafter, the contents of the fluctuation effect corresponding to the MODE part and ACT part of the fluctuation command (fluctuation command) are determined (B1410). Note that the fluctuation time and main reach contents can be found from the fluctuation commands.

  Next, the effect control device 300 determines the content of the effect (notice effect) corresponding to the notice lottery result (B1411). Thereafter, a stop symbol of the decorative special figure variation display game is determined according to the contents of the variation effect such as the reach effect or the notice effect (B1412). Here, the decoration stop symbol is specifically determined, for example, by determining the loose eye in the case of the off-line symbol.

  Next, the effect control device 300 performs display setting of the variable effect (B1413) and performs display setting of the notice effect (B1414). Subsequently, the display setting of the hold reduction corresponding to the special figure type is performed, and for example, an animation in which the hold display corresponding to the decoration special figure that changes this time is set is set (B1415). Subsequently, the voice number that determines the effect mode by the speaker and the decoration number that determines the effect operation of the decoration device are set (B1416).

  Next, the production control device 300 performs display setting of decoration special figure fluctuation corresponding to the special figure type (B1417), and the fourth special symbol other than the first to third special symbols which fluctuate on the display device 41. The display setting of the 4th symbol variation regarding (4th symbol) is performed (B1418). The fourth symbol variation is displayed by the above-described lamp display device (LED) 80 provided in addition to the display device 41.

  Next, the effect control device 300 executes the effect content determination process for determining whether to change the reach content or to replace the content after determining all the notices of the next variable display game to be executed ( B1419).

[Big hit command processing]
Next, details of the jackpot command processing (B1208) in the received command analysis processing described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 114 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the jackpot command process executed by the effect control device 300.

  The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the MODE portion of the received jackpot command represents a fanfare (B1501). When the MODE portion of the jackpot command indicates fanfare (the result of B1501 is “Y”), that is, when the jackpot command is a fanfare command, the effect control device 300 executes fanfare effect setting processing (B1502). Fanfare is set in the gaming state flag indicating the current gaming state (P machine state) of the gaming machine 10 (B1503), and this process ends. The round number upper limit value can also be obtained from the symbol type determined from the symbol-related command (decorative symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern).

  When the MODE portion of the received jackpot command does not represent a fanfare (the result of B1501 is “N”), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE portion of the jackpot command represents a round ( B1504). When the MODE portion represents a round (the result of B1504 is “Y”), that is, when the jackpot command is a round command, the effect control device 300 executes a round effect setting process (B1505), and the current gaming machine The game state flag indicating 10 game states (P machine state) is set to round (B1506), and this process is terminated.

  When the MODE portion of the received jackpot command does not represent a round (result of B1504 is “N”), the effect control apparatus 300 determines whether the MODE portion of the jackpot command represents an interval ( B1507). When the MODE portion represents an interval (the result of B1507 is “Y”), that is, when the jackpot command is an interval command, the effect control device 300 executes an interval effect setting process (B1508), and the current gaming machine The game state flag indicating 10 gaming states (P machine state) is set to “interval” (B1509), and this process is terminated.

  If the MODE portion of the received jackpot command does not represent an interval (the result of B1507 is “N”), the presentation control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE portion of the jackpot command represents ending ( B1510). If the MODE section represents an ending (the result of B1510 is “Y”), an ending effect setting process is executed (B1511), and the game state flag indicating the current gaming state (P machine state) of the gaming machine 10 is being ending. Setting is made (B1512), and this process is terminated.

  When the MODE portion of the received jackpot command does not represent an ending (the result of B1510 is “N”), the production control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE portion of the jackpot command is a big prize opening count. Determination is made (B1513). When the MODE portion represents the big prize mouth count (the result of B1513 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the present is short open (B1514). When it is not during the short opening (the result of B1514 is “N”), the effect control device 300 updates the acquired game ball number counter (B1515), and ends this processing.

  If it is during short opening (the result of B1514 is “Y”), the production control device 300 performs a lottery to display the acquired number of balls (B1516) and whether or not to hide the acquired number of game balls. Is determined (B1517). When the number of acquired game balls is not displayed (the result of B1517 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 updates the non-display counter (B1518), and ends this process. When the number of acquired game balls is not hidden (the result of B1517 is “N”), the effect control device 300 updates the short opening pattern counter (B1519) and ends this process.

  If the MODE portion of the received jackpot command does not represent the big prize count (result of B1513 is “N”), the production control device 300 does not execute any processing and performs the jackpot command processing. Exit.

[Design command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 115, the details of the symbolic command process (B1210) in the received command analysis process described above will be described. FIG. 115 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the symbol system command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

  The effect control device 300 sets a special figure type corresponding to the MODE portion of the received symbol-type command (decoration special figure 1 command or decorative special figure 2 command) (B1601). The special figure type is special figure 1 or special figure 2. Then, a symbol type corresponding to the combination of the MODE portion and the ACTION portion (ACT portion) of the symbol-related command is set and saved in a predetermined area such as a RAM (B1602). Here, in FIG. 1 and FIG. 2, since the symbol distribution ratio changes, a symbol type is set using a table for each MODE. In addition, for example, the symbol type is an out-of-order symbol, a random hit symbol, a 4R probability variable big hit symbol (4R-A1, etc.), a 4R normal big hit symbol (4R-A2, etc.), an 8R probability variable big hit symbol (8R-A1, etc.), 8R normal. Corresponds to big hit symbol (8R-A2, etc.), 12R probability variable big hit symbol (12R-A1, etc.), 12R normal big hit symbol (12R-A2, etc.).

[Single command processing]
Next, the details of the single command processing (B1212) in the received command analysis processing described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 116 is a flowchart showing the sequence of the single command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

  The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the MODE unit represents a model designation command indicating the type of gaming machine (B1701). If the MODE portion represents a model designation command (the result of B1701 is “Y”), a model setting process for setting the type of gaming machine is executed (B1702), and the one-shot system command process is terminated.

  If the MODE unit does not represent a model designation command (the result of B1701 is “N”), the effect control apparatus 300 next determines whether the MODE unit represents a RAM initialization command (B1703). ). When the MODE section indicates a RAM initialization command (the result of B1703 is “Y”), a RAM initialization setting process for informing the RAM initialization is executed (B1704), and the one-shot command process is performed. finish.

  When the MODE unit does not represent a RAM initialization command (result of B1703 is “N”), the effect control device 300 next determines whether the MODE unit represents a command at the time of power failure recovery. (B1705). If the MODE unit represents a command for restoration from a power failure (the result of B1705 is “Y”), a power failure restoration setting process is executed (B1706), and the one-shot system command process is terminated.

  If the MODE unit does not represent a command at the time of power failure recovery (result of B1705 is “N”), the effect control device 300 next determines whether or not the MODE unit represents a customer waiting demo command ( B1707). If the MODE section represents a customer waiting demo command (the result of B1707 is “Y”), a customer waiting demo setting process is executed (B1708), and the one-shot command processing is terminated.

  In the case where the MODE section does not represent the customer waiting demonstration command (the result of B1707 is “N”), the effect control apparatus 300 then determines whether the MODE section represents the decorative special figure 1 hold number command (A3208). Is determined (B1709). If the MODE portion represents a decoration special figure 1 hold number command (the result of B1709 is “Y”), a special figure 1 hold information setting process is executed (B1710), and the single-shot command process is terminated.

  When the MODE unit does not represent the decoration special figure 1 hold number command (the result of B1709 is “N”), the effect control apparatus 300 then sends the decoration special figure 2 hold number command (A3203). It is determined whether or not to represent (B1711). If the MODE portion represents a decoration special figure 2 reservation number command (the result of B1711 is “Y”), a special figure 2 reservation information setting process is executed (B1712), and the one-shot command process is terminated.

  When the MODE portion does not represent the decoration special figure 2 reservation number command (the result of B1711 is “N”), the effect control device 300 next determines whether or not the MODE portion represents the probability information command. (B1713). If the MODE part represents a probability information command (the result of B1713 is “Y”), the probability information setting process is executed (B1714), and the one-shot command process is terminated.

  When the MODE portion does not represent the probability information command (the result of B1713 is “N”), the effect control device 300 next determines whether or not the MODE portion represents an error / unauthorized command ( B1715). Examples of error / unauthorized commands include a fraud occurrence command (A2108), a fraud cancel command (A2116), a state off command (A2404), and a state on command (A2407). If the MODE part represents an error / unauthorized command (the result of B1715 is “Y”), an error / unauthorization setting process is performed to notify or cancel the error or the unauthorized (B1716), End single-shot command processing.

  When the MODE unit does not represent an error / unauthorized command (the result of B1715 is “N”), the effect control device 300 then displays a command for effect mode switching (for example, the effect of A5142). It is determined whether or not (mode switching preparation command) is represented (B1717). If the MODE portion represents a command for effect mode switching (the result of B1717 is “Y”), the effect mode switching setting process is executed (B1718), and the one-shot command process is terminated.

  When the MODE unit does not represent the command for switching the effect mode (result of B1717 is “N”), the effect control device 300 next determines whether or not the MODE unit represents the symbol stop command. (B1719). Note that the symbol stop command includes, for example, the symbol stop command shown in FIG. 1 and the symbol stop command shown in FIG. If the MODE portion represents a symbol stop command (the result of B1719 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 next determines whether or not the command of the MODE portion is a normal command ( B1720).

  When the command of the MODE section is a normal command (the result of B1720 is “Y”), the production control device 300 sets a stop mode of the corresponding special figure (B1721), and the game after all symbols stop. The status flag is set to the normal status (B1722), and the single command processing is terminated. In the process of B1724, as an example, the gaming state flag is set to the normal state. However, depending on the timing at which this process is executed, the gaming state flag is a flag of “Fluctuating”, “Big hit”, “Low hit” Is set.

  On the other hand, when the MODE section does not represent a symbol stop command (result of B1719 is “N”), or when the command of the MODE section is not normal (result of B1720 is “N”), the production control device 300 finishes the single command processing.

[Pre-reading design command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 117, the details of the pre-read symbol system command process (B1214) in the received command analysis process described above will be described. FIG. 117 is a flowchart showing a procedure of prefetched symbol system command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

  The production control device 300 first determines whether or not the latest hold information is information on special figure 1 hold (special figure 1 start memory), for example, the decoration special figure hold number command received latest is the decoration special figure 1 hold number. It is determined whether it is a command (B1801). When the latest reserved information is information on special figure 1 hold (result of B1801 is “Y”), the prefetch symbol type command (prefetch symbol stop command) is displayed in the special figure 1 prefetch symbol command area corresponding to the number of special figure 1 holds. Save (B1802).

  In the production control device 300, when the latest hold information is not the special figure 1 hold information (the result of B1801 is “N”), that is, the latest received special figure hold number command is the decorative special figure 2 hold number command. In this case, the pre-read symbol system command (pre-read stop symbol command) is saved in the special figure 2 pre-read symbol command area corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number (B1803).

  The effect control device 300 sets a prefetch fluctuation command reception waiting flag indicating that it is waiting to receive a prefetch fluctuation command after steps B1802 and B1803 (B1804). This is because the prefetch symbol command and the prefetch variation command are set, so that the game controller 100 transmits the prefetch variation command following the prefetch symbol command. Thereafter, the look-ahead design command processing is terminated.

[Read-ahead variation command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 118, the details of the prefetch fluctuation command processing (B1216) in the received command analysis processing described above will be described. FIG. 118 is a flowchart showing a procedure of prefetch fluctuation command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

  The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not it is waiting to receive a prefetch fluctuation command (B1901). When the above-mentioned prefetch fluctuation system command reception waiting flag (B1604) is set, it can be determined that the prefetch fluctuation system command is waiting to be received. If it is not waiting to receive the prefetch fluctuation command (the result of B1901 is “N”), the prefetch fluctuation command processing is terminated. When waiting for reception of a prefetch fluctuation command (the result of B1901 is “Y”), the prefetch fluctuation command reception waiting flag is cleared (B1902).

  Next, the production control device 300 (sub-board) sets a pre-reading fluctuation MODE conversion table corresponding to the number of holds in the pattern (Special Figure 1 or Special Figure 2) of the latest holding information (B1903), Corresponding to the MODE part, the sub-in-prefetch variation command MODE part is acquired (B1904). Next, a prefetch variation ACT conversion table is set (B1905), and the sub-internal prefetch variation command ACT portion corresponding to the ACTION portion (ACT portion) of the prefetch variation command is acquired (B1906).

  Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not both the converted MODE part and ACT part (that is, the sub-in-prefetch variation command MODE part and ACT part) are other than 0 (B1907). If the command is normal (valid), it is converted to a value other than 0. When both the converted MODE part and ACT part are other than 0 (result of B1907 is “Y”), the converted command composed of the converted MODE part and ACT part corresponds to the latest hold information and the number of holds. Is saved in the pre-reading fluctuation command area (special figure 1 pre-reading fluctuation command area or special figure two pre-reading fluctuation command area) (B1908). Then, prefetch command consistency check processing is executed (B1909), and it is determined whether or not the combination of the converted MODE part and ACT part is normal (B1910).

  Note that the time of the first half change corresponding to the MODE section changes depending on the number of holds when the hold starts the variable display game. When the hold starts the variable display game, if there is no other hold, the first half of the change will be long, and if a new hold occurs and the number of holds is large, the first half of the change will be short. Therefore, the MODE part of the received prefetch fluctuation command is converted into the sub-internal prefetch fluctuation command MODE part so that the internal command of the effect control apparatus 300 can be handled in the same manner even if the time value of the first half fluctuation changes.

  Further, since the type of reach is not related to the number of holds, the latter half fluctuation corresponding to the sub-in-prefetch fluctuation command ACT part does not depend on the number of holds. However, since there is also a type of reach of the same system, if the production control device 300 is used as it is without converting the ACT part (the value of the second half fluctuation) of the prefetch fluctuation command, the number increases and the check becomes difficult. . For example, there are types of normal reach, such as normal reach minus one stop and normal reach plus one stop. Therefore, by converting the ACT unit indicating the reach of the same system to the same sub-subread pre-reading variation command ACT unit, the number is reduced, and the load of check processing such as pre-read command consistency check processing is reduced.

  Next, the effect control device 300, when at least one of the converted MODE part and the ACT part (that is, the sub-in-prefetch variation command MODE part and the ACT part) is 0 (the result of B1907 is “N”), or If the combination of the converted MODE part and ACT part is not normal (the result of B1910 is “N”), the pre-reading variation command processing is terminated because the converted command is abnormal.

  When the combination of the converted MODE part and ACT part is normal (result of B1910 is “Y”), the production control device 300 loads the prefetch target hold information (the latest hold information) from the prefetch change command area. (B1911), a prefetch lottery process relating to the latest pending prefetch effect is executed (B1912).

  Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the latest pending prefetch notice effect occurs (B1913). When the pre-reading notice effect of the latest hold occurs (result of B1913 is “Y”), the hold information corresponding to the already held state is loaded (B1914), and the contents of the changing effect based on the holding of the prefetching mode and the changing effect based on the already held state are loaded. The contents are compared (B1915).

  Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not there is the same variation content in the comparison process of B1915 (B1916). When there is no same variation content (result of B1916 is “N”), the production control device 300 sets the prefetch production content (B1917), and ends this processing.

  When there is the same variation content (the result of B1916 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 saves the prefetch execution flag in a predetermined temporary area (B1918), and the number of the pending reservations stored at the present time is displayed. Save (B1919).

  Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the prefetching notice effect that occurs is an effect that immediately starts (B1920). An effect that starts immediately is, for example, a pending change notice. When the pre-reading notice effect to be generated is an effect that starts immediately (the result of B1920 is “Y”), a display corresponding to the selected prefetching effect is set (B1921), and the accessory control corresponding to the selected prefetching effect is set. Information is set (B1922). Then, the prefetch fluctuation command processing is terminated.

  On the other hand, the production control device 300 does not generate the latest pending pre-reading notice effect (result of B1913 is “N”), or when the generated prefetching notice effect is not an effect that immediately starts (result of B1920 is “N”). ) As it is. The prefetch fluctuation command processing is terminated.

[Decoration control processing]
Next, details of the decoration control process (B0019) in the main process described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 119 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the decoration control process executed by the effect control device 300.

  The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the current time is the frame update timing of the display device 41 (B2001). When it is the frame update timing (the result of B2001 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 is assigned to each of a plurality of effect patterns such as a variation pattern and a big hit scene prepared in advance for a variable display game. The current brightness data table is acquired based on the production number corresponding to the current production among the production numbers that are present (B2002).

  Next, the production control device 300 acquires luminance data corresponding to the current number of frames (frame number) from the luminance data table (B2003), acquires lighting data for designating an LED to be lit, and outputs lighting data. An instruction to write to the setting register is given (B2004).

  When it is not the frame update timing (the result of B2001 is “N”), the effect control apparatus 300 executes the next process B2005 without executing the process B2002 to B2004.

  Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the current time is the fanfare start timing (B2005). When it is the fanfare start timing (the result of 2005 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 emits light in a right-handed instruction light emitting mode for a predetermined period with respect to the LEDs provided in the panel decoration device 46 and the frame decoration device 18. (B2006), and this process ends. The light emission mode of the right-handed instruction is, for example, a mode in which light is repeatedly emitted so as to flow in a wave shape clockwise (clockwise) over approximately 240 ° in an arc shape from the left part of the game board 30 to the lower right part. In such a light emitting mode, the flow path of the game ball at the time of right strike (special strike) overlaps with the range, so that the player can intuitively grasp that it is the right strike timing.

  On the other hand, when it is not the fanfare start timing (the result of B2005 is “N”), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the current timing is the end timing of the specific gaming state (B2007). When it is the end timing of the specific gaming state (the result of B2007 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 emits a left-handed instruction to the LEDs provided in the panel decoration device 46 and the frame decoration device 18 for a predetermined period. The mode is set to emit light (B2008), and this process is terminated. When it is not the end timing of the specific gaming state (the result of B2007 is “N”), the effect control device 300 ends this process. The light emission mode of the left-handed instruction is, for example, a mode in which light is repeatedly emitted so as to flow in a wave shape counterclockwise (counterclockwise) over approximately 240 ° in an arc shape from the lower right part to the left part of the game board 30.

[Light guide plate control processing]
Next, the details of the light guide plate control process (B0021) in the main process described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 120 is a flowchart illustrating a light guide plate control process performed by the effect control apparatus 300.

  The production control device 300 first determines whether or not the current time is the character display timing (B2101). When it is the character display timing (the result of B2101 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 sets all the light emission modes for the LEDs on the lower side of the first light guide plate (B2102). When it is not the character display timing (the result of B2101 is “N”), the effect control device 300 does not execute the process of B2101.

  Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the present is the sequential light emission timing of effect display (B2103). When it is the sequential light emission timing of the effect display (result of B2103 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 sequentially sets the light emission mode for the LEDs on the right side of the first light guide plate (B2104). When it is not the sequential light emission timing of the effect display (result of B2103 is “N”), the effect control apparatus 300 does not execute the process of B2104.

  Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the present time is the timing for all light emission of the effect display (B2105). When it is the timing for all the light emission of the effect display (the result of B2105 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 sets the light emission mode for all the LEDs on the right side of the first light guide plate (B2106). When it is not the timing for all the effects to be emitted (the result of B2105 is “N”), the effect control device 300 does not execute the process of B2106.

  Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the present is the sequential light emission timing of the shutter display (B2107). When it is the sequential light emission timing of the shutter display (result of B2107 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 sequentially sets the light emission mode for the LEDs on the right side of the second light guide plate (B2108). When it is not the sequential light emission timing of the shutter display (result of B2107 is “N”), the effect control apparatus 300 does not execute the process of B2108.

  Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the present time is the full light emission timing of the shutter display (B2109). When it is the timing for all light emission of the shutter display (result of B2109 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 sets all light emission modes for the LEDs on the right side of the second light guide plate (B2110). End the process. If it is not the timing for all light emission of the shutter display (the result of B2109 is “N”), the effect control device 300 ends this process without executing the process of B2110.

  In the present embodiment, after the end of the big hit state (first special game state), the variable display game is more likely to become a special result mode (first special result mode) than the normal game state (a big hit state is likely to occur). (Probability fluctuation state) is not generated, but after the big hit state is finished, normal gaming state (low probability state), short time state (low probability state + general power support state) or probability change state (high probability state + general power support state) ) May be generated. Further, the probability variation state (probability variation state) may be continued until the next big hit state (first special game state) occurs, or when a variable display game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times). It is good also as what is complete | finished at the time, and good also as what is complete | finished when a predetermined fall lottery is won.

[One aspect of the present invention]
The following inventions can be cited as inventions related to the gaming machines described so far.

  (11) In a gaming machine capable of executing a game based on establishment of a predetermined start condition, a drive source that drives the effect member, and a plurality of drive force transmission members that transmit the driving force of the drive source to the effect member; When the drive source shifts from the first drive mode to the second drive mode, a predetermined sound generated from the plurality of drive force transmission members becomes a first volume, and the drive source is changed from the second drive mode to the second drive mode. When shifting to the three driving mode, the predetermined sound generated from the plurality of driving force transmission members changes from the first volume to the second volume, and the predetermined sound generated from the plurality of driving force transmission members as the game progresses. Can be changed to the first volume and the second volume.

  (12) The variable winning device includes a normal variable winning device capable of converting the open / close member into an open state and a closed state, and the normal gaming state and the normal variable winning device more than the normal gaming state. A gaming state control means for setting any gaming state of a specific gaming state that is easy to win, and during the period of the normal state, the movable accessory is rotated in a rotation direction opposite to a predetermined rotation direction; The gaming machine according to (11), wherein the movable accessory is rotated in a predetermined rotation direction during the period of the specific gaming state.

  (13) The gaming machine according to (11) or (12), wherein the movable accessory stops rotating for a certain period each time a predetermined period elapses.

  (14) An arc-shaped light emitting device is provided in the gaming area, and the light emitting device emits light in a wave shape in the same direction as the predetermined rotation direction during the specific gaming state (11). ) To (13).

  (15) The gaming machine according to any one of (11) to (14), wherein the light emitting device is flashed only during a period when the special strike is advantageous for a player by a light emitting device provided in the game area.

(Modification 1 of the first embodiment)
In Modification 1 of the first embodiment, an invention will be described in which the driving sound of the entire accessory generated by driving the motor is utilized for production. Hereinafter, an example relating to a change in driving sound generated from a plurality of gears in response to a change in motor driving speed (rotational speed) will be described.

  An accessory composed of a plurality of movable parts is generally transmitted from a driving source (motor) that supplies driving force, a driving force transmission member (gear) that transmits the driving force to the effect member, and the driving force transmission member. In addition, a frictional sound and a collision sound between the movable parts are generated during the movement. Here, in the second movable accessory 550a, ten or more decorative rotating bodies 581 (effect members) rotate, and as shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, there are 18 work gears 561 and 17 pieces of work gears 561a. The intermediate gear 562 rotates at the same time as the motor 557 is driven. When these gears (driving force transmission members) are driven, in addition to the driving sound of the motor 557, a meshing sound between the gears and a rotating sound generated from the rotation shaft of each gear are generated, so that the front of the second movable accessory 550a is generated. The seated player can recognize the sound generated from the second movable accessory 550a even if the glass frame 15 is interposed between the player and the second movable accessory 550a. The same applies to the third movable accessory 600a.

  That is, since the second movable accessory 550a is driven by a plurality of gears based on the driving of one motor 557, the driving sound of the motor 557, the collision sound, the sliding sound, and the rotating sound generated from each gear. Are transmitted to the player through the glass frame 15.

  Further, since the third movable accessory 600a is driven by a plurality of gears based on the driving of one motor 607, the driving sound of the motor 607, and the collision sound, sliding sound, and rotation sound generated from each gear. Are transmitted to the player through the glass frame 15.

  The operating sound of these accessories is transmitted as a volume that can be recognized by the player regardless of the driving speed of the driving source, that is, the operating speed of the accessory is low, medium, or high. It can improve the interest of the game by utilizing it for a part. Note that the operation sound of the accessory is a so-called machine sound that is interesting and expecting, and has the effect of deepening the view of the work provided by the gaming machine 10.

  Next, the relationship between the operating speed of the drive source and the sound generated from the drive source will be described. FIG. 121 is a chart of the operating speed of the driving source and the sound generated from the entire accessory according to the first modification of the first embodiment. The horizontal axis indicates the rotation speed of the motor, and the vertical axis indicates the magnitude of the sound generated from the entire accessory.

  The motor 557 and the motor 607 can be divided into three regions of low speed, medium speed, and high speed as the rotational speed of the speed range for driving the accessory. The low speed range is the first driving mode and the medium speed range is the second driving mode. The high speed range is the third driving mode.

  The work gear 561 and the intermediate gear 562 have a loud drive sound when the drive source (motor) rotates in the low speed range, and the drive sound becomes low when the drive source rotates in the medium speed range. When the drive source rotates in the high speed range, the sound generated from the work gear 561 and the intermediate gear 562 (sound generated from the entire accessory, predetermined sound) is larger than when the drive source rotates in the medium speed range. The sound (predetermined sound) generated from the entire accessory is smaller than when rotating in the region.

  Note that the sound (predetermined sound) generated from the entire accessory can include the sound generated from the motor in addition to the sound generated from the gear.

  The motor 557 (see FIG. 9) and the motor 607 (see FIG. 12) are, for example, stepping motors having characteristics that minimize drive noise and vibration in the medium speed range, but the stepping motor has a rotation angle based on digital input. Since it is proportional to the number of pulses, dynamic characteristics and static characteristics fluctuate based on the relationship between the armature and the circuit (driver) for generating the pulses. The motor 557 and the motor 607 may be a direct current motor (DC motor), for example.

  The driving sound of the motor is caused by various factors. For example, the driving sound of the motor is generated from vibration generated from the motor or a built-in or external reduction gear. Here, the main factor of the vibration of the stepping motor is that the rotor moves repeatedly, the rotor goes too far, the rotor swings back, and the rotor stops repeatedly for each pulse input. In particular, the vibration becomes large during low-speed rotation of 100 to 200 pps, and the vibration becomes minimum during medium-speed rotation around 500 pps.

  As the motor speed increases, the rotor proceeds to the next step as soon as it stops, so the vibration decreases and the motor rotates smoothly.However, when the pulse speed increases, excitation is performed before rotating to the target angle. Since the rotor cannot follow up because the process proceeds to the next step, the step-out occurs, and therefore, the vibration increases at a higher speed than in the middle speed range. Therefore, the magnitude relationship between the sound volumes generated from the motor is established in the order of low speed> high speed> medium speed. However, the magnitude relationship of the volume generated from the motor described here is an example, and the volume generated from the motor may be larger in the high speed range than in the low speed range, and the magnitude relationship of the volume depends on the design of the motor. .

  FIG. 122 is a diagram illustrating the rotation speed of the motor, the rotation speed of the gear, the operation speed of the accessory, and the volume of sound generated from each part according to the first modification of the first embodiment. The combined sound of the sound generated from the motor and the sound generated from the gear corresponds to the sound (predetermined sound) generated from the entire accessory.

  In the example described above, a motor drive sound with a loud volume when the motor rotation speed is low, a drive sound with a low sound volume at medium speed, and a drive sound with a medium sound volume at high speed. Arise from. When the gear rotation speed is low, the driving sound of the “large” volume is driven, the driving sound of the “low” volume is set at the medium speed, and the driving sound of the “medium” volume is set at the high speed. Comes from the gear.

  The sound generated from the gear is generated by various factors as in the motor, but as an example, the sound when the gear meshes is the main factor, and the sliding sound generated from the rotating shaft of the gear or transmitted from the motor. Vibration is also a factor in the sound generated from the gears.

  When the rotation speed of the gear is low (as a guideline, approximately 20 rotations per minute in the work gear 561), the load (frictional force) for rotating the rotating decorative member 581 attached to the work gear 561 and the motor 557 Is transmitted to each gear, and the gear as a whole rotates with a slight lack of smoothness. Therefore, from each gear, there is a sound that the gears “gacha, gacha,...” Mesh with each other, and a loud sound is generated as a volume.

  When the rotational speed of the gear is medium speed (as a guideline, about 50 revolutions per minute in the work gear 561), the load on the gear is lower than that at low speed due to the inertial force that the rotating decorative member 581 rotates. Further, since the vibration of the motor 557 driven at a medium speed is greatly reduced as compared with the low speed, the vibration transmitted from the motor 557 is also reduced, and the vibration transmitted to each gear is greatly reduced, so that the entire gear is smooth. Rotate. For this reason, each gear generates a sound of engagement between gears called “Gararara ...”, and a smaller sound than that at low speed is generated.

  When the gear rotation speed is high (as a guideline, about 90 rotations per minute in the work gear 561), the gear rotates smoothly as in the medium speed, but the rotation speed is higher than that at the medium speed. Because of this, the amount of gear meshing per unit time increases and a gear meshing sound “Gararararararara ··” is generated. The sound volume generated from the gear at high speed is larger than that at medium speed, but the volume is lower than that at low speed because the gears rotate smoothly.

  Then, as a sum of the volume generated from the motor and the volume generated from the gear, the volume generated from the entire accessory is “large” when the operation speed of the accessory (rotating decorative member 581) is low, and “small” when the intermediate speed is low. It is “medium” at high speed.

  FIG. 123 is a diagram for explaining the effect contents in the reach variation of the first modification of the first embodiment. Here, the effects related to the sound and vibration of the gear based on the variation display game that causes reach variation will be described.

  When the fluctuation display game is started and a reach occurs, the motor 557 and the motor 607 rotate at a medium speed from the stopped state. Since the motor 557 and the motor 607 rotate at a medium speed until the middle stage of the reach production, the drive sound and vibration generated from the gears are small from the generation of the reach to the middle stage of the reach.

  When the reach production reaches the final stage, the motor 557 and the motor 607 become low speed, and the sound and vibration generated from the gears increase. This effect is an effect for attracting the player's attention about the whereabouts of the reach by changing the sound from the gear from a low volume to a high volume. That is, the player recognizes that the reach production has come to the end due to the loud sound generated from the gears while watching the vicinity of the start opening and the start memory until the middle stage of the reach production. In this case, attention is paid to which symbol the remaining one identification symbol that is changing is stopped.

  In addition, as described with reference to FIG. 122, the driving sound generated from the motor itself changes according to the rotational speed of the motor. For this reason, the driving sound generated from the motor itself changes from a low volume to a large volume due to the low-speed rotation toward the end stage of the reach effect, which brings an auxiliary effect that attracts the player's attention. That is, in addition to the driving sound and vibration generated from the gear, the driving sound and vibration generated from the motor increase due to the driving sound and vibration generated from the motor, so that the transmission force to the player increases.

  Thus, when the motor sound and the gear sound become loud at the end of the reach production, the player's sense of expectation can be improved through hearing, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Here, at the timing when the motor sound and the gear sound change from “small” to “large”, the output sound (speaker sound, effect sound) from the speaker 19 (sound output means) changes from “large” to “small”. It can be suppressed. Suppressing the volume of the speaker 19 leads to a player more strongly recognizing a sound (predetermined sound) generated from an accessory in a game hall that is generally not quiet. In addition, the relationship between the speaker sound “high”, the motor sound and the gear sound “small”, and the relationship between the speaker sound “small”, the motor sound and the gear sound “high”, and the motor and gear volume relative to the speaker volume. The contrast of the game can be increased to give the player a sense of surprise and expectation, thereby enhancing the interest of the game.

  FIG. 124 is a diagram for explaining the effect contents in the pseudo continuous effect (pseudo continuous effect) of the first modification of the first embodiment. Here, the effects of the sound and vibration of the motor and gear based on a variation display game in which three times of pseudo continuous variation (pseudo variation) are executed will be described. Pseudo-continuous production (pseudo-continuous production) is a pseudo-stop display (pseudo-stop display) of a plurality of decorative special symbols that are variably displayed before the final stop result display in one special-figure display game. ) Is an effect of performing a pseudo-variable display game (pseudo-variable variation, pseudo-variation, sub-variation) a predetermined number of times. At the time of pseudo stop display, pseudo continuous symbols suggesting pseudo continuous effects may be stopped and displayed.

  In the variation display game, when the first pseudo continuous variation is started by the appearance of the pseudo continuous symbol, the motor 557 and the motor 607 rotate at a medium speed from the stopped state. Therefore, the sound volume and vibration generated from the work gear 561 and the intermediate gear 562 in the first period of the pseudo continuous fluctuation are small. Since the motor 557 and the motor 607 rotate at medium speed, the volume and vibration generated from the motor 557 and the motor 607 are also small.

  At this time, the speaker sound is also small so that the motor sound and gear sound, which are at a low volume, are not drowned out by other sounds. In addition, you may output a sound from the speaker 19 irrespective of the rotational speed of a motor or a gear.

  Subsequently, when the second pseudo continuous fluctuation is started, the motor 557 and the motor 607 become high speed, and the volume and vibration amount generated from the gears become “medium”. Furthermore, when the third time of pseudo continuous fluctuation is started, the motor 557 and the motor 607 become low speed, and the volume and vibration amount generated from the gear become “large”. The speaker sound also increases as the gear sound increases, and becomes “medium” in the second pseudo series and “large” in the third pseudo series.

  This effect is produced by changing the volume and vibration generated from the speaker sound and gear to “Small”, “Medium”, and “Large” as the pseudo-variable progresses the first time, the second time, and the third time. It can give a sense of expectation to the development of Further, the second time of the pseudo-variable variation is “Gararara Larara Larara ··” and the second movable accessory 550a and the third movable accessory 600a rotate at a good tempo and emit sound, whereas the pseudo-variable variation 3 In the second round, the rotation of the second movable accessory 550a and the third movable accessory 600a becomes low speed, and a slow sound is generated as “Gacha, Gacha,”. It becomes information. For this reason, the player pays attention to the third performance of the pseudo-variation, and the interest of the game is improved.

  On the other hand, since the volume and vibration of the gear of the first pseudo-variation variation are “small”, not only the screen of the display device 41 that is fluctuating, but also the change of the light emitting pattern of the accessory around the screen and the decorative member, etc. Can be expected to see. In other words, the player's consciousness can be directed to an effect that the player wants to watch as appropriate by changing the volume and vibration of the gear in accordance with the development of the pseudo-continuous effect. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

  In addition, as an example of utilizing “large”, “medium”, and “small” gear sounds, it is confirmed whether the predetermined performance is exhibited without relying on the visual inspection of the inspector for the initial operation when the gaming machine 10 is shipped. It can be used to do. Since the inspector can confirm the initial movement using a plurality of sensory organs of vision and hearing, the quality of the examination and the efficiency of the examination are improved.

  In addition, when a player or the like changes the setting of the volume of the gaming machine 10, the brightness of the screen, the contents of the production, etc., it corresponds to selecting the next setting item, accepting the setting, canceling the setting, etc. Gears can rotate at low, medium and high speeds. Since it is possible to visually confirm that the setting of the gaming machine 10 has been changed in the amusement hall, the setting operation intended or not intended by the player is performed. It becomes easier for the player to confirm that this has been done. From the viewpoint of confirming the setting operation, the gear may be rotated only when the setting is changed (the accessory is movable).

  Also, while waiting for a customer, the second movable accessory 550a and the third movable accessory 600 that are stopped are moved at a low speed at a predetermined timing or at random timing, thereby generating a gear sound with a large volume, The gaming machine 10 can be appealed by attracting the attention of people around the game hall.

  In addition, as an error notification, the player and the store clerk are notified that an error has occurred by increasing the gear volume, and the initial operation is informed by increasing the gear volume during the initial operation. be able to.

  Note that the change in the volume of the gear is not limited to the form (small, large, small, medium, large) described in this modification, but large, medium, small, large, medium, medium, large, medium, small, medium, large, small, medium, large, small, large, and small It also includes changing the volume appropriately according to the progress (production) of the game, such as small, medium, large, and the like.

[Effect of Modification 1 of First Embodiment]
In this way, the motor sound generated according to the rotation speed of the motor and the sound generated from the gear that rotates in accordance with the motor drive attracts the player's attention to the center of the effect, or produces the player's consciousness. You can go from the center to the other.

  When the motor and gear move from the medium speed range to the low speed range, the sound (predetermined sound) and vibrations generated from the motor and gear increase from a small amount to a large amount, which can attract the player's attention to the center of the production. The player's expectation can be enhanced by the increased predetermined sound.

  In addition, by controlling the magnitude of the output sound from the speaker 19 in accordance with the timing at which the volume and vibration of the motor and gear change, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize the motor sound and gear sound.

  Further, the efficiency of the inspection of the initial operation at the time of shipment of the gaming machine 10 can be improved by the “large”, “medium”, and “small” of the motor sound and the gear sound. Furthermore, in the setting of the volume of the gaming machine 10, the brightness of the screen, the contents of the production, etc., the “large”, “medium”, and “small” of the motor sound and gear sound change in accordance with the operation of the production button 25. Thus, whether the production button 25 or the like is operated is transmitted through the visual and auditory senses of the operator, and the efficiency of the setting operation can be improved. In addition, the change of the motor sound and gear sound according to the operation of the effect button 25 for changing the setting and the movement of the accessory improve the satisfaction with the operation, and the player can perform the setting operation. Motivate to do it positively.

[One aspect of the present invention]
The invention related to the production using the “large”, “medium”, and “small” of the motor sound and the gear sound described above, and the production using the “large”, “medium”, and “small” of the motor vibration and the gear vibration. Examples of the invention include the following inventions.

  (16) In a gaming machine capable of executing a game based on establishment of a predetermined start condition, a drive source that drives the effect member, and a plurality of drive force transmission members that transmit the driving force of the drive source to the effect member; When the drive source shifts from the first drive mode to the second drive mode, a predetermined sound generated from the plurality of drive force transmission members becomes a first volume, and the drive source is changed from the second drive mode to the second drive mode. When shifting to the three driving mode, the predetermined sound generated from the plurality of driving force transmission members changes from the first volume to the second volume, and the predetermined sound generated from the plurality of driving force transmission members as the game progresses. Can be changed to the first volume and the second volume.

  (17) A sound output unit capable of outputting a production sound is provided, and the volume of the production sound is changed in response to the predetermined sound being changed from the first volume to the second volume. The gaming machine according to (16).

  (18) In a gaming machine capable of executing a game based on establishment of a predetermined start condition, a drive source that drives the effect member, and a plurality of drive force transmission members that transmit the driving force of the drive source to the effect member; When the drive source shifts from the first drive mode to the second drive mode, the vibration generated by the plurality of drive force transmission members becomes the first vibration, and the drive source changes from the second drive mode to the third drive mode. When the mode is shifted, the vibration generated by the plurality of driving force transmission members changes from the first vibration to the second vibration, and the vibration generated by the plurality of driving force transmission members in accordance with the progress of the game is the first vibration. A gaming machine that can be changed to vibration and second vibration.

  (19) A sound output means capable of outputting a production sound is provided, and the volume of the production sound is changed in response to the vibration being changed from the first vibration to the second vibration. The gaming machine according to (18).

  In the inventions described in (16) to (19) above, the “drive source” corresponds to the motor 557, for example. The “driving force transmission member” corresponds to, for example, the work gear 561 and the intermediate gear 562. The “sound output unit” corresponds to, for example, the speaker 19.

  The “first drive mode” corresponds to a mode in which the drive source is driven in a low speed range, and the “second drive mode” corresponds to a mode in which the drive source is driven in a medium speed range. The “third drive mode” corresponds to a mode in which the drive source is driven in a high speed range.

  The “predetermined sound” is a mechanical sound at the time of driving generated from the entire accessory, and corresponds to a sound generated from the entire accessory. The “first volume” corresponds to, for example, a “small” volume generated at medium speed as the volume generated from the entire character, and the “second volume” corresponds to “medium” generated at high speed, for example. Corresponds to the volume.

  The “first vibration” corresponds to, for example, a “small” vibration state that occurs at medium speed, and the “second vibration” corresponds to, for example, a “medium” vibration state that occurs at high speed. .

(Modification 2 of the first embodiment)
In the modified example 2 of 1st Embodiment, the colored light transmission board 88 is provided in the front surface of the top production | presentation unit 40c. The colored translucent plate 88 is, for example, a colored translucent member, and has an effect that the colored translucent plate 88 appears to emit light by a color different from the color of light behind. When light passes through the prism, it is divided into a plurality of colors (that is, a plurality of wavelengths), but the colored translucent plate 88 attenuates a part of the wavelength range of the light passing from the rear to the front, Light is changed to light of a different wavelength range.

  The colored translucent member absorbs a wave number range corresponding to a specific color like a so-called color filter. For example, in a color filter that absorbs red color (does not pass the wave number region corresponding to red color) when receiving sunlight from behind, the translucent member looks blue-green because the blue-green color is emphasized.

  As a color filter effect, it is known that colors similar to the color of the color filter are emphasized and the opposite colors are difficult to see. For example, a yellow filter that absorbs a short wavelength region (blue) of visible light emphasizes yellow, a red-violet filter that absorbs a medium wavelength region (green) of visible light emphasizes red purple, and a long wavelength region of visible light The blue-green filter that absorbs (red) emphasizes blue-green.

  FIG. 125 is a front view of a game board according to Modification 2 of the first embodiment. FIG. 126 is an exploded perspective view of a game board unit according to Modification 2 of the first embodiment. Both are different from FIGS. 2 and 3 in that a colored translucent plate 88 is provided on the front surface of the upper rendering unit 40c.

  As shown in FIGS. 125 and 126, the upper effect unit 40c is disposed in front of the second movable accessory 550a. The upper rendering unit 40c is configured by a colored translucent plate 88 and a support member (not shown) that supports the colored translucent plate 88. The colored translucent plate 88 is, for example, the title of the gaming machine 10 (model name of the gaming machine). Etc.) is a single translucent member engraved. In addition, the second movable accessory front base 570 and the decorative rotating bodies 581 (see FIG. 9) included in the second movable accessory 550 unit are also configured by a translucent member.

  The upper effect unit 40c has a smaller area than the second movable accessory 550a. Then, the LED light provided on the LED substrate 568 is decorated so as to cause the upper effect unit 40c to emit light and emphasize the upper effect unit 40c via the second movable accessory front base 570 and each decoration rotating body 581. .

  The upper effect unit 40c is an effect member that does not have a light emitting function therein and transmits light of illumination (LED provided on the LED board 568 in FIG. 9) provided in the second movable accessory unit 550. The upper effect unit 40c can visually recognize the second movable accessory 550a through the upper effect unit 40c without hindering the visual recognition of the second movable accessory unit 550. As described above, when transmitting light, the upper rendering unit 40c (colored light transmitting plate 88) is decorated with a hue (hue) different from the color emitted by the LED substrate 568 in order to greatly attenuate a part of the wavelength range. .

  Which wavelength range is greatly attenuated is based on the colored color of the colored translucent plate 88, but here it appears red when it receives the white light of an LED made by combining red, blue, and green colors. It demonstrates as what is colored. That is, the red wavelength region is not attenuated, and the blue-green wavelength region, which is the opposite color of red, is attenuated.

  Specifically, when the white LED light is received, the colored translucent plate 88 looks red. In addition, when the red LED light is received, the colored translucent plate 88 looks red. Further, when the orange LED light is received, the colored light transmitting plate 88 looks bright red (pomegranate). In addition, when the yellow LED light is received, the colored translucent plate 88 looks orange. Further, when the green LED light is received, the colored translucent plate 88 looks red. Further, when the blue LED light is received, the colored translucent plate 88 looks purple. Further, when the blue LED light is received, the colored translucent plate 88 looks dark red (garnet). Further, when the purple LED light is received, the colored translucent plate 88 looks dark purple. In addition, the colored translucent plate 88 looks dark blue (navy blue) when receiving light blue LED light, and the colored translucent plate 88 looks bright red (burning red) when receiving pink LED light.

  The second movable accessory 550a and the third movable accessory 600a can execute a light propagation effect, and the rainbow (seven colors) are drawn to draw an arc starting from the upper part of the warp inlet 40a shown in FIG. )) Propagation effects can be executed. The propagation effect may be started when the variation mode of the variation display game becomes reach. That is, the second movable accessory 550a emits light in the order of red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and purple from the vicinity of the upper portion of the warp inlet 40a, and the seven colors correspond to the second movable accessory. 550a and the third movable accessory 600a propagate in an arc shape to emit light. These colors are not sequentially turned on and off at regular intervals, but change the hue (hue) so as to flow with gradation between hues. Therefore, in the process in which the second movable accessory 550a and the third movable accessory 600a change from white to red, a pink color that is an intermediate color between white and red is visible. Further, in the process of changing from green to blue, blue-green, which is an intermediate color between green and blue, can be visually recognized. Similarly, in the process of changing from green to blue, light blue is also visible.

  Note that the rainbow propagation effect may be emitted so as to sandwich the extinguishment (extinguishment area) before the seven colors complete the light emission and the next seven colors start to emit light. Specifically, at a fixed point, light is emitted in the order of white, followed by red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, and purple. After the light is extinguished for a certain period, red, orange, yellow, and green are used as the second rainbow. , Blue, indigo, and purple. In this way, once the seven colors have made a round, once the extinguishing period is provided, it becomes easier to recognize each rainbow. For example, one rainbow (one round of seven colors) corresponds to one unit of reach production. In some cases, it becomes easier for the player to recognize the break of the production, the development of the production, and the like, and the interest of the game is improved.

  Further, the light may be emitted so as to sandwich the light extinction (light extinction region) for each of the seven colors. Specifically, at a fixed point, light emission and light extinction are repeated in the order of off, red, off, yellow, off, green, off, blue, off, indigo, off, purple, and off at a fixed point. As described above, when the extinction region is provided in the propagation effect, the color separation is clearly recognized for each of the seven colors, and the light propagation state is more easily recognized. As the utilization of the light emission mode, for example, the case where 7 colors are emitted than the case where 6 colors are emitted all around the second movable accessory 550a and the third movable accessory 600a is emitted. Notification (implicit notification) such as high expectation is possible.

  Here, the colored translucent plate 88 has a function of not attenuating the red wavelength range but attenuating the blue-green wavelength range, which is the opposite color of red, so that the second movable accessory 550a behind the white continues. Red, orange, yellow, green, blue, indigo, purple, the colored translucent plate 88 is colored in the following order: red, bright red, orange, red, purple, dark red, dark purple. appear. That is, when the background color changes to seven colors, the colored translucent plate 88 appears to emit light mainly in the red color system. In particular, even if the background color changes from white to red, the colored translucent plate 88 looks red and there is almost no change in hue, so even if the background color changes greatly, the color of the colored translucent plate 88 does not change. Looks like. In addition, when the background color changes to red, orange, yellow, and green, the colored translucent plate 88 changes to red, bright red, orange, and red. Although the change can be enjoyed, the colored translucent plate 88 appears to have a tint centered on red even though the background color has changed greatly from red to green. In the process of changing the background color to green, blue, indigo, and purple, the colored translucent plate 88 changes to red, purple, dark red, and dark purple, and in the latter half, the color is centered on dark red. Therefore, the color (hue) is more subdued than the first half, which changes from red to bright red, orange, and red.

  In other words, when the background color changes from white to red, orange, yellow, and green as the first half, and the process that changes from green, blue, indigo, and purple as the second half, the colored translucent plate 88 is The player can recognize the difference between the first half and the second half because the first half looks bright red and the second half looks dark red.

  Further, the hue of the colored translucent plate 88 that changes from red to bright red, orange, red, purple, dark red, and dark purple following red is different from the light emitting aspect of the second movable accessory 550a. Therefore, the upper effect unit 40c is emphasized.

  As described above, the colored translucent plate 88 changes depending on a hue different from the change of the background color, and the upper rendering unit 40c and the second movable accessory are provided by distinguishing between the first half and the second half. 550a brings about the effect of being emphasized alternately. Then, the player's attention can be attracted to both the upper effect unit 40c and the second movable accessory 550a, and the player can recognize the development of the effect related to the rainbow effect.

  Next, unevenness such as brightness and darkness of the colored translucent plate 88 will be described. FIG. 127 is a side view of the colored translucent plate 88 and the second movable accessory 550a according to the second modification of the first embodiment. Here, it will be described how the light emitted from the second movable accessory 550a looks in front of the colored light transmitting plate 88. The light from the LED spreads away from the light source, but for convenience of explanation, it is shown as a straight arrow, and is L1, L2, and L3 in order from the top.

  A gear box is provided between the second movable accessory rear base 551 and the second movable accessory intermediate base 565, and between the second movable accessory intermediate base 565 and the second movable accessory front base 570. The LED substrate 568 is disposed.

  The colored translucent plate 88 has an effect of absorbing and diffusing light depending on the coloring components, and thus has an effect of diffusing LED light in the colored translucent plate 88 itself and shining. Then, the LED lights L1, L2, and L3 will be described.

  The LED light L1 passes through the decorative rotating body 583d and further passes through the colored light transmitting plate 88, but is diffused by the decorative rotating body 583d before passing through the colored light transmitting plate 88. It is visually recognized as diffused light on the front.

  The LED light L2 passes through the decorative rotating body 585e and the decorative rotating body 581c and passes through the colored light transmitting plate 88, but is diffused by these two decorative rotating bodies, so that it diffuses strongly in front of the colored light transmitting plate 88. As visible light. In particular, the decorative rotating body 581c has a shape that bulges outward, so that the diffusing function is strong, and the LED light L2 is greatly diffused.

  The LED light L3 passes through the colored light transmitting plate 88, but is only diffused by the diffusion function of the colored light transmitting plate 88, and is not diffused as strongly as L1 and L2.

  Thus, the colored translucent plate 88 does not appear to shine with uniform brightness, but is visually recognized with uneven brightness, and further, uneven brightness moves due to rotation of the decorative rotating body 581c and the like. . Since the decorative rotator and the like are not completely circular, a part of the light may or may not pass through the decorative rotator by rotation.

  For this reason, the colored translucent plate 88 is not only a change in hue based on a change in the color of the background color, but also has a moving brightness unevenness. It appears to emit light.

  In addition, due to the diffusion effect of the colored components included in the colored light transmitting plate 88, the entire colored light transmitting plate 88 appears to emit light even when a small amount of light is incident. Here, if the colored translucent plate 88 is simply given a diffusion effect, the diffusion effect can be obtained by providing a plurality of fine peaks and valleys by attaching edges to the front or back surface of the colored translucent plate 88. However, if it does so, the back 2nd movable accessory 550a will appear blurry, and clear visual recognition cannot be performed. Therefore, the colored translucent plate 88 is configured as a flat plate so that an effect member installed behind can be clearly seen. The colored translucent plate 88 appears to emit light in a hue different from the background color due to the coloring component, and the entire colored translucent plate 88 appears to emit light even when a small amount of light is incident due to the diffusion effect ( You can see the titles of gaming machines with a small amount of light).

  Next, an example of a game effect by the colored translucent plate 88 will be described. FIG. 128 is a front view of the periphery of the display device 41 and the colored light transmission plate 88 according to Modification 2 of the first embodiment. (A) shows a state where there is only one start-up memory, and (B) shows a state where a second start-up memory with a high expectation has occurred.

  In (A), the variable display game is being executed and the start memory M1 is generated, but since it is not the start memory to be prefetched, it is displayed in a normal manner. At this time, since the second movable accessory 550a does not emit light, the colored translucent plate 88 also does not emit light.

  (B) is a state in which the start-up memory M2 to be prefetched with high expectation is generated. Here, a cherry blossom pattern appears in the starting memory M2, and it is informed that the expectation degree of the starting memory M2 is high. In addition, the second movable accessory 550a and the third movable accessory 600a emit light in an arch shape at the timing when the cherry blossom pattern emerges in the start-up memory M2, and the colored translucent plate 88 also emits light. ing.

  Here, based on the relationship between the color of the pre-reading effect in the start memory M2 and the color seen through the colored translucent plate 88, the expected level of the start memory M2 can be notified. When both the memory M2 and the colored translucent plate 88 emit light in orange, it is possible to produce an effect of notifying that the degree of expectation is very high.

  In addition, it is possible to notify the prefetching of the prefetching effect by the emission color of the colored translucent plate 88. Specifically, for example, before the start memory M2 emits orange light, the second movable accessory 550a emits yellow light, and the colored light transmitting plate 88 appears to emit orange light. In such an effect, the colored translucent plate 88 notifies the start memory M2 that the start memory M2 has a very high degree of expectation prior to the pre-read effect for the start memory M2, and further increases the degree of attention to the upper effect unit 40c. be able to.

  Further, when a cherry blossom pattern is displayed in the start-up memory M <b> 2, only the decorative rotating body 581 c disposed on the back surface of the colored light transmitting plate 88 may emit light and be visible through the colored light transmitting plate 88. The decoration rotating body 581c arranged on the back surface of the colored translucent plate 88 emits light, whereby the pre-rotation effect in the start memory and the decoration rotation which is a decorative member on which the same cherry blossom pattern as the cherry blossom displayed in the start memory is applied. The body 351 can be interlocked, and the fun of the game is improved by the synergistic effect of the look-ahead effect on the start memory and the light emission effect of the movable accessory (decorative rotating body 351).

  In addition, as a notification mode of the pre-reading effect in the start memory, there are a mode in which the petal of cherry blossoms in the start memory display and a mode in which the petal of cherry blossoms around the start memory display. Inform.

[Effect of Modification 2 of First Embodiment]
Thus, in the modification 2 of 1st Embodiment, since the colored translucent board 88 changes with the hues different from the change of a background color, the contrast with surrounding colors and the change of hue become a novel effect, Improve the fun of gaming.

  Further, the colored translucent plate 88 is accompanied by unevenness of brightness with movement in addition to the change of the hue based on the change of the color of the background color. Therefore, the colored translucent plate 88 has a complicated color and pattern including marble tone and gradation. It appears to emit light.

  Further, since the colored translucent plate 88 has a filter effect, it has a function of reducing the intensity of light emitted from the second movable accessory 550a, and the player can be prevented from feeling dazzling in the front view. Moreover, since the light (for example, blue light of LED) that may adversely affect human eyes can be cut, it is possible to provide eye-friendly production light.

  Further, the colored light transmitting plate 88 is a flat plate and has a light diffusing effect due to the coloring component, so that the rear of the colored light transmitting plate 88 can be clearly seen, and even a small amount of light is colored. Since the entire light-transmitting plate 88 appears to emit light, the title of the gaming machine can be fully recognized.

  In addition, the colored translucent plate 88 can provide an effect of notifying the high degree of expectation by the hue of the colored translucent plate 88 prior to the pre-reading effect for the start-up memory display or the like. The fun of gaming can be enhanced.

  Moreover, since the colored translucent plate 88 is obtained by coloring the translucent plate, the colored translucent plate 88 can be installed easily and at low cost, and becomes a cost-effective production member.

[One aspect of the present invention]
The following inventions can be cited as inventions related to the production of colors different from the background color by the colored translucent plate 88 described so far.

  (20) In a gaming machine capable of executing a game on the basis of establishment of a predetermined start condition, a first translucent member having translucency and provided in front of the first translucent member are colored. And a light emitting source provided behind the first light transmitting member, wherein the first light transmitting member receives the first light transmitting member by the light from the light emitting source. Decorated in one decoration mode, the second translucent member is decorated in a second decoration mode different from the first decoration mode by light from the light emitting source via the first translucent member. A gaming machine characterized by that.

  (21) The first translucent member is operable in accordance with the progress of the game, and the operation can be visually recognized through the second translucent member (20 ) Gaming machine described in.

  In the inventions described in (20) to (21) above, the “first translucent member” is, for example, the second movable accessory 550a. Further, the “colored second translucent member” is, for example, a colored translucent plate 88. The “light source” is, for example, an LED provided on the LED substrate 568.

  Further, the “first decoration mode” is a decoration mode that emits light with the same hue as the LED light. The “second decoration mode” is a decoration mode that emits light with a hue different from the background color (the light emission color of the first light-transmissive member).

(Modification 3 of the first embodiment)
In the modification 2 of 1st Embodiment, the colored translucent board 88 which is the translucent member colored on the front surface of the top production | presentation unit 40c was provided. On the other hand, in the modification 3 of 1st Embodiment, it is the translucent member colored on the front surface of the top production unit 40c, Comprising: The frequency change member 89 to which the fluorescent agent was added is provided.

  The frequency changing member 89 changes the wavelength of light. The translucent member to which the fluorescent agent is added has a function of extending the wavelength, and when violet light is emitted from the rear, the translucent member appears to be blue having a longer wavelength than purple. It is possible. It is known that the degree of wavelength change can be adjusted by the concentration of the fluorescent agent.

  FIG. 129 is a front view of a game board according to Modification 3 of the first embodiment. 2 and 125 are different in that a frequency changing member 89 is provided on the front surface of the upper effect unit 40c. In the present modification, a frequency changing member 89 is provided in the upper effect unit 40c in place of the colored translucent plate 88.

  The frequency changing member 89 has a function of increasing the wavelength of light received from the rear. Specifically, when the purple LED light is received, the frequency changing member 89 looks indigo. Further, when the blue LED light is received, the frequency changing member 89 looks blue. When receiving the blue LED light, the frequency changing member 89 looks green. Further, when receiving the green LED light, the frequency changing member 89 looks yellow. In addition, when the yellow LED light is received, the frequency changing member 89 looks orange. Further, when receiving the orange LED light, the frequency changing member 89 looks red. In addition, when the red LED light is received, the frequency changing member 89 looks dark red (garnet).

  Therefore, when the second movable accessory 550a and the third movable accessory 600a emit light in the order of purple, indigo, blue, green, yellow, orange, red, the frequency changing member 89 is indigo, blue, green, yellow, orange, The light appears to be emitted in the order of red and dark red. That is, the frequency changing member 89 appears to emit seven colors earlier than the background color.

  In the colored translucent plate 88 in the case where the coloring component is red, the colored translucent plate 88 appeared to emit light with a hue centered on the red color, even if the background color changed to 7 colors, but the frequency changed. Since the member 89 can emit light in seven colors, it can be decorated with a greater change in hue than the colored translucent plate 88.

[Effect of Modification 3 of First Embodiment]
As described above, in the third modification of the first embodiment, since the frequency changing member 89 that increases the wavelength of light from the rear is provided, the light is emitted in a color having a longer wavelength than the emission color of the second movable accessory 550a. The contrast between the second movable accessory 550a and the upper effect unit 40c can be made to stand out.

  In addition, when the second movable accessory 550a changes the emission color in order from light having a short wavelength to light having a long wavelength, the frequency changing member 89 is light having a short wavelength prior to the second movable accessory 550a. Since the light changes in order from light having a longer wavelength to light, the game is more interesting.

  Further, since the frequency changing member 89 is obtained by coloring a light transmitting plate and adding a fluorescent agent, the frequency changing member 89 can be installed easily and at low cost and becomes a cost-effective production member.

[One aspect of the present invention]
The following inventions can be cited as inventions related to effects by color development different from the background color by the frequency changing member 89 described so far.

(22) In a gaming machine capable of executing a game based on establishment of a predetermined start condition, a light-transmitting first light-transmitting member, a light transmitting member provided in front of the first light-transmitting member, A second translucent member that increases the wavelength of the light source, and a light source provided behind the first translucent member, the first translucent member from the light source The second decorative member is decorated with light in a first decorative manner, and the second light transmissive member is different from the first decorative member with a light from the light emitting source via the first light transmissive member. A gaming machine characterized by being decorated.

  In the invention described in (22) above, the “first translucent member” is, for example, the second movable accessory 550a. The “second translucent member that lengthens the wavelength of light” is, for example, the frequency changing member 98. The “light source” is, for example, an LED provided on the LED substrate 568.

  Further, the “first decoration mode” is a decoration mode that emits light with the same hue as the LED light. The “second decoration mode” is a decoration mode that emits light with a hue different from the background color (decoration mode of the first translucent member) by the action of the fluorescent agent.

(Modification 4 of the first embodiment)
In the modified example 4 of the first embodiment, a structural feature is provided in the special variation winning device 39 in which a game ball with a strong down-flowing force collides so that the game ball can be won vigorously when the opening / closing member 39c is in an open state. When the opening and closing member 39c is in the closed state, the downward force of the game ball is weakened, and the game ball can be effectively guided to the game area 32 in which the normal gate (passage portion) 34 is disposed. did.

  FIG. 130 is an enlarged front view of the right center portion of the game board 30 in the closed state of the special variation winning device 39 of the fourth modification of the first embodiment, and FIG. 131 is a special front of the fourth modification of the first embodiment. FIG. 3 is an enlarged front view of a right center portion of the game board 30 in a state where the variable winning device 39 is open. FIG. 132 is an enlarged front view of the opening / closing member 39c excluding the cherry blossom decoration of the fourth modification of the first embodiment.

  Of the game balls that are hit right (specially hit) with a strong launch force, the game balls that have not won the general winning opening 35 flow down the six-stage channel 40d. The six-stage flow channel 40d includes a first top portion 43a, a second top portion 43b, a third top portion 43c, a fourth top portion 43d, a fifth top portion 43e, and a sixth top portion 43f (bottommost) provided on the left and right continuous flow channel walls. Top part 43f), a bottom part formed between the first top part 43a and the third top part 43c, a bottom part formed between the second top part 43b and the fourth top part 43d, a third top part 43c and a fifth top part 43e. A meandering channel in which six meandering paths indicated by curved arrows in FIG. 130 are continuously formed by the bottom part formed between the bottom part and the bottom part formed between the fourth top part 43d and the sixth top part 43f. It is.

  All of these six meandering paths create a movement of the game ball in the lateral direction by the meandering flow path, so that the player can enjoy the movement of the game ball. Among these, the game ball in the vicinity of the sixth top portion 43f increases in the downward flow while flowing down the six-stage flow path 40d, and flows down with a strong downward flow toward the opening / closing member 39c facing the sixth top portion 43f. In addition, a plate-like decoration is provided in front of the curved portions on the right side and the left side of the six-stage channel 40d, and the game ball can flow down the back side of the decoration.

  The inlet of the six-stage flow path 40d is formed by the first inflow port formed by the left side surface of the general winning port 35 and the first top portion 43a, and the right side surface of the general winning port 35 and the second top portion 43b. There are two inlets with a second inlet. Thereafter, there is one flow path without branching, and the outlet of the six-stage flow path 40d is a region connecting the fifth top portion 43e and the sixth top portion 43f and is one outlet. The opening / closing member 39c is provided at a position facing the outlet of the six-stage flow path 40d with the length direction as the vertical direction (vertical direction).

  The six-stage flow path 40d is a flow path that allows the game ball to flow down in the horizontal direction, thereby increasing the flow time of the game ball and showing the player the movement in the horizontal direction. You can enjoy the situation (flowing aspect). Further, it is a flow path that makes it difficult to perform a so-called timing hitting method that hits only for the time during which the special winning opening is opened.

  When the opening / closing member 39c is in the closed state, the game ball that has flowed down the six-stage flow path 40d collides with the side surface of the opening / closing member 39c, and the game gate (passing portion) 34 or a game area further below. It flows down to 32 (downward flow path).

  When the opening / closing member 39c is in the open state, the game ball that has flowed down the six-stage flow path 40d can win the special variable winning device 39. At this time, a width larger than the diameter of the game ball is formed between the opening / closing member 39c (first corner portion 39u) and the sixth top portion 43f (the width W of the double-headed arrow in FIG. 131). A part of the game ball that has flowed down the step flow path 40d does not win the special fluctuation winning device 39, and flows down to the usual gate (passage part) 34 or the game area 32 below.

  Here, the structure of the opening and closing member 39c will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

  The opening / closing member 39c is a member having a certain depth and a blade cross-sectional shape that is irregular in front view. The side surface of the opening / closing member 39c is opposed to the two long sides, the one short side sandwiched between the two long sides, and the two long sides opposed to the one short side. One semicircular side. The opening / closing member 39c is set so that the semicircular side portion is a shaft portion and the length direction is the vertical direction (vertical direction), and the upper portion can be opened and closed. Note that the shape of each side portion is not limited to a straight line, but includes a bulge, a mountain, a depression, a curved surface, a plurality of slopes, a wave shape, and the like.

  The side surface of the opening / closing member 39c includes an upper side portion 39j, a lower side portion 39k, a right side portion 391, and a left side portion 39m. Among these, the right side portion 391 is composed of the first oblique side portion (flow channel side short side portion, short side portion) 39o and the second oblique side portion (flow channel side long side portion, long side) with the second corner portion (connection portion) 39v as a watershed. Part) 39p. The left side portion 39m includes a third oblique side portion 39q and a fourth oblique side portion 39r having a fourth corner portion 39x as a watershed, and a fifth oblique side portion 39s and a sixth oblique side portion 39t having a fifth corner portion 39y as a watershed. Including. The lower side portion 39k is an arc-shaped side portion when viewed from the front. The right side portion 39l and the left side portion 39m correspond to the two opposing long side portions, and the upper side portion 39j corresponds to one short side portion sandwiched between the two long side portions. In addition, the arc-shaped lower side portion 39k corresponds to a semicircular side portion that is sandwiched between the two long side portions and faces the one short side portion.

  The flow path side (right side, abdomen side) of the lower side portion 39k is connected to the second oblique side portion (long side portion) 39p, and the big winning opening side (left side, back side) of the lower side portion 39k is Connected to the sixth hypotenuse 39t.

  The opening / closing member 39c includes five corners including a first corner 39u, a second corner (channel side corner) 39v, a third corner 39w, a fourth corner 39x, and a fifth corner 39y, And one hollow part 39z is formed. The recessed portion 39z is formed on the side of the big prize opening (back side) of the opening / closing member 39c and serves as a connection portion between the fourth oblique side portion 39r and the fifth oblique side portion 39s. Each of the five corners has an acute angle (0 to θ to 90 °) or an obtuse angle (90 to θ to 180 °), and the inner angle of the recessed portion 39z is a dominant angle (180 ° to θ to 360 °). It is.

  The upper side portion 39j between the first corner portion 39u and the third corner portion 39w and the first oblique side portion (short side portion) 39o between the first corner portion 39u and the second corner portion 39v are substantially linear. Formed. When the open / close member 39c is opened, the upper side portion 39j forms a funnel-shaped flow path with the sixth top portion 43f (see FIG. 131), and the short side portion (first oblique side portion) 39o opens the open / close member 39c. At that time, an eight-letter-shaped (end-spanning) flow path is formed between the sixth top 43f and the flow path wall inclined downward toward the right side (see FIG. 131).

  The third oblique side portion 39q, the fourth oblique side portion 39r, the fifth oblique side portion 39s, and the sixth oblique side portion 39t constituting the left side portion 39m are formed in a substantially straight line, and the fourth oblique side portion 39r and the fifth oblique side portion 39s. Both are formed in a downward slope toward the recess 39z. When the opening / closing member 39c is opened, the third oblique side portion 39s and the fourth oblique side portion 39r are inclined to the lower left, so that they collide with the flow path wall 39g (see FIG. 131) below the fifth top portion 39e and win a big prize. Guide the game balls that flow downward from the mouth into the prize winning mouth. In particular, the fourth oblique side portion 39r has a large inclination angle to the lower left, and therefore has a high guiding effect into the special winning opening. Further, since the fourth hypotenuse part 39r and the fifth hypotenuse part 39s form a depression, the game ball that flows down directly from the six-stage flow path 40d to the upper part of the opening / closing member 39c without contacting the flow path wall 39g Lead to.

  When the opening / closing member 39c is in the closed state, the third corner portion 39w comes into contact with the center case (game production component) 40 and closes the special winning opening of the special variable winning device 39.

  The long side portion (second oblique side portion) 39p is formed with a gently concave recess, and the shape of the concave surface weakens the downward flow force of the game ball that collides with the open / close member 39c in the closed state. The flow direction of the game ball is changed depending on the shape, and the game ball is guided to the general-purpose gate (passage portion) 34 disposed below the long side portion 39p.

  The opening / closing member 39c is provided with a plate-like cherry blossom decoration on the front surface (the player side surface). Of the decoration, a portion of the opening / closing member 39c protruding from the main body collides with a game ball. The long side portion (second oblique side portion) 39p on the back side of the attached portion receives the downward force of the game ball from the front.

  Further, since the long side portion (second oblique side portion) 39p is a portion where a game ball having a strong downflow force that has flowed down the six-stage flow path 40d collides, even if an impact absorbing material such as rubber or silicon is stuck together. It is also possible to provide an uneven portion that reduces the power of the game ball.

  Next, the decorative movable member 639 will be described with reference to FIGS. 130 and 131.

  The decorative movable member 639 is an effect member that operates in conjunction with the opening / closing member 39c, and is a member that allows the player to recognize the opening of the big prize opening without visually recognizing the big prize opening. The decorative movable member 639 shown in FIG. 130 is in a state at the initial position (first position), and is substantially upright in contact with the center case 40.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 131, in response to the movement of the opening / closing member 39c other than the short opening (conversion operation to the open state), the decorative movable member 639 is the operation position (first position) on the front center side of the display device 41. 2 position). That is, the initial position of the decorable member 639 is a position that overlaps the display area near the edge of the display device 41. The operating position is the front center side of the display device 41.

  The rotating direction of the decorative movable member 639 to the operating position is counterclockwise opposite to the rotating direction of the opening / closing member 39c. When the vertical line V1 provided for convenience in FIGS. 130 and 131 is used as the center line, the decorative movable member 639 is guided by the guide groove 639g, and the opening / closing member 39c is guided by the guide groove 39g, and rotates symmetrically. It is possible to move. At this time, the angle between the decorative movable member 639 and the opening / closing member 39c is about 90 °. The decorative movable member 639 and the opening / closing member 39c may be provided so that the center line between the decorative movable member 639 and the opening / closing member 39c corresponds to the end of the display device 41.

  Similarly to the opening / closing member 39c, the decoration movable member 639 is a mechanism that rotates about the lower portion as a shaft portion. The operation of the opening / closing member 39c is controlled by the game control device 100, whereas the decoration movable member 639 produces an effect. The operation is controlled by the control device 300.

  The decorative movable member 639 rotates so as to be synchronized with the rotational operation of the opening / closing member 39c. However, the decorative movable member 639 operates under a predetermined condition such as a small hit or a short opening (opening time less than 1 second). It does not rotate to the position (that is, it does not synchronize with the rotation operation of the opening / closing member 39c). Such control is executed based on the determination (B1504 in FIG. 114) as to whether or not the MODE portion of the command received by the effect control device 300 is round.

  Both the decorative movable member 639 and the opening / closing member 39c may be controlled by the game control device 100. In addition, both the decorative movable member 639 and the opening / closing member 39c may be operated by a single drive source (for example, a special prize opening solenoid 39b).

  The decorative movable member 639 is a member located on the center side of the display device 41 with respect to the special variation winning device 39. Therefore, the player can recognize that the opening / closing member 39c is in the open state by moving the decorative movable member 639 to the operating position in front of the display device 41 while viewing the display device 41. Further, when the decorative movable member 639 is in the initial position, the player can recognize that the opening / closing member 39c is in a closed state or a short open state.

  In other words, the decorative movable member 639 allows the player to recognize the content of the effect and the open state of the opening / closing member 39c at the same time, even when visually recognizing the effect displayed on the display screen. Therefore, it is possible to minimize the movement of the player's line of sight in the special game state, and effectively increase the burden on the player and the immersion in the special game state.

  In addition, since the drive source of the decorative movable member 639 and the drive source of the opening / closing member 39 (large winning opening solenoid 39b) are provided close to or adjacent to each other, the decorative movable member 639 does not operate synchronously during short opening. By doing so, it is possible to avoid troubles and failures due to heat generation of the two drive sources.

  Next, the positional relationship of the opening / closing member 39c will be described. FIG. 133A is an enlarged front view of the right center portion of the game board 30 when the special variation winning apparatus 39 according to the fourth modification of the first embodiment is closed. FIG. 133B is an enlarged front view of the right center portion of the game board 30 when the special variation winning device 39 according to the fourth modification of the first embodiment is in the open state.

  In FIG. 133A, the horizontal line H10 is a line indicating the height of the upper end of the decorative movable member 639 when the decorative movable member 639 is in the initial position (first position), and the horizontal line H20 is when the opening / closing member 39c is in the closed state. It is a line which shows the height of the 2nd corner | angular part 39v (flow-path side corner | angular part 39v). The horizontal line H30 is a line indicating the height of the sixth top portion 43f, and the horizontal line H40 is a line indicating the height of the shaft portion of the opening / closing member 39c. The decorative movable member 639 may be provided so that the height of the upper end of the decorative movable member 639 in the initial position corresponds to the center line with respect to the horizontal direction of the display device 41. In this case, the horizontal line H10 passes through the center of the display device 41 in the vertical direction. Further, the decorative movable member 639 may be provided so that the height of the upper end of the decorative movable member 639 in the initial position corresponds to the upper end portion of the display device 41. In this case, the upper side of the display device 41 and the horizontal line H10 overlap.

  In FIG. 133A, a broken-line arrow h1 whose both ends are black indicates the difference from the height of the sixth top 43f with reference to the height of the upper end of the decorative movable member 639 at the initial position, and both ends are black A solid line arrow h2 indicates a difference from the height of the second corner portion 39v of the opening / closing member 39 in the closed state with reference to the height of the upper end of the decorative movable member 639 in the initial position. Also, a broken-line arrow h3 that is white at both ends indicates a difference from the height of the sixth top portion 43f on the basis of the height of the rotation shaft of the opening and closing member 39, and a solid-line arrow h4 that is white at both ends is The difference from the height of the second corner portion 39v of the open / close member 39 in the closed state is shown with reference to the height of the rotation shaft of the open / close member 39.

  As shown in FIG. 133A, when the opening / closing member 39c is in the closed state, the second corner portion 39v faces the sixth top portion 43f, and the height (H20) of the second corner portion 39v is equal to that of the sixth top portion 43f. The position is higher than the height (H30).

  Further, regarding the height relationship between the second corner portion 39v and the sixth top portion 43f when the opening and closing member 39 is in the closed state, the height (H10) of the upper end of the decorative movable member 639 at the initial position is used as a reference. The arrow h1 is longer than the arrow h2. That is, the upper end of the decorative movable member 639 in the initial position is larger than the difference (h2) between the height of the upper end of the decorative movable member 639 in the initial position and the height of the second corner 39v when the opening / closing member 39 is closed. The relationship between the height, the height of the sixth apex 43f, and the difference (h1) is larger (h1> h2).

  Further, regarding the height relationship between the second corner portion 39v and the sixth top portion 43f when the opening / closing member 39 is in the closed state, the height hH40 of the opening / closing member 39 is used as a reference, and the arrow h4 It is illustrated that the length of the arrow h3 is shorter than that. That is, the height of the rotation shaft of the opening / closing member 39 and the sixth top portion 43f are larger than the difference (h4) between the height of the rotation shaft of the opening / closing member 39 and the height of the second corner portion 39v when the opening / closing member 39 is open. The difference (h3) from the height of h is smaller (h3 <h4).

  Next, referring to FIG. 133B, the height of the second corner portion 39v and the sixth top portion 43f is compared between the case where the opening / closing member 39 and the decorative movable member 639 are in the initial position and the case where they are in the operating position. The relationship will be described. The heights indicated by horizontal line H10, horizontal line H20, horizontal line H30, horizontal line H40, and the differences indicated by arrow h1, arrow h2, arrow h3, and arrow h4 in FIG. 133B are the same as in FIG. 133A.

  In FIG. 133B, the horizontal line H11 is a line indicating the height of the upper end of the decorative movable member 639 when the decorative movable member 639 is in the operating position (second position), and the horizontal line H21 is when the opening / closing member 39c is in the open state. It is a line which shows the height of the 2nd corner | angular part 39v (flow-path side corner | angular part 39v).

  Also, a broken-line arrow h1 ′ whose both ends are black indicates the difference from the height of the sixth top portion 43f with reference to the height of the upper end of the decorative movable member 639 in the operating position, and both ends are indicated by solid black lines. An arrow h2 ′ indicates a difference from the height of the second corner portion 39v of the open / close member 39 in the open state with reference to the height of the upper end of the decorative movable member 639 in the operating position. Also, a solid line arrow h4 'with white ends on both ends indicates a difference from the height of the second corner portion 39v of the open / close member 39 in the open state with reference to the height of the rotation shaft of the open / close member 39.

  As illustrated in FIG. 133B, when the opening / closing member 39c is in the open state, the height (H21) of the second corner portion 39v is lower than the height (H30) of the sixth top portion 43f.

  Further, regarding the height relationship between the second corner portion 39v and the sixth top portion 43f when the opening / closing member 39 is in the open state, the height (H11) of the upper end of the decorative movable member 639 at the operating position is used as a reference. The arrow h1 'is shorter than the arrow h2'. That is, the upper end of the decorative movable member 639 in the operating position is greater than the difference (h2 ′) between the height of the upper end of the decorative movable member 639 in the operating position and the height of the second corner 39v when the opening / closing member 39 is open. And the difference between the height of the sixth apex 43f and the difference (h1 ′) are smaller (h1 ′ <h2 ′).

  When the magnitude relationship (h1 '<h2') is compared with the relationship (h1> h2) described in FIG. 133A, the magnitude relationship is reversed. That is, the difference between the height of the second corner portion 39v and the height of the sixth top portion 43f on the basis of the height of the upper end of the decorative movable member 639 when the opening / closing member 39 and the decorative movable member 639 are in the initial position. The difference relationship (h1> h2) and the height of the second corner portion 39v with reference to the height of the upper end of the decorative movable member 639 when the opening / closing member 39 and the decorative movable member 639 are in the operating position. The relationship between the difference and the height of the sixth apex 43f (h1 ′ <h2 ′) is opposite.

  Since the maximum rotation angles of the opening / closing member 39 and the decorative movable member 639 are the same, h2 ′ and h2 have the same length, but the sixth top 43f is a fixed part, so h1 ′ is Shorter than h1. When the opening / closing member 39 and the decorative movable member 639 are rotated to the operating position, there is no change in the difference between the height of the upper end of the decorative movable member 639 and the second corner portion 39v (h2 → h2 ′). Thus, since the difference between the height of the upper end of the decorative movable member 639 and the height of the sixth top 43f is greatly reduced (h1 → h1 ′), an effect of visually making it easier to enter the big prize opening is produced. .

  When the opening / closing member 39 and the decorative movable member 639 are rotated to the operating position, the height of the upper end of the decorative movable member 639 and the height of the sixth top portion 43f satisfy h1 ′ <h1 with respect to h2 ′ = h2. In addition to the reduction of the difference, the player's line of sight is guided to the big prize opening by reversing the height difference from h1> h2 to h1 ′ <h2 ′.

  With respect to the height relationship between the second corner portion 39v and the sixth apex portion 43f when the opening / closing member 39 is in the open state, the height of the rotation shaft of the opening / closing member 39 (H40) is used as a reference, from the arrow h4 ′. It is also shown that the length of the arrow h3 is long. That is, the height of the rotation shaft of the opening / closing member 39 and the sixth top portion are different from the difference (h4 ′) between the height of the rotation shaft of the opening / closing member 39 and the height of the second corner portion 39v when the opening / closing member 39 is open. The difference (h3) from the height of 43f is larger (h3> h4 ′).

  When the magnitude relationship (h3> h4 ′) is compared with the relationship (h3 <h4) described in FIG. 133A, the magnitude relationship is reversed. That is, the difference between the height of the second corner portion 39v and the height of the sixth top portion 43f on the basis of the height of the rotation shaft of the opening / closing member 39 when the opening / closing member 39 and the decorative movable member 639 are in the initial position. And the height of the second corner portion 39v with respect to the relationship of the difference (h3 <h4) and the height of the rotation shaft of the opening / closing member 39 when the opening / closing member 39 and the decorative movable member 639 are in the operating position. And the difference (h3> h4 ′) between the difference and the height of the sixth apex 43f is opposite.

  When the opening / closing member 39 and the decorative movable member 639 are turned to the operating position, the difference (h3) between the height of the turning shaft of the opening / closing member 39 and the height of the sixth top 43f is not changed. Since the difference between the height of the pivot shaft of the opening / closing member 39 and the height of the second corner 39v of the opening / closing member 39 is greatly reduced (h4 → h4 ′), it is easy to visually enter the big prize opening. The effect that you feel is produced.

  Further, when the opening / closing member 39 and the decorative movable member 639 rotate to the operating position, there is no change in h3, and the difference in height between the rotation axis of the opening / closing member 39 and the second corner portion 39v from h4 to h4 ′. In addition to the large decrease, the player's line of sight is guided to the big prize opening by reversing the height difference from h3 <h4 to h3> h4 ′.

  Here, the open / close member 39c when in the closed state guides a game ball having a strong downward force that collides from the lateral direction to the substantially downward direction by the long side portion 39p (guides to the general-purpose gate 34). This is a benefit for the player in a specific gaming state. Therefore, by positioning the channel side corner portion 39v that is one end of the long side portion 39p at a position higher than the sixth top portion 43f that forms the final corner of the six-stage channel 40d, the sixth-stage channel 40d flows down. The game ball can be effectively guided to the vicinity of the usual gate (passing part) 34. In other words, as many game balls as possible flowing down the six-stage flow path 40d can be brought into contact with the long side portion 39p as much as possible and guided to the vicinity of the usual gate (passage portion) 34.

  On the other hand, when the opening / closing member 39c is arranged at a high position so that the second corner portion (connecting portion) 39v is as high as possible, the big prize opening is the lower limit portion of the outlet of the six-stage channel 40d (that is, the first 6 is higher than the top portion 43f), the percentage of game balls to be awarded to the big prize opening when the opening and closing member 39c is opened is reduced, which causes a decrease in the interest of the game. If the opening angle of the opening / closing member 39c is increased in order to avoid the situation, it is difficult to perform a short hit or short opening operation with a short opening time.

  Therefore, the opening amount (the amount of rotation of the opening / closing member 39c) that allows the short opening operation to be executed smoothly is an opening angle at which the winning amount to the big winning opening is appropriate, and when the opening / closing member 39c is closed, By effectively guiding the game ball flowing down from the lower side effectively, the second corner portion 39v, which is the top of the flow channel side provided in the opening / closing member 39c, is flowed as a balance point that can enhance the fun of the game as much as possible. In order to solve the problems of the present application, an invention has been devised in which the height is higher than the sixth top portion (lowermost top portion) 43f provided at the lowermost portion.

  Since the long side portion 39p is formed from the vicinity of the rotation axis of the opening / closing member 39c to the second corner portion (connection portion) 39v, the long side portion 39p is provided at the lowermost portion of the six-stage flow path 40d as the balance point. It is also possible to specify that the opening / closing member 39c is provided so that the top 6f 43f is located at a height between the connecting portion 39v of the opening / closing member 39c in the closed state and the rotation shaft of the opening / closing member 39c. .

  Further, since the long side portion 39p can be formed to the vicinity of the uppermost portion of the opening / closing member 39c (near the upper side portion 39j) without providing the connecting portion 39v, the above-mentioned balance point is as follows when the opening / closing member 39c is closed. The uppermost portion of the opening / closing member 39c is higher than the lower limit portion (that is, the sixth top portion 43f) of the outlet of the six-stage channel 40d, and when the opening / closing member 39c is opened, the uppermost portion of the opening / closing member 39c is It is also possible to specify that it is arranged so as to be lower than the lower limit portion (that is, the sixth top portion 43f) of the outlet (see FIGS. 130 and 131).

[Effect of Modification 4 of First Embodiment]
As described above, in the fourth modification of the first embodiment, a plurality of corners (meandering paths) meandering greatly are provided to greatly flow down in the lateral direction, thereby allowing the player to enjoy the movement of the game ball (amusement of the game) In addition, the game ball can be guided to the general gate (passing portion) 34 in the substantially downward direction by the special variation winning device 39 in the closed state at the exit of the meandering path.

  In particular, since the connection portion 39v provided on the flow path side of the special variable prize winning device 39 is located at a position higher than the sixth top portion 43f provided at the lowermost part of the meandering path, the length extending downward from the connection portion 39v. Many game balls can collide with the side portion 39p, and the game balls flowing down from the lateral direction can be effectively guided in the vertical direction (downward flow path).

[One aspect of the present invention]
The following invention can be cited as an invention for effectively guiding the game ball flowing down from the horizontal direction by flowing down the meandering path described so far in the vertical direction by means of the special variation winning device.

  (23) In a gaming machine provided with a flow path through which a game ball can flow down, the game machine includes a variable winning device having an open / close member that can be converted into an open state and a closed state, and one side surface of the open / close member facing the flow path side is A long side portion, a short side portion connected to the long side portion, and a connection portion disposed between the long side portion and the short side portion, and the flow path is a game ball Characterized in that it is configured by a flow path wall that can be guided to the downstream side, and a projecting portion having a top portion on which a game ball can abut on the tip, and the top portion is provided at a position lower than the connection portion. To play.

  (24) A passing portion through which a game ball can pass is provided on the downstream side of the variable prize apparatus, and the long side portion is formed with a curved surface that is recessed toward the passing portion. The gaming machine according to (23).

  In the inventions described in (23) to (24) above, the “variable winning device” corresponds to, for example, the normal variable winning device 37 or the special variable winning device 39. The “long side portion” corresponds to, for example, the second oblique side portion (flow channel side long side portion, long side portion) 39p. The “short side portion” corresponds to, for example, the first oblique side portion (flow channel side short side portion, short side portion) 39o. The “connection portion” corresponds to, for example, the second corner portion (connection portion) 39v. Further, the “top” corresponds to, for example, the sixth top 43f. The “passing part” corresponds to the usual gate (passing part) 34.

  (25) In a gaming machine capable of imparting a game value to a player based on a game result, the game control means for controlling the execution of the game, and an opening / closing member that can be converted into an open state and a closed state, The variable winning device controlled by the game control means, the effect control means for controlling the effect of the game, and movable between the first position and the second position, and controlled by the effect control means. A decorative movable member, and the decorative movable member moves from the first position to the second position when the opening / closing member of the variable prize apparatus changes from the closed state to the open position, and the variable prize apparatus. When the opening / closing member is changed from the open state to the closed state, the game machine moves from the second position to the first position.

  (26) Under the predetermined condition, the decorative movable member does not move from the first position to the second position even when the opening / closing member of the variable winning device changes from the closed state to the open state. The gaming machine according to (25).

  In the inventions described in (25) to (26) above, the “game control means” corresponds to the game control device 100, for example. Further, the “production control means” corresponds to, for example, the production control device 300. The “decorative movable member” corresponds to the decorative movable member 639, for example. The “first position” corresponds to, for example, an initial position. The “second position” corresponds to, for example, an operation position. The “predetermined condition” corresponds to, for example, short opening at the time of a small hit.

(Modification 5 of the first embodiment)
In the first embodiment, the rotational directions of the decorative rotating bodies of the second movable accessory 550a and the third movable accessory 600a are synchronized because they rotate in the same direction (CW or CCW) in all the decorative rotating bodies. It was. On the other hand, in the fifth modification of the first embodiment, in order to attract the player's attention, some decorations are made different in rotation mode from some decoration rotation bodies. The movement of the rotating body is not synchronized with the entire movement of the second movable combination 550a and the third movable combination 600a.

  FIG. 134 is an exploded perspective view of the third movable accessory unit 600 of Modification 5 of the first embodiment. FIG. 135 is a front view of the game board 30 according to Modification 5 of the first embodiment. FIG. 136 is a perspective view of a drive system of a decorative rotator 635a as another example of the fifth modification of the first embodiment. FIG. 137 is a front view of a game board 30 of another example of the fifth modification of the first embodiment.

  In comparison with FIG. 12, in FIG. 134, the intermediate gear 612 that meshes with the work gear 611 that transmits power to the decorative rotating body 635 a is removed in order not to synchronize the rotation direction of the decorative rotating body 635 a with other decorative rotating bodies. The work gear 611 directly meshes with the main driving gear 608.

  For this reason, as shown in FIG. 135, while the rotation decorative body group (plural effect members) of the third movable accessory 600a is rotated clockwise by the driving of the motor 607 that is one drive source, the third Only the decorative rotator 635a (second effect member) that is a part of the movable accessory 600a rotates counterclockwise.

  Only the decoration rotator 635a (second effect member) rotates in the reverse direction without synchronizing with the other decoration rotators (first effect member) of the third movable accessory 600a, so that the player can rotate the decoration rotator 635a. Attract attention. Since the decoration rotator 635a is located in the vicinity of the upper right display area 263, the player's line of sight is displayed on the upper right display area 263, which is an area adjacent to the decoration rotator 635a. To the display indicating how to hit the game ball, it is possible to make the player recognize that it is the right hit timing.

  12 is changed to a work gear 611b and an intermediate gear 612b shown in FIG. 136 by changing the work gear 611 that transmits power to the decorative rotating body 635a and the intermediate gear 612 that transmits power to the work gear 611. The body 635a is operated so as to be synchronized with other decorative rotating bodies, or is not synchronized (while other decorative rotating bodies rotate continuously, some decorative rotating bodies do not rotate continuously, It can be operated to repeat the stop).

  The work gear 611b is a gear that is thinner than the work gear 611, and the diameter of the gear and the number of gears are the same as those of the work gear 611. On the other hand, the intermediate gear 612b is thicker than the intermediate gear 612, and the teeth are arranged in two stages. In the first stage, teeth are arranged on the entire circumference and meshed with the main driving gear 608. In the other stage (second stage), teeth are arranged on a half circumference and meshed with the work gear 611b.

  With this structure, when the intermediate gear 612b rotates once, the second stage gear of the intermediate gear 612b transmits the driving force to the work gear 611b only, and the remaining half of the second gear has teeth. Therefore, the work gear 611b is idled without meshing with the work gear 611b. Therefore, while the other work gear 611 rotates continuously, the work gear 611b repeatedly rotates or stops rotating (or continues to rotate gently due to inertial force), and the decorative rotating body 635a It is possible to accompany movements that do not synchronize with the decorative rotating body (movements with the same rotation direction but different rotation speeds).

  As another aspect of the movement in which a part of the decorative rotator does not synchronize (the movement in which the rotation direction is the same, but the rotational speed is different), in FIG. 137, the inner decorative rotator close to the display device 41 and the outer decorative The difference in rotational speed with the rotating body is indicated by the difference in the length of the arrows. The difference in rotational speed is realized, for example, by making the diameters of the work gear and the intermediate gear for driving the inner decorative rotating body different from those of the work gear and the intermediate gear for driving the outer decorative rotating body.

  With this configuration, the inner decoration rotator rotates more slowly than the outer decoration rotator, so that the player's attention can be directed to display information near the inner decoration rotator and displayed in the upper left display area 262. The player's line of sight can also be guided to the displayed “77 more times”.

  It should be noted that a right-handed or left-handed direction instruction, 4th pattern, a numerical display of the number of holds, a specific image such as a mode name or a stage name may be used as display information near the inner decorative rotating body, and the vicinity of the display device 41 Only the decorative rotating body of the player rotates slowly so that the player's line of sight is guided to these specific displays.

  In this way, by changing the diameters of the work gear 611 and the intermediate gear 612, or by changing the number of teeth and the diameter of the second stage of the intermediate gear 612b on which two stages of teeth are arranged, a specific decoration is obtained. It is possible to realize an operation that does not synchronize with the rotating body (movement that has the same rotational direction as the other decorative rotating bodies but has a different rotational speed). In particular, the diameter and the number of teeth of the intermediate gear 612 or the intermediate gear 612b are determined based on the asynchronous operation mode, and the work gear 611 / intermediate gear 612 or the work gear 611b / intermediate in the gear box are determined. The arrangement of the gear 612b (further, the support hole 603 and the boss 604) in the front-rear direction (for example, the thickness of the gear) and the left-right direction is appropriately changed.

  Up to this point, the decorative rotating body has been taken up as the same kind of effect member, and the combination of the rotation direction and the rotation speed has been described as the operation mode, but as the effect member of the same type, for example, each effect member by a cam provided in a power transmission mechanism An example of this is a caclata that moves up and down.

  Specifically, the lower end of the support shaft that supports the character is in contact with the cam, and the cam has a configuration in which, for example, the work gear 611 and the shaft portion are connected. The front of the cam is covered and decorated so that the player cannot see the cam directly. The character may be visible only when the character is lifted by the cam, or the character may always be visible. At this time, it is possible to set the asynchronous motion mode of the character according to the difference in the shape of the cam, such as a character that moves up and down in small increments, a character with a small amount of up and down, and a character that moves up and down slightly when it moves up and down.

  In other words, the synchronized movement is the movement mode in which the movement direction and the movement speed are aligned with the other production members, and the movement that is not synchronized (asynchronous movement, movement in which the movement mode is different) is the movement direction and movement. One of the speeds is different from other production members.

  Then, attracting the player's attention by causing some of the same type of production members to move asynchronously is not only the transmission of display information, It can also be used to notify the game mode (including implicit notification), and can improve the interest of the game as a special effect.

[Effect of Modification 5 of First Embodiment]
As described above, among the same type of effect members driven by one drive source, only some effect members are operated without being synchronized, thereby attracting the player's attention to the some effect members. Can do. Therefore, it is possible to guide the player's line of sight to display information and the like around the part of the production members.

  Further, among the same type of effect members driven by one drive source, some of the effect members are operated in synchronization with other same type of effect members, and asynchronous not synchronized with other same type of effect members. Since it is possible to operate in a manner, it is possible to attract the player's attention more strongly at the timing at which some effect members operate in an asynchronous manner. Therefore, it is possible to guide the player's line of sight to display information and the like around the part of the effect members, and to give a special feeling about operating in an asynchronous manner, thereby improving the interest of the game.

[One aspect of the present invention]
The following inventions can be cited as inventions related to the synchronous operation and asynchronous operation in the effect member driven by one drive source described so far.

  (27) A plurality of effect members that operate based on the progress of the game and a display device that displays an image, wherein the plurality of effect members are an operation mode of the first effect member and the first effect member. A plurality of effect members arranged at an edge of the display device, and the display device displays a specific image in a display area adjacent to the second effect member. A gaming machine characterized by

  (28) The first effect member and the second effect member can be operated by a driving force supplied from the same drive source, and an image showing how to hit a game ball is displayed as the specific image. (27) The gaming machine described above.

  In the inventions described in (27) to (28) above, the “plural effect member” corresponds to, for example, a decorative rotating body. The “first effect member” corresponds to, for example, a decorative rotator other than the decorative rotator 635a among the decorative rotators. Further, the “second effect member” corresponds to, for example, the decorative rotating body 635a. The “display device” corresponds to the display device 41, for example. The “one drive source” corresponds to, for example, the motor 557 or the motor 607. The “display area adjacent to the second effect member” corresponds to the upper right display area 263, for example. Further, the “image showing how to hit the game ball” is, for example, a right hit → image.

  The “synchronized operation” corresponds to, for example, that the operation direction and the operation speed are aligned, and the operation direction includes a movement direction and a rotation direction.

  The present invention is not limited to the embodiment described above, and various modifications and changes can be made within the scope of the technical idea, and it is obvious that these are also included in the technical scope of the present invention. It is. For example, it is possible to combine a plurality of embodiments. The present invention can also be applied to gaming machines such as pachislot machines other than pachinko machines.

  In addition, the embodiment disclosed this time is illustrative in all points and is not restrictive. The scope of the present invention is shown not by the above description of the invention but by the scope of claims, and is intended to include all modifications within the scope and meaning equivalent to the scope of claims.

10 gaming machine 12 front frame (game frame)
25 effect button 30 game board 32 game area 34 general start gate 35 general winning opening 36 first starting winning opening 37 second starting winning opening 39 special variable winning apparatus 40 center case 41 display device 42 third starting winning opening 80 lamp display Device 88 Colored translucent plate 89 Frequency changing member 100 Game control device 200 Payout control device 250 Inspection device 300 Production control device 400 Power supply device 500 First movable accessory unit 550 Second movable accessory unit 600 Third movable accessory unit 650 Fourth movable accessory unit 680 light guide plate (first light guide plate)
683 Light guide plate (second light guide plate)
700 fifth movable accessory unit 825 winning switch mechanism

Claims (2)

In a gaming machine that can give a player a game value based on a game result,
Game control means for controlling execution of the game;
An open / close member that can be converted between an open state and a closed state, and a variable winning device controlled by the game control means;
Production control means for controlling the production of the game;
A decorative movable member that is movable between a first position and a second position and is controlled by the effect control means;
With
The decorative movable member is
When the opening / closing member of the variable winning device is changed from the closed state to the open state, the first prize position moves to the second position,
A gaming machine, wherein when the opening / closing member of the variable prize apparatus is changed from the open state to the closed state, the game machine moves from the second position to the first position.   The predetermined movable condition is such that the decorative movable member does not move from the first position to the second position even when the opening / closing member of the variable winning device changes from the closed state to the open state. Item 1. A gaming machine according to Item 1.